Panel PC 900 (Skylake)

User's manual

Version: 1.10 (September 2022)

Order no.: MAPPC900S-EN

Translation of the original documentation

Publishing information
B&R Industrial Automation GmbH
B&R Strasse 1
5142 Eggelsberg
Austria
Telephone: +43 7748 6586-0
Fax: +43 7748 6586-26
[email protected]

Disclaimer
All information in this document is current as of its creation. The contents of this document are subject to change
without notice. B&R Industrial Automation GmbH assumes unlimited liability in particular for technical or editorial
errors in this document only (i) in the event of gross negligence or (ii) for culpably inflicted personal injury. Beyond
that, liability is excluded to the extent permitted by law. Liability in cases in which the law stipulates mandatory
unlimited liability (such as product liability) remains unaffected. Liability for indirect damage, consequential damage,
business interruption, loss of profit or loss of information and data is excluded, in particular for damage that is
directly or indirectly attributable to the delivery, performance and use of this material.
B&R Industrial Automation GmbH notes that the software and hardware designations and brand names of the
respective companies used in this document are subject to general trademark, brand or patent protection.
Hardware and software from third-party suppliers referenced in this document is subject exclusively to the respec-
tive terms of use of these third-party providers. B&R Industrial Automation GmbH assumes no liability in this regard.
Any recommendations made by B&R Industrial Automation GmbH are not contractual content, but merely non-
binding information for which no liability is assumed. When using hardware and software from third-party suppliers,
the relevant user documentation of these third-party suppliers must additionally be consulted and, in particular,
the safety guidelines and technical specifications contained therein must be observed. The compatibility of the
products from B&R Industrial Automation GmbH described in this document with hardware and software from third-
party suppliers is not contractual content unless this has been separately agreed in individual cases; in this respect,
warranty for such compatibility is excluded in any case, and it is the sole responsibility of the customer to verify
this compatibility in advance.
1581258854304-1.10
 Table of contents

1 Introduction..............................................................................................................10
1.1 Manual history...............................................................................................................................................10
1.2 Information about this document.................................................................................................................. 10
1.2.1 Organization of notices............................................................................................................................10
1.2.2 Guidelines................................................................................................................................................ 10

2 General safety guidelines...................................................................................... 11

2.1 Intended use................................................................................................................................................. 11
2.2 Protection against electrostatic discharge.................................................................................................... 11
2.2.1 Packaging................................................................................................................................................ 11
2.2.2 Regulations for proper ESD handling..................................................................................................... 11
2.3 Regulations and measures........................................................................................................................... 12
2.4 Transport and storage.................................................................................................................................. 12
2.5 Installation..................................................................................................................................................... 12
2.6 Operation.......................................................................................................................................................12
2.6.1 Protection against contact with electrical parts....................................................................................... 12
2.6.2 Ambient conditions - Dust, moisture, aggressive gases......................................................................... 13
2.6.3 Programs, viruses and malicious programs............................................................................................13
2.7 Cybersecurity disclaimer for products...........................................................................................................13

3 System overview..................................................................................................... 14
3.1 Description of individual modules................................................................................................................. 14
3.1.1 AP9x3 panels.......................................................................................................................................... 14
3.1.2 AP1000 panels........................................................................................................................................ 14
3.1.3 CPU board and system unit....................................................................................................................14
3.2 Design/Configuration..................................................................................................................................... 15
3.2.1 Base system - Configuration................................................................................................................... 16
3.2.2 Accessories and software - Configuration.............................................................................................. 17
3.2.3 Configuration options...............................................................................................................................18
3.3 Overview........................................................................................................................................................20

4 Technical data......................................................................................................... 22
4.1 Complete system.......................................................................................................................................... 22
4.1.1 Product labels.......................................................................................................................................... 22
4.1.2 Environmental properties.........................................................................................................................24
4.1.2.1 Temperature specifications................................................................................................................ 24
4.1.2.2 Humidity specifications.......................................................................................................................36
4.1.2.3 Vibration and shock........................................................................................................................... 37
4.1.2.4 Degree of protection.......................................................................................................................... 37
4.1.3 Mechanical properties..............................................................................................................................38
4.1.3.1 Dimensions.........................................................................................................................................38
4.1.3.2 Installation diagrams.......................................................................................................................... 41
4.1.3.3 Spacing for air circulation.................................................................................................................. 44
4.1.3.4 Mounting orientations.........................................................................................................................45
4.1.3.5 Weight specifications......................................................................................................................... 46
4.1.4 Electrical properties................................................................................................................................. 47
4.1.4.1 Power calculation............................................................................................................................... 47
4.1.4.2 Block diagram.................................................................................................................................... 49
4.1.5 Device interfaces and slots..................................................................................................................... 50
4.1.5.1 Overview of device interfaces............................................................................................................50
4.1.5.2 Power supply......................................................................................................................................51
4.1.5.3 Serial interfaces (COM1 and COM2)................................................................................................ 52
4.1.5.4 Panel/Monitor interface...................................................................................................................... 53
4.1.5.5 Onboard Ethernet interfaces..............................................................................................................55
4.1.5.6 USB interfaces................................................................................................................................... 56
4.1.5.7 CFast slot........................................................................................................................................... 57
4.1.5.8 Audio.................................................................................................................................................. 57
Panel PC 900 (Skylake) User's manual V 1.10 3
Table of contents

4.1.5.9 LED status indicators.........................................................................................................................58

4.1.5.10 Power button / Reset button............................................................................................................59
4.1.5.11 Battery.............................................................................................................................................. 60
4.1.5.12 Slide-in compact slot........................................................................................................................61
4.1.5.13 Slide-in slot.......................................................................................................................................61
4.1.5.14 Main memory slots...........................................................................................................................62
4.1.5.15 IF options......................................................................................................................................... 63
4.1.5.16 Card slot (PCI / PCIe)..................................................................................................................... 64
4.1.6 Layout of AP1000 display units.............................................................................................................. 65
4.1.6.1 Slide-in labels.....................................................................................................................................65
4.1.6.2 Key and LED configuration................................................................................................................66
4.1.6.3 USB interface..................................................................................................................................... 69
4.2 Individual components.................................................................................................................................. 70
4.2.1 AP9x3 panels.......................................................................................................................................... 70
4.2.1.1 5AP923.1215-00.................................................................................................................................70
4.2.1.2 5AP923.1505-00.................................................................................................................................72
4.2.1.3 5AP923.1906-00.................................................................................................................................74
4.2.1.4 5AP933.156B-00................................................................................................................................ 77
4.2.1.5 5AP933.185B-00................................................................................................................................ 79
4.2.1.6 5AP933.215C-00................................................................................................................................ 81
4.2.1.7 5AP933.240C-00................................................................................................................................ 83
4.2.2 AP1000 panels........................................................................................................................................ 86
4.2.2.1 5AP1120.1043-000.............................................................................................................................86
4.2.2.2 5AP1180.1043-000.............................................................................................................................88
4.2.2.3 5AP1181.1043-000.............................................................................................................................90
4.2.2.4 5AP1182.1043-000.............................................................................................................................93
4.2.2.5 5AP1120.1214-000.............................................................................................................................95
4.2.2.6 5AP1120.1505-000.............................................................................................................................97
4.2.2.7 5AP1180.1505-000.............................................................................................................................99
4.2.2.8 5AP1181.1505-000...........................................................................................................................101
4.2.2.9 5AP1120.156B-000.......................................................................................................................... 104
4.2.2.10 5AP1130.156C-000........................................................................................................................ 107
4.2.2.11 5AP1130.156C-001........................................................................................................................ 109
4.2.2.12 5AP1130.185C-000........................................................................................................................ 111
4.2.2.13 5AP1120.1906-000.........................................................................................................................113
4.2.3 QM170 CPU boards.............................................................................................................................. 116
4.2.3.1 5PC901.TS17-00, -01...................................................................................................................... 116
4.2.4 HM170 CPU boards.............................................................................................................................. 119
4.2.4.1 5PC901.TS17-02, -03...................................................................................................................... 119
4.2.5 System units.......................................................................................................................................... 122
4.2.5.1 5PC911.SX00-00..............................................................................................................................122
4.2.5.2 5PC911.SX00-01..............................................................................................................................123
4.2.6 Main memory......................................................................................................................................... 124
4.2.6.1 5MMDDR.xxxx-04............................................................................................................................ 124
4.2.7 Bus units................................................................................................................................................125
4.2.7.1 5AC902.BX0x-xx.............................................................................................................................. 125
4.2.8 Fan kit....................................................................................................................................................127
4.2.8.1 5AC902.FA00-00.............................................................................................................................. 127
4.2.8.2 5AC902.FA0X-00..............................................................................................................................128
4.2.9 Drives.....................................................................................................................................................129
4.2.9.1 5AC901.CHDD-01............................................................................................................................ 129
4.2.9.2 5AC901.CSSD-03............................................................................................................................ 132
4.2.9.3 5AC901.CSSD-04............................................................................................................................ 135
4.2.9.4 5AC901.CSSD-05............................................................................................................................ 138
4.2.9.5 5AC901.CSSD-06............................................................................................................................ 141
4.2.9.6 5AC901.CSSD-07............................................................................................................................ 143
4.2.9.7 5MMSSD.0060-01............................................................................................................................ 145

4 Panel PC 900 (Skylake) User's manual V 1.10

 Table of contents

4.2.9.8 5MMSSD.0128-01............................................................................................................................ 148

4.2.9.9 5MMSSD.0256-00............................................................................................................................ 151
4.2.9.10 5MMSSD.0512-00.......................................................................................................................... 154
4.2.9.11 5MMSSD.1024-00.......................................................................................................................... 156
4.2.9.12 5AC901.CHDD-99.......................................................................................................................... 158
4.2.9.13 5AC901.CCFA-00...........................................................................................................................159
4.2.9.14 5AC901.SDVW-00..........................................................................................................................160
4.2.9.15 5AC901.SSCA-00...........................................................................................................................163
4.2.10 Interface options.................................................................................................................................. 165
4.2.10.1 5AC901.I232-00............................................................................................................................. 165
4.2.10.2 5AC901.I485-00............................................................................................................................. 167
4.2.10.3 5AC901.ICAN-00............................................................................................................................170
4.2.10.4 5AC901.ICAN-01............................................................................................................................173
4.2.10.5 5AC901.ISRM-00........................................................................................................................... 175
4.2.10.6 5AC901.IPLK-00.............................................................................................................................177
4.2.10.7 5AC901.IHDA-00............................................................................................................................179
4.2.10.8 5AC901.IRDY-00............................................................................................................................181
4.2.10.9 5AC901.ISIO-00............................................................................................................................. 182
4.2.10.10 5AC901.IETH-00.......................................................................................................................... 184
4.2.11 Uninterruptible power supply (UPS).................................................................................................... 186
4.2.11.1 Requirements................................................................................................................................. 186
4.2.11.2 5AC901.IUPS-00............................................................................................................................ 187
4.2.11.3 5AC901.IUPS-01............................................................................................................................ 189
4.2.11.4 5AC901.BUPS-00...........................................................................................................................191
4.2.11.5 5AC901.BUPS-01...........................................................................................................................195
4.2.11.6 5CAUPS.xxxx-01............................................................................................................................ 199
4.2.12 Power supply....................................................................................................................................... 201
4.2.12.1 5AC902.PS00-00............................................................................................................................201

5 Installation and wiring.......................................................................................... 202

5.1 Installation and wiring................................................................................................................................. 202
5.1.1 Basic information................................................................................................................................... 202
5.1.2 Connecting to the power grid................................................................................................................203
5.1.2.1 Installing the DC power cable..........................................................................................................203
5.1.2.2 Connecting the power supply to a B&R device...............................................................................204
5.1.2.3 Grounding concept...........................................................................................................................204
5.1.2.4 Connecting cables............................................................................................................................205
5.1.3 Installing a Panel PC with an AP9x3 panel.......................................................................................... 206
5.1.4 Installing the Automation Panel 1000 with retaining clips.....................................................................207
5.1.5 Installing the Automation Panel 1000 with clamping blocks................................................................. 208
5.1.6 Installation information for separate shipments.....................................................................................209
5.1.7 Installing accessories.............................................................................................................................210
5.1.7.1 Replacing the CPU board and system unit..................................................................................... 210
5.1.7.2 Installing or replacing the AC power supply.................................................................................... 212
5.1.7.3 Replacing main memory.................................................................................................................. 214
5.1.7.4 Installing the interface option...........................................................................................................216
5.1.7.5 Installing or replacing a slide-in compact drive............................................................................... 219
5.1.7.6 Replacing the fan kit........................................................................................................................ 220
5.1.7.7 Replacing the fan filter.....................................................................................................................221
5.1.7.8 Installing the bus unit.......................................................................................................................222
5.1.7.9 Installing PCI/PCIe cards................................................................................................................. 224
5.1.7.10 Installing a slide-in drive................................................................................................................ 226
5.1.7.11 Installing and connecting the UPS battery unit..............................................................................228

6 Commissioning......................................................................................................229
6.1 Switching on the device for the first time................................................................................................... 229
6.1.1 General information before switching on the device.............................................................................229

Panel PC 900 (Skylake) User's manual V 1.10 5

Table of contents

6.1.2 Switching on the device........................................................................................................................ 229

6.2 Touch screen calibration............................................................................................................................. 230
6.2.1 Single-touch (analog resistive).............................................................................................................. 230
6.2.1.1 Windows 10 IoT Enterprise 2019 LTSC.......................................................................................... 230
6.2.2 Multi-touch (projected capacitive - PCT)...............................................................................................230
6.2.2.1 Windows 10 IoT Enterprise 2019 LTSC.......................................................................................... 230
6.3 Display brightness control...........................................................................................................................230
6.4 Configuring a SATA RAID volume with the internal RAID controller..........................................................231
6.4.1 Legacy BIOS boot................................................................................................................................. 231
6.4.1.1 Create RAID volume........................................................................................................................232
6.4.1.2 Delete RAID volume........................................................................................................................ 233
6.4.1.3 Reset disks to non-RAID................................................................................................................. 233
6.4.1.4 Recovery volume options................................................................................................................ 234
6.4.2 UEFI BIOS boot.....................................................................................................................................235
6.4.2.1 RAID volume information................................................................................................................. 236
6.4.2.2 Create RAID volume........................................................................................................................237
6.4.2.3 Delete RAID volume........................................................................................................................ 238
6.4.2.4 Reset disks to non-RAID................................................................................................................. 239
6.5 Known problems/issues.............................................................................................................................. 241

7 Software................................................................................................................. 242
7.1 BIOS options............................................................................................................................................... 242
7.1.1 General information............................................................................................................................... 242
7.1.2 BIOS Setup and start procedure...........................................................................................................242
7.1.2.1 BIOS Setup buttons......................................................................................................................... 243
7.1.3 BIOS TS17............................................................................................................................................ 244
7.1.3.1 Main..................................................................................................................................................245
7.1.3.2 Advanced..........................................................................................................................................246
7.1.3.3 Chipset............................................................................................................................................. 273
7.1.3.4 Security.............................................................................................................................................284
7.1.3.5 Boot.................................................................................................................................................. 286
7.1.3.6 Save & Exit...................................................................................................................................... 287
7.1.3.7 Allocation of resources.................................................................................................................... 288
7.2 Upgrade information....................................................................................................................................290
7.2.1 BIOS upgrade........................................................................................................................................ 290
7.2.1.1 Basic information..............................................................................................................................290
7.2.1.2 Procedure in the EFI shell............................................................................................................... 290
7.2.2 Firmware upgrade................................................................................................................................. 291
7.2.2.1 Procedure in Windows (ADI Control Center)...................................................................................291
7.2.2.2 Procedure in the EFI shell............................................................................................................... 291
7.3 Operating systems...................................................................................................................................... 292
7.3.1 Windows 10 IoT Enterprise 2019 LTSC................................................................................................292
7.3.1.1 General information..........................................................................................................................292
7.3.1.2 Order data........................................................................................................................................ 292
7.3.1.3 Overview...........................................................................................................................................292
7.3.1.4 Features........................................................................................................................................... 292
7.3.1.5 Installation........................................................................................................................................ 293
7.3.1.6 Drivers.............................................................................................................................................. 293
7.3.1.7 Activation.......................................................................................................................................... 294
7.3.1.8 Supported display resolutions..........................................................................................................294
7.3.2 B&R Linux 10 (GNU/Linux)................................................................................................................... 295
7.3.2.1 General information..........................................................................................................................295
7.3.2.2 Order data........................................................................................................................................ 295
7.3.2.3 Overview...........................................................................................................................................295
7.3.2.4 Features........................................................................................................................................... 295
7.3.2.5 Installation........................................................................................................................................ 295
7.3.2.6 Drivers.............................................................................................................................................. 295

6 Panel PC 900 (Skylake) User's manual V 1.10

 Table of contents

7.4 Automation software................................................................................................................................... 296

7.4.1 Licensing................................................................................................................................................296
7.4.2 Order data............................................................................................................................................. 296
7.4.3.1 Support............................................................................................................................................... 296
7.4.4 Automation Runtime.............................................................................................................................. 297
7.4.4.1 General information..........................................................................................................................297
7.4.4.2 Minimum versions............................................................................................................................ 297
7.4.4.3 Information about Automation Runtime operation........................................................................... 297
7.4.5 B&R Hypervisor..................................................................................................................................... 299
7.4.6 mapp Technology.................................................................................................................................. 300
7.5 Automation Device Interface (ADI)............................................................................................................. 301
7.5.1 ADI driver...............................................................................................................................................301
7.5.1.1 Installation........................................................................................................................................ 301
7.5.1.2 ADI Control Center.......................................................................................................................... 301
7.5.2 ADI Development Kit............................................................................................................................. 302
7.5.3 ADI .NET SDK.......................................................................................................................................303
7.5.4 ADI OPC UA Server..............................................................................................................................304
7.6 Key Editor....................................................................................................................................................305
7.7 KCF Editor...................................................................................................................................................306

8 Maintenance...........................................................................................................307
8.1 General instructions for the temperature test procedure............................................................................307
8.1.1 Procedure.............................................................................................................................................. 307
8.1.2 Evaluating temperatures in Windows operating systems......................................................................307
8.1.2.1 Evaluating with the B&R Control Center......................................................................................... 307
8.1.2.2 Evaluating with the BurnInTest tool from Passmark........................................................................308
8.1.3 Evaluating the measurement results.....................................................................................................309
8.2 Changing the battery.................................................................................................................................. 310
8.2.1 Procedure.............................................................................................................................................. 310
8.3 Exchanging a CFast card........................................................................................................................... 311
8.4 Cleaning...................................................................................................................................................... 312
8.5 User tips for increasing the service life of the display................................................................................312
8.5.1 Backlight................................................................................................................................................ 312
8.5.1.1 Measures to maintain backlight service life.....................................................................................312
8.5.2 Image persistence................................................................................................................................. 312
8.5.2.1 What causes image persistence?....................................................................................................312
8.5.2.2 How can image persistence be reduced?....................................................................................... 312
8.6 Pixel errors.................................................................................................................................................. 313

9 Accessories........................................................................................................... 314
9.1 Terminal block power supply...................................................................................................................... 314
9.1.1 0TB103.9x..............................................................................................................................................314
9.1.1.1 General information..........................................................................................................................314
9.1.1.2 Order data........................................................................................................................................ 314
9.1.1.3 Technical data..................................................................................................................................314
9.1.2 0TB3103.8000....................................................................................................................................... 315
9.1.2.1 General information..........................................................................................................................315
9.1.2.2 Order data........................................................................................................................................ 315
9.1.2.3 Technical data..................................................................................................................................315
9.2 Terminal block ready relay......................................................................................................................... 317
9.2.1 0TB2104.8000....................................................................................................................................... 317
9.2.1.1 General information..........................................................................................................................317
9.2.1.2 Order data........................................................................................................................................ 317
9.2.1.3 Technical data..................................................................................................................................317
9.3 Replacement CMOS batteries.................................................................................................................... 318
9.3.1 0AC201.91 / 4A0006.00-000.................................................................................................................318
9.3.1.1 General information..........................................................................................................................318

Panel PC 900 (Skylake) User's manual V 1.10 7

Table of contents

9.3.1.2 Order data........................................................................................................................................ 318

9.3.1.3 Technical data..................................................................................................................................318
9.4 PCIe plug-in cards...................................................................................................................................... 319
9.4.1 5ACPCE.ETH1-00................................................................................................................................. 319
9.4.1.1 General information..........................................................................................................................319
9.4.1.2 Order data........................................................................................................................................ 319
9.4.1.3 Technical data..................................................................................................................................319
9.4.1.4 Driver support...................................................................................................................................320
9.4.1.5 Dimensions.......................................................................................................................................321
9.4.2 5ACPCE.ETH4-00................................................................................................................................. 322
9.4.2.1 General information..........................................................................................................................322
9.4.2.2 Order data........................................................................................................................................ 322
9.4.2.3 Technical data..................................................................................................................................322
9.4.2.4 Driver support...................................................................................................................................323
9.4.2.5 Correction of the problem................................................................................................................ 323
9.4.2.6 Dimensions.......................................................................................................................................324
9.5 CFast cards.................................................................................................................................................325
9.6 Cables......................................................................................................................................................... 325
9.7 USB mass storage device.......................................................................................................................... 325

10 International and national certifications...........................................................326

10.1 Directives and declarations.......................................................................................................................326
10.1.1 CE marking.......................................................................................................................................... 326
10.1.2 EMC Directive......................................................................................................................................326
10.1.3 Low voltage directive...........................................................................................................................326
10.2 Certifications..............................................................................................................................................327
10.2.1 UL certification..................................................................................................................................... 327
10.2.2 GOST-R............................................................................................................................................... 327
10.2.3 EAC......................................................................................................................................................327
10.2.4 KC........................................................................................................................................................ 328
10.2.5 RCM.....................................................................................................................................................328
10.2.6 Certifications for use in potentially explosive environments................................................................328
10.2.6.1 UL Haz. Loc. Certifications............................................................................................................ 328

11 Environmentally friendly disposal.....................................................................332

11.1 Separation of materials............................................................................................................................. 332
A.1 Maintenance Controller Extended (MTCX)................................................................................................ 333
A.A POWERLINK.............................................................................................................................................. 334
A.A.1 LED "S/E" (status/error LED)............................................................................................................... 334
A.A.1.1 Ethernet mode.................................................................................................................................334
A.A.1.2 POWERLINK V2 mode................................................................................................................... 334
A.A.1.3 System stop error codes.................................................................................................................336
A.A.1.4 POWERLINK V2............................................................................................................................. 336
A.B Cable data.................................................................................................................................................. 337
A.B.1 RS232 - Bus length and cable type..................................................................................................... 337
A.B.2 RS422 - Bus length and cable type..................................................................................................... 337
A.B.3 RS485 - Bus length and cable type..................................................................................................... 338
A.B.4 CAN - Bus length and cable type........................................................................................................ 338
A.C Abbreviations..............................................................................................................................................338
A.D Viewing angles........................................................................................................................................... 339
A.E Chemical resistance................................................................................................................................... 340
A.E.1 Autotex panel overlay (polyester).........................................................................................................340
A.E.2 Aluminum panel overlay....................................................................................................................... 341
A.E.3 Coated aluminum front......................................................................................................................... 341
A.E.4 Touch screen........................................................................................................................................ 342
A.F Touch screen.............................................................................................................................................. 343
A.F.1 Touch screen (multi-touch generation 2).............................................................................................. 343

8 Panel PC 900 (Skylake) User's manual V 1.10

 Table of contents

A.F.1.1 General information......................................................................................................................... 343

A.F.1.2 Technical data..................................................................................................................................343
A.F.1.3 Temperature/Humidity diagram....................................................................................................... 343
A.F.2 Touch screen (multi-touch generation 3).............................................................................................. 344
A.F.2.1 General information......................................................................................................................... 344
A.F.2.2 Technical data..................................................................................................................................344
A.F.2.3 Temperature/Humidity diagram....................................................................................................... 344
A.F.3 5-wire touch screen (single-touch)........................................................................................................345
A.F.3.1 Technical data..................................................................................................................................345
A.F.3.2 Temperature/Humidity diagram....................................................................................................... 345
A.G Installation compatibility............................................................................................................................. 346
A.G.1 Compatibility overview..........................................................................................................................346
A.G.2 Compatibility details..............................................................................................................................348
A.G.2.1 Example.......................................................................................................................................... 348
A.G.2.2 5.7" devices.................................................................................................................................... 348
A.G.2.3 10.4" devices.................................................................................................................................. 350
A.G.2.4 12.1" devices.................................................................................................................................. 352
A.G.2.5 15" devices..................................................................................................................................... 353
A.G.2.6 17" devices..................................................................................................................................... 354
A.G.2.7 19" devices..................................................................................................................................... 354
A.G.2.8 21.3" devices.................................................................................................................................. 355

Panel PC 900 (Skylake) User's manual V 1.10 9

Introduction

1 Introduction

Information:
B&R makes every effort to keep documents as current as possible. The most current versions are
available for download on the B&R website (www.br-automation.com).

1.1 Manual history

Version Date Change
1.10 September 2022 Updated the following chapters:
• "+24 VDC power supply" on page 51
• "Replacing the fan kit" on page 220
• "Environmental properties" on page 24
• "Mounting orientations" on page 45
1.00 April 2021 • First version

1.2 Information about this document

This document is not intended for end customers! The safety guidelines required for end customers
must be incorporated into the operating instructions for end customers in the respective national lan-
guage by the machine manufacturer or system provider.

1.2.1 Organization of notices

Safety notices
Contain only information that warns of dangerous functions or situations.
Signal word Description
Danger! Failure to observe these safety guidelines and notices will result in death, severe injury or substantial damage to property.
Warning! Failure to observe these safety guidelines and notices can result in death, severe injury or substantial damage to property.
Caution! Failure to observe these safety guidelines and notices can result in minor injury or damage to property.
Notice! Failure to observe these safety guidelines and notices can result in damage to property.

General notices
Contain useful information for users and instructions for avoiding malfunctions.
Signal word Description
Information: Useful information, application tips and instructions for avoiding malfunctions.

1.2.2 Guidelines

European dimension standards apply to all dimension diagrams.

All dimensions in millimeters.

Unless otherwise specified, the following general tolerances apply:
Nominal dimension range General tolerance per
DIN ISO 2768 medium
Up to 6 mm ±0.1 mm
Over 6 to 30 mm ±0.2 mm
Over 30 to 120 mm ±0.3 mm
Over 120 to 400 mm ±0.5 mm
Over 400 to 1000 mm ±0.8 mm

10 Panel PC 900 (Skylake) User's manual V 1.10

 General safety guidelines

2 General safety guidelines

2.1 Intended use

In all cases, it is necessary to observe and comply with applicable national and international standards, regulations
and safety measures!

The B&R products described in this manual are intended for use in industry and industrial applications.
The intended use includes control, operation, monitoring, drive and HMI tasks as part of automation processes
in machines and systems.
B&R products are only permitted to be used in their original condition. Modifications and extensions are only per-
mitted if they are described in this manual.
B&R excludes liability for damage of any kind resulting from the use of B&R products in any intended way.

B&R products have not been designed, developed and manufactured for use that involves fatal risks or hazards
that could result in death, injury, serious physical harm or other loss without the assurance of exceptionally stringent
safety precautions.
B&R products are explicitly not intended for use in the following applications:
• Monitoring and control of thermonuclear processes
• Weapon systems control
• Flight and traffic control systems for passenger and freight transport
• Health monitoring and life support systems

2.2 Protection against electrostatic discharge

Electrical assemblies that can be damaged by electrostatic discharge (ESD) must be handled accordingly.

2.2.1 Packaging
• Electrical assemblies with housing:
Do not require special ESD packaging but must be handled properly (see "Electrical assemblies with hous-
ing").
• Electrical assemblies without housing:
Are protected by ESD-suitable packaging.

2.2.2 Regulations for proper ESD handling

Electrical assemblies with housing

• Do not touch the connector contacts of connected cables.
• Do not touch the contact tips on circuit boards.

Electrical assemblies without housing

The following applies in addition to "Electrical assemblies with housing":
• All persons handling electrical assemblies and devices in which electrical assemblies are installed must
be grounded.
• Assemblies are only permitted to be touched on the narrow sides or front plate.
• Always place assemblies on suitable surfaces (ESD packaging, conductive foam, etc.). Metallic surfaces
are not suitable surfaces!
• Assemblies must not be subjected to electrostatic discharges (e.g. due to charged plastics).
• A minimum distance of 10 cm from monitors or television sets must be maintained.

Panel PC 900 (Skylake) User's manual V 1.10 11

General safety guidelines

• Measuring instruments and devices must be grounded.

• Test probes of floating potential measuring instruments must be discharged briefly on suitable grounded
surfaces before measurement.

Individual components
• ESD protective measures for individual components are implemented throughout B&R (conductive floors,
shoes, wrist straps, etc.).
• The increased ESD protective measures for individual components are not required for handling B&R
products at customer locations.

2.3 Regulations and measures

Electronic devices are generally not failsafe. If the programmable logic controller, operating or control device or
uninterruptible power supply fails, the user is responsible for ensuring that connected devices (such as motors)
are brought to a safe state.
When using programmable logic controllers as well as when using operating and monitoring devices as control
systems in conjunction with a Soft PLC (e.g. B&R Automation Runtime or similar product) or Slot PLC (e.g. B&R
LS251 or similar product), the safety measures that apply to industrial controllers (protection by protective equip-
ment such as emergency stops) must be observed in accordance with applicable national and international regu-
lations. This also applies to all other connected devices, such as drives.
All work such as installation, commissioning and servicing are only permitted to be carried out by qualified person-
nel. Qualified personnel are persons who are familiar with the transport, installation, assembly, commissioning and
operation of the product and have the appropriate qualifications for their job (e.g. IEC 60364). National accident
prevention regulations must be observed.
The safety guidelines, information about connection conditions (nameplate and documentation) and limit values
specified in the technical data must be read carefully before installation and commissioning and must be strictly
observed.

2.4 Transport and storage

During transport and storage, devices must be protected against undue stress (mechanical stress, temperature,
humidity, aggressive atmosphere).

2.5 Installation
• The devices are not ready for use and must be installed and wired according to the requirements of this
documentation in order to comply with EMC limit values.
• Installation must be carried out according to the documentation using suitable equipment and tools.
• Devices are only permitted to be installed in a voltage-free state and by qualified personnel. The control
cabinet must first be disconnected from the power supply and secured against being switched on again.
• General safety regulations and national accident prevention regulations must be observed.
• The electrical installation must be carried out in accordance with relevant regulations (e.g. line cross section,
fuse protection, protective ground connection).

2.6 Operation
2.6.1 Protection against contact with electrical parts

In order to operate programmable logic controllers, operating and monitoring devices and uninterruptible power
supplies, it is necessary for certain components to carry dangerous voltages over 42 VDC. Touching one of these
components can result in a life-threatening electric shock. There is a risk of death, serious injury or damage to
property.
Before switching on programmable logic controllers, operating and monitoring devices and uninterruptible power
supplies, it must be ensured that the housing is properly connected to ground potential (PE rail). Ground connec-
tions must also be made if the operating and monitoring device and uninterruptible power supply are only connect-
ed for testing purposes or only operated for a short time!
Before switching on, live parts must be securely covered. All covers must be kept closed during operation.

12 Panel PC 900 (Skylake) User's manual V 1.10

 General safety guidelines

2.6.2 Ambient conditions - Dust, moisture, aggressive gases

The use of operating and monitoring devices (e.g. industrial PCs, Power Panels, Mobile Panels) and uninterruptible
power supplies in dusty environments must be avoided. This can otherwise result in dust deposits that affect the
functionality of the device, especially in systems with active cooling (fans), which may no longer ensure sufficient
cooling.
The presence of aggressive gases in the environment can also result in malfunctions. In combination with high
temperature and relative humidity, aggressive gases – for example with sulfur, nitrogen and chlorine components
– trigger chemical processes that can very quickly impair or damage electronic components. Blackened copper
surfaces and cable ends in existing installations are indicators of aggressive gases.
When operated in rooms with dust and condensation that can endanger functionality, operating and monitoring
devices such as Automation Panels or Power Panels are protected on the front against the ingress of dust and
moisture when installed correctly (e.g. cutout installation). The back of all devices must be protected against the
ingress of dust and moisture, however, or the dust deposits must be removed at suitable intervals.

2.6.3 Programs, viruses and malicious programs

Any data exchange or installation of software using data storage media (e.g. floppy disk, CD-ROM, USB flash
drive) or via networks or the Internet poses a potential threat to the system. It is the direct responsibility of the user
to avert these dangers and to take appropriate measures such as virus protection programs and firewalls to protect
against them and to use only software from trustworthy sources.

2.7 Cybersecurity disclaimer for products

B&R products communicate via a network interface and were developed for secure connection with internal and,
if necessary, other networks such as the Internet.

Information:
In the following, B&R products are referred to as "product" and all types of networks (e.g. internal
networks and the Internet) are referred to as "network".
It is the sole responsibility of the customer to establish and continuously ensure a secure connection between
the product and the network. In addition, appropriate security measures must be implemented and maintained
to protect the product and entire network from any security breaches, unauthorized access, interference, digital
intrusion, data leakage and/or theft of data or information.
B&R Industrial Automation GmbH and its subsidiaries are not liable for damages and/or losses in connection
with security breaches, unauthorized access, interference, digital intrusion, data leakage and/or theft of data or
information.
The aforementioned appropriate security measures include, for example:
• Segmentation of the network (e.g. separation of the IT network from the control network1))
• Use of firewalls
• Use of authentication mechanisms
• Encryption of data
• Use of anti-malware software
Before B&R releases products or updates, they are subjected to appropriate functional testing. Independently of
this, we recommend that our customers develop their own test processes in order to be able to check the effects
of changes in advance. Such changes include, for example:
• Installation of product updates
• Significant system modifications such as configuration changes
• Deployment of updates or patches for third-party software (non-B&R software)
• Hardware replacement
These tests should ensure that implemented security measures remain effective and that systems in the customer's
environment behave as expected.

1) The term "control network" refers to computer networks used to connect control systems. The control network can be divided into zones, and there can be
several separate control networks within a company or site. The term "control systems" refers to all types of B&R products such as controllers (e.g. X20), HMI
systems (e.g. Power Panel T30), process control systems (e.g. APROL) and supporting systems such as engineering workstations with Automation Studio.

Panel PC 900 (Skylake) User's manual V 1.10 13

System overview

3 System overview

3.1 Description of individual modules

3.1.1 AP9x3 panels

AP9x3 panels form the basis for the Automation Panel 9x3, Panel PC 900,
Panel PC 2100, Panel PC 2200 and Panel PC 3100 system families. They
consist of a display and touch screen. Different display diagonals and touch
screen technologies are available. The panels are installed using retaining
clips.
Single-touch panels start with order number 5AP923.xxxx-xx; multi-touch
panels start with order number 5AP933.xxxx-xx.
The panels can only be operated as a complete system in combination with
a link module or Panel PC.

3.1.2 AP1000 panels

AP1000 panels form the basis for the Automation Panel 1000, Panel PC
900, Panel PC 2100, Panel PC 2200 and Panel PC 3100 system families.
Different display diagonals and touch screentechnologies as well as panels
with touch screen and keys are available.
Panels are installed using retaining clips or clamping blocks.
The panels can only be operated as a complete system in combination with
a link module or Panel PC.

3.1.3 CPU board and system unit

In addition to making it possible to insert interface options, slide-in compact

drives and CFast cards, the CPU board also includes all of the PPC900's
interfaces.
A system unit consists of an anthracite gray housing and heat sink. Both
passive variants (without a fan kit) and active variants (with a fan kit) are
available.
An operational Panel PC 900 is assembled by installing a CPU board, sys-
tem unit, main memory and mass storage device on a display unit. Panel
PC 900 systems are mounted using retaining clips.
A CPU board and system unit cannot function without a display unit.

14 Panel PC 900 (Skylake) User's manual V 1.10

 System overview

3.2 Design/Configuration
Automation Panel 9x3, Automation Panel 1000, Panel PC 900, Panel PC 2100, Panel PC 2200 and Panel PC
3100 systems can be assembled to meet individual requirements and operating conditions. Automation Panel 9x3,
Panel PC 900, Panel PC 2100, Panel PC 2200 and Panel PC 3100 systems are flexible so that an Automation
Panel can be converted to a Panel PC or vice versa.
The following individual components are mandatory for operation as a Panel PC 900:
• Panel
• CPU board
• System unit
• Main memory
• Fan kit2)
• Drive (mass storage device such as CFast card or hard disk) for the operating system
• Operating system

2) The use of a fan kit may be necessary under certain conditions. For additional information, see section "Maximum ambient temperature for worst-case opera-
tion" on page 25.

Panel PC 900 (Skylake) User's manual V 1.10 15

System overview

3.2.1 Base system - Configuration

Panel PC 900 systems can be operated with or without a fan kit. This choice plays a role in determining the type
of housing to be used.
Using a fan kit allows for operation at higher ambient temperatures. For additional information, see section "Maxi-
mum ambient temperature for worst-case operation" on page 25.
Base system - Configuration
Panels Select 1
Diagonal Resolution Touch screen Keys Format
923 panels
5AP923.1215-00 12.1" XGA Single-touch No Landscape
5AP923.1505-00 15.0" XGA Single-touch No Landscape
5AP923.1906-00 19.0" SXGA Single-touch No Landscape
933 panels
5AP933.156B-00 15.6" HD Multi-touch No Landscape
5AP933.185B-00 18.5" HD Multi-touch No Landscape
5AP933.215C-00 21.5" FHD Multi-touch No Landscape
5AP933.240C-00 24.0" FHD Multi-touch No Landscape
1120 panels
5AP1120.1043-000 10.4" VGA Single-touch No Landscape
5AP1120.1214-000 12.1" SVGA Single-touch No Landscape
5AP1120.1505-000 15.0" XGA Single-touch No Landscape
5AP1120.156B-000 15.6" HD Single-touch No Landscape
5AP1120.1906-000 19.0" SXGA Single-touch No Landscape
1130 panels
5AP1130.156C-000 15.6" Full HD Multi-touch No Landscape
5AP1130.156C-001 15.6" Full HD Multi-touch No Landscape
5AP1130.185C-000 18.5" Full HD Multi-touch No Landscape
1180 panels
5AP1180.1043-000 10.4" VGA Single-touch Yes Landscape
5AP1180.1505-000 15.0" XGA Single-touch Yes Landscape
1181 panels
5AP1181.1043-000 10.4" FHD Single-touch Yes Portrait
5AP1181.1505-000 15.0" XGA Single-touch Yes Landscape
1182 panels
5AP1182.1043-000 10.4 VGA Single-touch Yes Landscape
CPU board Select 1
QM170 CPU boards
5PC901.TS17-001)
5PC901.TS17-011)
HM170 CPU boards2)
5PC901.TS17-02
5PC901.TS17-03
System unit Select 1

5PC911.SX00-00 (system active) 5PC911.SX00-01 (system passive)

Fan kit Select 1

5AC902.FA00-001)

Main memory Select max. 2

5MMDDR.4096-04
5MMDDR.8192-04
5MMDDR.016G-04

1) CPU boards 5PC901.TS17-00 and 5PC901.TS17-01 as well as fan kit 5AC902.FA00-00 can only be operated with system unit 5PC911.SX00-00.
2) The following applies when operated without a fan kit:

• CPU board 5PC901.TS17-02 is limited to a maximum CPU frequency of 1900 MHz.

• CPU board 5PC901.TS17-03 is limited to a maximum CPU frequency of 1700 MHz.

16 Panel PC 900 (Skylake) User's manual V 1.10

 System overview

3.2.2 Accessories and software - Configuration

Accessories and software - Configuration
Power supply unit Select 1

5AC902.PS00-00

Slide-in compact drives Select 1

5AC901.CHDD-01 5AC901.CSSD-05
5AC901.CSSD-03 5AC901.CSSD-06
5AC901.CSSD-04 5AC901.CCFA-00
IF options Select max. 21)
5AC901.I232-00 5AC901.ISRM-00
5AC901.I485-00 5AC901.IPLK-00
5AC901.ICAN-00 5AC901.IRDY-00
5AC901.ICAN-01 5AC901.ISIO-00
5AC901.IHDA-00 5AC901.IETH-00
UPS Select 1
UPS module 2) + Battery unit + UPS cable
5AC901.IUPS-00 5AC901.BUPS-00 5CAUPS.0005-01
5AC901.IUPS-01 5AC901.BUPS-01 5CAUPS.0010-01
5CAUPS.0013-01
5CAUPS.0030-01
Bus units Select 1

5AC902.BX01-00 (bus 1PCI 1SI)

5AC902.BX01-01 (bus 1PCIe.x8 1SI)
5AC902.BX02-00 (bus 2PCI 1SI)
5AC902.BX02-01 (bus 1PCI 1PCIe.x8 1SI)
5AC902.BX02-02 (bus 2PCIe.x4 1SI)

Slide-in drives Select max. 1

5AC901.SDVW-00
5AC901.SSCA-00

Fan kit3) Select max. 1

5AC902.FA0X-00

CFast cards Select 1

5CFAST.2048-00 5CFAST.032G-00
5CFAST.4096-00 5CFAST.032G-10
5CFAST.8192-00 5CFAST.064G-10
5CFAST.016G-00 5CFAST.128G-10
5CFAST.256G-10

PCIe cards Select 14)

5ACPCE.ETH1-00
5ACPCE.ETH4-00
USB accessories Select 1
5MMUSB.2048-01
5MMUSB.4096-01
5MMUSB.032G-02
5MMUSB.4096-02
Terminal blocks Select 1
DC power supply connector
AC power supply connector
0TB103.9
0TB3103.8000
0TB103.91
Operating systems Select 1
Windows 10 B&R Linux 10 Automation Runtime
5SWW10.1064-MUL 5SWLIN.0864-MUL 0TG1000.01
5SWW10.1164-MUL 0TG1000.02
1TG4601.06-5
B&R Hypervisor
1TG4700.00

1) Certain limitations must be taken into account when using IF options. For additional information, refer to section "Device interfaces" (see "Device interfaces
and slots" on page 50).
2) The UPS module can only be operated in the IF option 1 slot.
3) If using an active system unit, then a fan kit must be selected for the bus unit.
4) Required = PCIe bus

Panel PC 900 (Skylake) User's manual V 1.10 17

System overview

3.2.3 Configuration options

Panel PC 900 without bus unit:

Panel PC 900 Panel PC 900 with power supply

Figure 1: Panel PC 900 without bus unit

Panel PC 900 with 1-slot bus unit:

Panel PC 900 with 1-slot bus unit Panel PC 900 with 1-slot bus unit and power supply

Figure 2: Panel PC 900 with 1-slot bus unit

18 Panel PC 900 (Skylake) User's manual V 1.10

 System overview

Panel PC 900 with 2-slot bus unit:

Panel PC 900 with 2-slot bus unit Panel PC 900 with 2-slot bus unit and power supply

Figure 3: Panel PC 900 with 2-slot bus unit

Panel PC 900 (Skylake) User's manual V 1.10 19

System overview

3.3 Overview
Order number Short description Page
Accessories
0TB103.9 Connector 24 VDC - 3-pin, female - Screw clamp terminal block 3.31 mm² 314
0TB103.91 Connector 24 VDC - 3-pin, female - Cage clamp terminal block 3.31 mm² 314
B&R Linux 10
5SWLIN.0864-MUL B&R Linux 10 - 64-bit - Multilingual - PPC900 chipset QM170/HM170 (UEFI boot) - Installation - Only available 295
with a new device
Batteries
0AC201.91 Lithium batteries 4 pcs., 3 V / 950 mAh button cell 318
4A0006.00-000 Lithium battery, 3 V / 950 mAh, button cell 318
Bus units
5AC902.BX01-00 PPC900 bus unit, 1-slot - 1 PCI - 1 slide-in 126
5AC902.BX01-01 PPC900 bus unit, 1-slot - 1 PCI Express x8 - 1 slide-in 126
5AC902.BX02-00 PPC900 bus unit, 2-slot - 2 PCI - 1 slide-in 126
5AC902.BX02-01 PPC900 2-slot bus unit - 1 PCI - 1 PCI Express x8 - 1 slide-in 126
5AC902.BX02-02 PPC900 bus unit, 2-slot - 2 PCI Express x4 - 1 slide-in 126
CPU boards
5PC901.TS17-00 CPU board Intel Core i7 6820EQ 2.8 GHz - Quad core - QM170 chipset - For Panel PC 900 116
5PC901.TS17-01 CPU board Intel Core i5 6440EQ 2.7 GHz - Quad core - QM170 chipset - For Panel PC 900 116
5PC901.TS17-02 CPU board Intel Core i3 6100E - Dual core - HM170 chipset - 2.7 GHz active, 1.9 GHz passive - For Panel 119
PC 900
5PC901.TS17-03 CPU board Intel Celeron G3900E - Dual core - HM170 chipset - 2.4 GHz active, 1.7 GHz passive - For Panel 119
PC 900
Drives
5AC901.CCFA-00 CFast adapter - For slide-in compact slot 159
5AC901.CHDD-01 500 GB hard disk - Slide-in compact - SATA 129
5AC901.CHDD-99 Slide-in compact kit 158
5AC901.CSSD-03 60 GB SSD MLC - Slide-in compact - SATA 132
5AC901.CSSD-04 128 GB SSD MLC - Slide-in compact - Innodisk - SATA 135
5AC901.CSSD-05 256 GB SSD MLC - Slide-in compact - Innodisk - SATA 138
5AC901.CSSD-06 512 GB SSD MLC - Slide-in compact - Innodisk - SATA 141
5AC901.CSSD-07 1 TB SSD MLC - Slide-in compact - Innodisk - SATA 143
5AC901.SDVW-00 DVD drive - DVD-R/RW|DVD+R/RW - Slide-in 160
5AC901.SSCA-00 Slide-in compact adapter - For slide-in compact drives 163
5MMSSD.0060-01 60 GB SSD MLC - Intel - SATA 145
5MMSSD.0128-01 128 GB SSD MLC - Innodisk - SATA 148
5MMSSD.0256-00 256 GB SSD MLC - Innodisk - SATA 151
5MMSSD.0512-00 512 GB SSD MLC - Innodisk - SATA 154
5MMSSD.1024-00 1 TB SSD MLC - Innodisk - SATA 156
Fan kit
5AC902.FA00-00 PPC900 fan kit - For system unit 5PC911.SX00-00 127
5AC902.FA0X-00 PPC900 fan kit - For PPC900 bus unit 128
Hypervisor
1TC4700.00 License for B&R Hypervisor (TC). One license per target system is required. 296
Interface options
5AC901.I232-00 Interface card - 1x RS232 interface - For APC910/PPC900/APC3100/PPC3100 165
5AC901.I485-00 Interface card - 1x RS232/RS422/RS485 interface - For APC910/PPC900/APC3100/PPC3100 167
5AC901.ICAN-00 Interface card - 1x CAN interface - For APC910/PPC900/APC3100/PPC3100 170
5AC901.ICAN-01 Interface card - 1x CAN interface (SJA1000) - For APC910/PPC900/APC3100/PPC3100 173
5AC901.IETH-00 Interface card - 1x ETH 10/100/1000 - For APC910/PPC900/APC3100/PPC3100 184
5AC901.IHDA-00 Interface card - 1x audio interface (1x MIC / 1x Line In / 1x OUT) - For APC910/PPC900/APC3100/PPC3100 179
5AC901.IPLK-00 Interface card - 1x POWERLINK interface - 2 MB SRAM - For APC910/PPC900/APC3100/PPC3100 177
5AC901.IRDY-00 Interface card - Ready relay - For APC910/PPC900/APC3100/PPC3100 181
5AC901.ISIO-00 Interface card - System I/O - For APC910/PPC900/APC3100/PPC3100 182
5AC901.ISRM-00 Interface card - 2 MB SRAM - For APC910/PPC900/APC3100/PPC3100 175
5ACPCE.ETH1-00 PCIe carte - 1x ETH 10/100/1000 - For APC910/PPC900 319
5ACPCE.ETH4-00 PCIe card - 4-port ETH 10/100/1000 - For APC910/PPC900 322
Main memory
5MMDDR.016G-04 SO-DIMM DDR4, 16384 MB 124
5MMDDR.4096-04 SO-DIMM DDR4, 4096 MB 124
5MMDDR.8192-04 SO-DIMM DDR4, 8192 MB 124
Panels
5AP1120.1043-000 Automation Panel 10.4" VGA TFT - 640 x 480 pixels (4:3) - Single-touch (analog resistive) - Control cabinet 86
installation - Landscape format - Front USB - For PPC900/PPC2100/PPC3100/PPC2200 - For link modules -
Compatible with 5PP520.1043-00
5AP1120.1214-000 Automation Panel 12.1" SVGA TFT - 800 x 600 pixels (4:3) - Single-touch (analog resistive) - Control cabinet 95
installation - Landscape format - Front USB - For PPC900/PPC2100/PPC3100/PPC2200 - For link modules -
Compatible with 5PP520.1214-00
5AP1120.1505-000 Automation Panel 15.0" XGA TFT - 1024 x 768 pixels (4:3) - Single-touch (analog resistive) - Control cabinet 97
installation - Landscape format - Front USB - For PPC900/PPC2100/PPC3100/PPC2200 - For link modules -
Compatible with 5PP520.1505-00, 5AP920.1505-01, 5PC720.1505-xx, 5PC820.1505-00
5AP1120.156B-000 Automation Panel 15.6" HD TFT - 1366 x 768 pixels (16:9) - Single-touch (analog resistive) - Control cabinet 104
installation - Landscape format - For PPC900/PPC2100/PPC3100/PPC2200 - For link modules

20 Panel PC 900 (Skylake) User's manual V 1.10

 System overview
Order number Short description Page
5AP1120.1906-000 Automation Panel 19.0" SXGA TFT - 1280 x 1024 pixels (5:4) - Single-touch (analog resistive) - Control cabinet 113
installation - Landscape format - Front USB - For PPC900/PPC2100/PPC3100/PPC2200 - For link modules -
Compatible with 5AP920.1906-01, 5PC720.1906-00, 5PC820.1906-00
5AP1130.156C-000 Automation Panel 15.6" Full HD TFT - 1920 x 1080 pixels (16:9) - Multi-touch (projected capacitive) - Control 107
cabinet installation - Landscape format - For PPC900/PPC2100/PPC3100/PPC2200 - For link modules
5AP1130.156C-001 Automation Panel 15.6" Full HD TFT - 1920 x 1080 pixels (16:9) - Multi-touch (projected capacitive) - Control 109
cabinet installation - Landscape format - Optical bonding - For PPC900/PPC2100/PPC3100/PPC2200 - For
link modules
5AP1130.185C-000 Automation Panel 18.5" Full HD TFT - 1920 x 1080 pixels (16:9) - Multi-touch (projected capacitive) - Control 111
cabinet installation - Landscape format - For PPC900/PPC2100/PPC3100/PPC2200 - For link modules
5AP1180.1043-000 Automation Panel 10.4" VGA TFT - 640 x 480 pixels (4:3) - Single-touch (analog resistive) - Control cabinet 88
installation - Landscape format - Front USB - 22 function keys - For PPC900/PPC2100/PPC3100/PPC2200 -
For link modules - Compatible with 5PP580.1043-00, 5AP980.1043-01
5AP1180.1505-000 Automation Panel 15.0" XGA TFT - 1024 x 768 pixels (4:3) - Single-touch (analog resistive) - Control cabinet 99
installation - Landscape format - Front USB - 32 function keys - For PPC900/PPC2100/PPC3100/PPC2200 -
For link modules - Compatible with 5PP580.1505-00, 5AP980.1505-01
5AP1181.1043-000 Automation Panel 10.4" VGA TFT - 640 x 480 pixels (4:3) - Single-touch (analog resistive) - Control cabinet in- 90
stallation - Portrait format - Front USB - 38 function keys and 20 system keys - For PPC900/PPC2100/PPC3100/
PPC2200 - For link modules - Compatible with 5PP581.1043-00, 5AP981.1043-01, 5PC781.1043-00
5AP1181.1505-000 Automation Panel 15" XGA TFT - 1024 x 768 pixels (4:3) - Single-touch (analog resistive) - Control cabinet 101
installation - Landscape format - Front USB - 32 function keys and 92 system keys - For PPC900/PPC2100/
PPC3100/PPC2200 - For link modules - Compatible with 5PP581.1505-000
5AP1182.1043-000 Automation Panel 10.4" VGA TFT - 640 x 480 pixels (4:3) - Single-touch (analog resistive) - Control cabinet 93
installation - Landscape format - Front USB - 44 function keys and 20 system keys - For PPC900/PPC2100/
PPC3100/PPC2200 - For link modules - Compatible with 5PP582.1043-00, 5AP982.1043-01, 5PC782.1043-00
5AP923.1215-00 Automation Panel 12.1" XGA TFT - 1024 x 768 pixels (4:3) - Single-touch (analog resistive) - Control cabinet 70
installation - Landscape format - For PPC900/PPC2100/PPC3100/PPC2200 - For link modules
5AP923.1505-00 Automation Panel 15.0" XGA TFT - 1024 x 768 pixels (4:3) - Single-touch (analog resistive) - Control cabinet 72
installation - Landscape format - For PPC900/PPC2100/PPC3100/PPC2200 - For link modules
5AP923.1906-00 Automation Panel 19.0" SXGA TFT - 1280 x 1024 pixels (5:4) - Single-touch (analog resistive) - Control cabinet 74
installation - Landscape format - For PPC900/PPC2100/PPC3100/PPC2200 - For link modules
5AP933.156B-00 Automation Panel 15.6" HD TFT - 1366 x 768 pixels (16:9) - Multi-touch (projected capacitive) - Control cabinet 77
installation - Landscape format - For PPC900/PPC2100/PPC3100/PPC2200 - For link modules
5AP933.185B-00 Automation Panel 18.5" HD TFT - 1366 x 768 pixels (16:9) - Multi-touch (projected capacitive) - Control cabinet 79
installation - Landscape format - For PPC900/PPC2100/PPC3100/PPC2200 - For link modules
5AP933.215C-00 Automation Panel 21.5" Full HD TFT - 1920 x 1080 pixels (16:9) - Multi-touch (projected capacitive) - Control 81
cabinet installation - Landscape format - For PPC900/PPC2100/PPC3100/PPC2200 - For link modules
5AP933.240C-00 Automation Panel 24.0" Full HD TFT - 1920 x 1080 pixels (16:9) - Multi-touch (projected capacitive) - Control 83
cabinet installation - Landscape format - For PPC900/PPC2100/PPC3100/PPC2200 - For link modules
Power supply unit
5AC902.PS00-00 PPC900 power supply 85-264 VAC 201
Runtime
1TC4601.06-5 License for Automation Runtime Embedded (TC). One license per target system is required. 296
System units
5PC911.SX00-00 PPC900 active system unit 122
5PC911.SX00-01 PPC900 passive system unit 123
Technology Guard
0TG1000.01 Technology Guard (MSD) 296
0TG1000.02 Technology Guard (HID) 296
0TGF016.01 Technology Guard (MSD) with integrated flash drive, 16 GB (MLC) 296
1TG4601.06-5 Automation Runtime Embedded, TG license 296
1TG4601.06-T Automation Runtime Embedded Terminal TG license 296
1TG4700.00 B&R Hypervisor 296
Terminal blocks
0TB2104.8000 Connector 24 VDC - 4-pin female - Screw clamp terminal block 2.5 mm² 317
0TB3103.8000 Connector 230 VAC - 3-pin female - Screw clamp terminal block 4 mm² - Protected against vibration by the 315
screw flange
Uninterruptible power supply
5AC901.BUPS-00 Battery unit 4.5 Ah - For UPS 5AC901.IUPS-00 191
5AC901.BUPS-01 Battery unit 2.2 Ah - For UPS 5AC901.IUPS-01 195
5AC901.IUPS-00 UPS - For 4.5 Ah battery 187
5AC901.IUPS-01 UPS - For 2.2 Ah battery 189
5CAUPS.0005-01 UPS cable - 0.5 m - For 5AC901.IUPS-xx 199
5CAUPS.0010-01 UPS cable - 1 m - For 5AC901.IUPS-xx 199
5CAUPS.0013-01 UPS cable - 1.3 m - For 5AC901.IUPS-xx 199
5CAUPS.0030-01 UPS cable - 3 m - For 5AC901.IUPS-xx 199
Windows 10 IoT Enterprise 2019 LTSC
5SWW10.1064-MUL Windows 10 IoT Enterprise 2019 LTSC - 64-bit - Value - Multilingual - PPC900 chipset QM170/HM170 (UEFI 292
boot) - CPU Celeron/Core i3/Core i5 - License - Only available with a new device
5SWW10.1164-MUL Windows 10 IoT Enterprise 2019 LTSC - 64-bit - High End - Multilingual - PPC900 chipset QM170 (UEFI boot) 292
- CPU Core i7 - License - Only available with a new device

Panel PC 900 (Skylake) User's manual V 1.10 21

Technical data

4 Technical data

4.1 Complete system

4.1.1 Product labels

A unique serial number adhesive label with a barcode (Code 128) is affixed to each B&R device for identification
purposes. This serial number represents all of the individual components built into the system (order number,
name, revision, serial number, delivery date and duration of warranty).
Depending on the device variant, the position of the adhesive labels may differ from those shown in the figures
below.
Three adhesive labels are also included with the Panel PC 900 with detailed information about the installed com-
ponents. Two of these adhesive labels can be affixed individually.

Position Description
1 Specifications for the device family and electrical properties
2 Device-specific specifications, serial numbers and MAC addresses, see Identification.
3 Valid test and conformity ID for the product, see section "Technical data" on page 22
4 Safety notices, warnings and information about the product
5 License adhesive label for operating systems (configuration-dependent)
6 Space for individual customer information (configuration-dependent)
7 Interfaces on interface options (configuration-dependent)
These holes are intended for installing/removing the panel PC on the panel.

22 Panel PC 900 (Skylake) User's manual V 1.10

 Technical data

Searching for a serial number on the website

Information:
Using this function requires logging into the B&R website (www.br-automation.com).
The serial number represents all of the individual components built into the system (serial number, material number,
revision, delivery date and duration of warranty). This information is located on the B&R website. For this, the serial
number of the complete system must be entered in the search field on the B&R website (www.br-automation.com).
After the search, a detailed list of the installed components is displayed.

Figure 4: Example image

Panel PC 900 (Skylake) User's manual V 1.10 23

Technical data

4.1.2 Environmental properties

4.1.2.1 Temperature specifications

Depending on the display unit and system unit, CPU boards can be combined with various other components such
as drives, main memory, additional plug-in cards, etc. The many different configurations possible result in varying
maximum ambient temperatures, which can be seen in the following tables in this section.

Information:
The maximum specified ambient temperatures for operation with and without a fan kit have been de-
termined under worst-case conditions. Experience has shown that higher ambient temperatures can
be achieved with typical applications in Microsoft Windows, for example. The relevant test and assess-
ment must be carried out individually by the user on site (reading out the temperatures in BIOS or
using the B&R Control Center).

Information regarding worst-case conditions

• Thermal Analysis Tool (TAT V5.0) from Intel for simulating processor utilization (CPU 100%, graphics 100%,
memory 100%)
• BurnInTest Pro V8.1 from PassMark Software for simulating 100% interface utilization using loopback
adapters (serial interface, slide-in drives, USB interfaces, audio outputs)
• Maximum system expansion and power consumption

4.1.2.1.1 Minimum ambient temperature during operation

For systems containing component 5AC901.SDVW-00, the minimum ambient temperature for non-condensing
operation is +5°C.
If none of these components are used, then the minimum ambient temperature for non-condensing operation is 0°C.

24 Panel PC 900 (Skylake) User's manual V 1.10

 Technical data

4.1.2.1.2 Maximum ambient temperature for worst-case operation

Operation with a fan kit

All temperature specifications
in degrees Celsius (°C) at Maximum ambient temperature (system unit 5PC911.SX00-00)
500 m above sea level, non-condensing.
The maximum ambient temperature is 5PC901.TS17-00 5PC901.TS17-01 5PC901.TS17-02 5PC901.TS17-03
typically derated 1°C per 1000 meters i7 (6820EQ) i5 (6440EQ) i3 (6100E) C (G3900E)
starting at 500 m above sea level. @2700 MHz @2400 MHZ
50 50 55 60
AP9x3 panels
5AP923.1215-00 ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
5AP923.1505-00 ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
5AP923.1906-00 45 45 45 45
5AP933.156B-00 ✓ ✓ 50 50
5AP933.185B-00 ✓ ✓ 50 50
5AP933.215C-00 45 45 45 45
5AP933.240C-00 45 45 45 45
AP1000 panels
5AP1120.1043-000 ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
5AP1180.1043-000 ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
5AP1181.1043-000 ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
5AP1182.1043-000 ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
5AP1120.1214-000 ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
5AP1120.1505-000 ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
5AP1180.1505-000 ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
5AP1181.1505-000 ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
5AP1120.156B-000 ✓ ✓ 50 50
5AP1130.156C-000 ✓ ✓ ✓ 55
5AP1130.156C-001 ✓ ✓ ✓ 55
5AP1130.185C-000 ✓ ✓ ✓ 55
5AP1120.1906-000 ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
Main memory
1x 5MMDDR.xxxx-04 inserted1) ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
2x 5MMDDR.xxxx-04 inserted ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
Slide-in compact drives
5AC901.CHDD-01 ✓ ✓ 50 50
5AC901.CSSD-03 ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
5AC901.CSSD-04 ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
5AC901.CSSD-05 ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
5AC901.CSSD-06 ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
5AC901.CCFA-00 ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
Slide-in drives
5AC901.SDVW-00 40 40 40 40
5AC901.SSCA-002) ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
Interface options
5AC901.I232-00 ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
5AC901.I485-00 ✓ ✓ ✓ 55
5AC901.ICAN-00 ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
5AC901.ICAN-01 ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
5AC901.IHDA-00 ✓ ✓ ✓ 55
5AC901.ISRM-00 ✓ ✓ ✓ 55
5AC901.IPLK-00 ✓ ✓ ✓ 55
5AC901.IRDY-00 ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
5AC901.ISIO-00 ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
5AC901.IUPS-00 ✓ ✓ ✓ 55
5AC901.IUPS-01 ✓ ✓ ✓ 55
5AC901.IETH-00 ✓ ✓ ✓ 55
Bus units
5AC902.BX01-00 ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
5AC902.BX01-01 ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
5AC902.BX02-00 ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
5AC902.BX02-01 ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
5AC902.BX02-02 ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
Power supply
5AC902.PS00-00 ✓ ✓ ✓ 55
CFast cards
5CFAST.xxxx-00 ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
5CFAST.xxxx-10 ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
PCIe cards
5ACPCE.ETH1-00 ✓ ✓ ✓ 55
5ACPCE.ETH4-00 ✓ ✓ ✓ 55
1) The main memory module must be connected in RAM slot 2.
2) The max. ambient temperature depends on the slide-in compact drive being used.

Panel PC 900 (Skylake) User's manual V 1.10 25

Technical data

Operation without a fan kit

Boards 5PC901.TS17-00 and 5PC901.TS17-01 cannot be operated without a fan kit.
All temperature specifications
in degrees Celsius (°C) at Maximum ambient temperature (system unit 5PC911.SX00-01)
500 m above sea level, non-condensing.
The maximum ambient temperature is 5PC901.TS17-00 5PC901.TS17-01 5PC901.TS17-02 5PC901.TS17-03
typically derated 1°C per 1000 meters i7 (6820EQ) i5 (6440EQ) i3 (6100E) C (G3900E)
starting at 500 m above sea level. @1900 MHz @1700 MHz
Up to Rev. C3 - - 45 50
Rev. D0 and later - - 45 55
AP9x3 panels
5AP923.1215-00 - - ✓ ✓
5AP923.1505-00 - - ✓ ✓
5AP923.1906-00 - - 40 40
5AP933.156B-00 - - ✓ ✓
5AP933.185B-00 - - ✓ ✓
5AP933.215C-00 - - 40 40
5AP933.240C-00 - - 40 40
AP1000 panels
5AP1120.1043-000 - - ✓ ✓
5AP1180.1043-000 - - ✓ ✓
5AP1181.1043-000 - - ✓ ✓
5AP1182.1043-000 - - ✓ ✓
5AP1120.1214-000 - - ✓ ✓
5AP1120.1505-000 - - ✓ ✓
5AP1180.1505-000 - - ✓ ✓
5AP1181.1505-000 - - ✓ ✓
5AP1120.156B-000 - - 45 ✓
5AP1130.156C-000 - - ✓ 45
5AP1130.156C-001 - - ✓ 45
5AC1130.185C-000 - - ✓ 45
5AP1120.1906-000 - - ✓ ✓
Main memory
1x 5MMDDR.xxxx-04 inserted1) - - ✓ ✓
2x 5MMDDR.xxxx-04 inserted - - ✓ ✓
Slide-in compact drives
5AC901.CHDD-01 - - 353) 353)
5AC901.CSSD-03 ≤ Rev. D0 - - ✓ ✓3)
5AC901.CSSD-03 ≤ Rev. D0 - - ✓ 403)
5AC901.CSSD-04 ≤ Rev. D0 - - ✓ ✓3)
5AC901.CSSD-04 ≤ Rev. D0 - - ✓ 403)
5AC901.CSSD-05 - - ✓ ✓3)
5AC901.CSSD-06 - - ✓ ✓3)
5AC901.CCFA-00 - - ✓ ✓
Slide-in drives
5AC901.SDVW-00 - - 40 40
5AC901.SSCA-002) - - ✓ ✓
Interface options
5AC901.I232-00 - - ✓ ✓
5AC901.I485-00 - - ✓ ✓
5AC901.ICAN-00 - - ✓ ✓
5AC901.ICAN-01 - - ✓ ✓
5AC901.IHDA-00 - - ✓ 40
5AC901.ISRM-00 - - ✓ ✓
5AC901.IPLK-00 - - ✓ ✓
5AC901.IRDY-00 - - ✓ ✓
5AC901.ISIO-00 - - ✓ ✓
5AC901.IUPS-00 - - ✓ ✓
5AC901.IUPS-01 - - ✓ ✓
5AC901.IETH-00 - - ✓ ✓
Bus units
5AC902.BX01-00 - - ✓ ✓
5AC902.BX01-01 - - ✓ ✓
5AC902.BX02-00 - - ✓ ✓
5AC902.BX02-01 - - ✓ ✓
5AC902.BX02-02 - - ✓ ✓
Power supply
5AC902.PS00-00 - - ✓ ✓
CFast cards
5CFAST.xxxx-00 - - ✓ ✓

26 Panel PC 900 (Skylake) User's manual V 1.10

 Technical data
5CFAST.xxxx-10 - - ✓ ✓
PCIe cards
5ACPCE.ETH1-00 - - ✓ ✓
5ACPCE.ETH4-00 - - ✓ ✓
1) The main memory module must be connected in RAM slot 2.
2) The max. ambient temperature depends on the slide-in compact drive being used.
3) For systems with a total system load >90 W, the max. ambient temperature must be reduced by 5°C.

Panel PC 900 (Skylake) User's manual V 1.10 27

Technical data

4.1.2.1.3 Maximum ambient temperature for typical operation

Information about typical conditions

• BurnInTest 8.1 from PassMark Software for simulating moderate system and interface utilization (2D and
3D graphics, CPU, GPU, RAM, disks C and D, audio test and network on ping station)
• No permanent 100% processor utilization and graphics utilization
• Hardware load: 4x 1 A USB

Operation with a fan kit

All temperature specifications
in degrees Celsius (°C) at Maximum ambient temperature (system unit 5PC911.SX00-00)
500 m above sea level, non-condensing.
The maximum ambient temperature is 5PC901.TS17-00 5PC901.TS17-01 5PC901.TS17-02 5PC901.TS17-03
typically derated 1°C per 1000 meters i7 (6820EQ) i5 (6440EQ) i3 (6100E) C (G3900E)
starting at 500 m above sea level. @2700 MHz @2400 MHZ
Rev. D0 and later 60 60 65 65
AP9x3 panels
5AP923.1215-00 ✓ ✓ 60 60
5AP923.1505-00 ✓ ✓ 60 60
5AP923.1906-00 45 45 45 45
5AP933.156B-00 50 50 50 50
5AP933.185B-00 50 50 50 50
5AP933.215C-00 45 45 45 45
5AP933.240C-00 45 45 45 45
AP1000 panels
5AP1120.1043-000 ✓ ✓ 60 60
5AP1180.1043-000 ✓ ✓ 60 60
5AP1181.1043-000 ✓ ✓ 60 60
5AP1182.1043-000 ✓ ✓ 60 60
5AP1120.1214-000 ✓ ✓ 60 60
5AP1120.1505-000 ✓ ✓ 60 60
5AP1180.1505-000 ✓ ✓ 60 60
5AP1181.1505-000 60 60 60 60
5AP1120.156B-000 50 50 50 50
5AP1130.156C-000 55 55 55 55
5AP1130.156C-001 55 55 55 55
5AP1130.185C-000 55 55 55 55
5AP1120.1906-000 ✓ ✓ 60 60
Main memory
1x 5MMDDR.xxxx-04 inserted1) ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
2x 5MMDDR.xxxx-04 inserted ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
Slide-in compact drives
5AC901.CHDD-01 50 50 50 50
5AC901.CSSD-03 ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
5AC901.CSSD-04 ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
5AC901.CSSD-05 ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
5AC901.CSSD-06 ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
5AC901.CCFA-00 ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
Slide-in drives
5AC901.SDVW-00 40 40 40 40
5AC901.SSCA-002) ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
Interface options
5AC901.I232-00 ✓ ✓ 60 60
5AC901.I485-00 55 55 55 55
5AC901.ICAN-00 ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
5AC901.ICAN-01 ✓ ✓ 60 60
5AC901.IHDA-00 55 55 55 55
5AC901.ISRM-00 55 55 55 55
5AC901.IPLK-00 55 55 55 55
5AC901.IRDY-00 ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
5AC901.ISIO-00 ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
5AC901.IUPS-00 55 55 55 55
5AC901.IUPS-01 55 55 55 55
5AC901.IETH-00 55 55 55 55
Bus units
5AC902.BX01-00 ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
5AC902.BX01-01 ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
5AC902.BX02-00 ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
5AC902.BX02-01 ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
5AC902.BX02-02 ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
Power supply unit
5AC902.PS00-00 55 55 55 55
CFast cards

28 Panel PC 900 (Skylake) User's manual V 1.10

 Technical data
5CFAST.xxxx-00 ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
5CFAST.xxxx-10 ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
PCIe cards
5ACPCE.ETH1-00 55 55 55 55
5ACPCE.ETH4-00 55 55 55 55
1) The main memory module must be connected in RAM slot 2.
2) The max. ambient temperature depends on the slide-in compact drive being used.

Panel PC 900 (Skylake) User's manual V 1.10 29

Technical data

Operation without a fan kit

Boards 5PC901.TS17-00 and 5PC901.TS17-01 cannot be operated without a fan kit.
All temperature specifications
in degrees Celsius (°C) at Maximum ambient temperature (system unit 5PC911.SX00-01)
500 m above sea level, non-condensing.
The maximum ambient temperature is 5PC901.TS17-00 5PC901.TS17-01 5PC901.TS17-02 5PC901.TS17-03
typically derated 1°C per 1000 meters i7 (6820EQ) i5 (6440EQ) i3 (6100E) C (G3900E)
starting at 500 m above sea level. @1900 MHz @1700 MHz
Rev. D0 and later - - 50 60
AP9x3 panels
5AP923.1215-00 - - ✓ ✓
5AP923.1505-00 - - ✓ ✓
5AP923.1906-00 - - ✓ 40
5AP933.156B-00 - - ✓ ✓
5AP933.185B-00 - - ✓ ✓
5AP933.215C-00 - - ✓ 40
5AP933.240C-00 - - ✓ 40
AP1000 panels
5AP1120.1043-000 - - ✓ ✓
5AP1180.1043-000 - - ✓ ✓
5AP1181.1043-000 - - ✓ ✓
5AP1182.1043-000 - - ✓ ✓
5AP1120.1214-000 - - ✓ ✓
5AP1120.1505-000 - - ✓ ✓
5AP1180.1505-000 - - ✓ ✓
5AP1181.1505-000 - - ✓ ✓
5AP1120.156B-000 - - ✓ 45
5AP1130.156C-000 - - ✓ 55
5AP1130.156C-001 - - ✓ 55
5AP1130.185C-000 - - ✓ 55
5AP1120.1906-000 - - ✓ ✓
Main memory
1x 5MMDDR.xxxx-04 inserted1) - - ✓ ✓
2x 5MMDDR.xxxx-04 inserted - - ✓ ✓
Slide-in compact drives
5AC901.CHDD-01 - - 353) 353)
5AC901.CSSD-03 ≤ Rev. D0 - - ✓ ✓3)
5AC901.CSSD-03 ≤ Rev. D0 - - ✓ 403)
5AC901.CSSD-04 ≤ Rev. D0 - - ✓ ✓3)
5AC901.CSSD-04 ≤ Rev. D0 - - ✓ 403)
5AC901.CSSD-05 - - ✓ ✓3)
5AC901.CSSD-06 - - ✓ ✓3)
5AC901.CCFA-00 - - ✓ ✓
Slide-in drives
5AC901.SDVW-00 - - 40 40
5AC901.SSCA-002) - - ✓ ✓
Interface options
5AP901.I232-00 - - ✓ 55
5AC901.I485-00 - - ✓ ✓
5AC901.ICAN-00 - - ✓ ✓
5AC901.ICAN-01 - - ✓ 55
5AC901.IHDA-00 - - 40 40
5AC901.ISRM-00 - - ✓ ✓
5AC901.IPLK-00 - - ✓ ✓
5AC901.IRDY-00 - - ✓ ✓
5AC901.ISIO-00 - - ✓ ✓
5AC901.IUPS-00 - - ✓ ✓
5AC901.IUPS-01 - - ✓ ✓
5AC901.IETH-00 - - ✓ ✓
Bus units
5AC902.BX01-00 - - ✓ ✓
5AC902.BX01-01 - - ✓ ✓
5AC902.BX02-00 - - ✓ ✓
5AC902.BX02-01 - - ✓ ✓
5AC902.BX02-02 - - ✓ ✓
Power supply unit
5AC902.PS00-00 - - ✓ 55
CFast cards
5CFAST.xxxx-00 - - ✓ ✓

30 Panel PC 900 (Skylake) User's manual V 1.10

 Technical data
5CFAST.xxxx-10 - - ✓ ✓
PCIe cards
5ACPCE.ETH1-00 - - ✓ ✓
5ACPCE.ETH4-00 - - ✓ ✓
1) The main memory module must be connected in RAM slot 2.
2) The max. ambient temperature depends on the slide-in compact drive being used.
3) For systems with a total system load >90 W, the max. ambient temperature must be reduced by 5°C.

4.1.2.1.4 Ambient temperature during storage and transport

The individual components can be transported and stored within the following temperature ranges.

AP9x3 panels
Type Model number Storage [°C] Transport [°C]
12.1" single-touch 5AP923.1215-00 -25 to 80 -25 to 80
15.0" single-touch 5AP923.1505-00 -25 to 80 -25 to 80
19.0" single-touch 5AP923.1906-00 ≤ D0 -20 to 60 -20 to 60
19.0" single-touch 5AP923.1906-00 ≥ E0 -25 to 70 -25 to 70
15.6" multi-touch 5AP933.156B-00 ≤ C0 -10 to 60 -10 to 60
15.6" multi-touch 5AP933.156B-00 ≥ D0 -25 to 70 -25 to 70
18.5" multi-touch 5AP933.185B-00 ≤ C0 -10 to 60 -10 to 60
18.5" multi-touch 5AP933.185B-00 ≥ D0 -20 to 60 -20 to 60
21.5" multi-touch 5AP933.215C-00 ≤ C0 -10 to 60 -10 to 60
21.5" multi-touch 5AP933.215C-00 ≥ D0 -20 to 60 -20 to 60
24.0" multi-touch 5AP933.240C-00 ≤ C0 -10 to 60 -10 to 60
24.0" multi-touch 5AP933.240C-00 ≥ D0 -25 to 70 -25 to 70

AP1000 panels
Type Model number Storage [°C] Transport [°C]
10.4" single-touch 5AP1120.1043-000 -25 to 80 -25 to 80
10.4" single-touch with keys 5AP1180.1043-000 -25 to 70 -25 to 70
10.4" single-touch with keys 5AP1181.1043-000 -25 to 70 -25 to 70
10.4" single-touch with keys 5AP1182.1043-000 -25 to 70 -25 to 70
12.1" single-touch 5AP1120.1214-000 -25 to 80 -25 to 80
15.0" single-touch 5AP1120.1505-000 -25 to 80 -25 to 80
15.0" single-touch with keys 5AP1180.1505-000 -25 to 80 -25 to 80
15.0" single-touch with keys 5AP1181.1505-000 -25 to 70 -25 to 70
15.6" single-touch 5AP1120.156B-000 -20 to 60 -20 to 60
15.6" multi-touch 5AP1130.156C-000 -25 to 80 -25 to 80
15.6" multi-touch 5AP1130.156C-001 -20 to 70 -10 to 55
18.5" multi-touch 5AP1130.185C-000 -25 to 80 -25 to 80
19.0" single-touch 5AP1120.1906-000 -25 to 70 -25 to 70

Components
Type Model number Storage [°C] Transport [°C]
CPU boards 5PC901.TS17-xx -20 to 60 -20 to 60
System units 5PC911.SX00-xx -20 to 60 -20 to 60
1-slot bus units 5AC902.BX01-xx -20 to 60 -20 to 60
2-slot bus units 5AC902.BX02-xx -20 to 60 -20 to 60
Power supply 5AC902.PS00-00 -20 to 60 -20 to 60
5AC901.CHDD-01 -40 to 70 -40 to 70
5AC901.CSSD-03 ≤ Rev. C0 -40 to 85 -40 to 85
5AC901.CSSD-03 ≥ Rev. D0 -40 to 85 -40 to 85
5AC901.CSSD-04 ≤ Rev. C0 -40 to 85 -40 to 85
Slide-in compact drives
5AC901.CSSD-04 ≥ Rev. D0 -40 to 85 -40 to 85
5AC901.CSSD-05 -40 to 85 -40 to 85
5AC901.CSSD-06 -40 to 85 -40 to 85
5AC901.CCFA-00 -20 to 60 -20 to 60
5AC901.SDVW-00 -20 to 60 -20 to 60
Slide-in drives
5AC901.SSCA-00 -20 to 60 -20 to 60
5AC901.I232-00 -20 to 60 -20 to 60
5AC901.I485-00 -20 to 60 -20 to 60
5AC901.ICAN-00 -20 to 60 -20 to 60
5AC901.ICAN-01 -20 to 60 -20 to 60
5AC901.IETH-00 -20 to 60 -20 to 60
Interface options
5AC901.IHDA-00 -20 to 60 -20 to 60
5AC901.ISRM-00 -20 to 60 -20 to 60
5AC901.IPLK-00 -20 to 60 -20 to 60
5AC901.IRDY-00 -20 to 60 -20 to 60
5AC901.ISIO-00 -20 to 60 -20 to 60
5CFAST.xxxx-00 -50 to 100 -50 to 100
CFast cards
5CFAST.xxxx-10 -55 to 95 -55 to 95

Panel PC 900 (Skylake) User's manual V 1.10 31

Technical data
Type Model number Storage [°C] Transport [°C]
5ACPCE.ETH1-00 -20 to 60 -20 to 60
PCIe cards
5ACPCE.ETH4-00 -20 to 60 -20 to 60
5AC901.IUPS-00 -20 to 60 -20 to 60
5AC901.IUPS-01 -20 to 60 -20 to 60
Uninterruptible power supplies
5AC901.BUPS-00 -65 to 80 -65 to 80
5AC901.BUPS-01 -15 to 40 -15 to 40

32 Panel PC 900 (Skylake) User's manual V 1.10

 Technical data

4.1.2.1.5 Determining the ambient temperature

1. Select the system unit.

2. Select the CPU board.
3. The columns specify the maximum temperature of the complete system in connection with the respective
CPU board.

Information:
Maximum temperature specifications refer to operation at 500 meters. The maximum ambient
temperature is typically derated 1°C per 1000 meters starting at 500 m above sea level.

4. If additional drives, interface options, etc. are installed, these components can change the temperature limits
of the PPC900 system.
° If a "✓" (check mark) is entered for the installed component, it can be operated without any prob-
lems.
° If the installed component has a temperature specification (e.g. "45[°C]"), the ambient temperature
of the complete system is not permitted to exceed this value.
5. Possible limitations may arise due to the mounting orientation of the Panel PC 900. For additional information,
see section "Mounting orientations" on page 45.
6. The relevant test and assessment must be carried out individually by the user on site (reading out the tem-
peratures in BIOS or using the B&R Control Center). See section .

4.1.2.1.6 Temperature monitoring

Sensors monitor temperature values at various areas in the PPC900. For the position of temperature sensors,
see Fig. 5 "Panel PC 900 - Temperature sensor positions" on page 34. The values specified in Tab. 1 "Tem-
perature sensor locations" on page 34 represent the defined maximum temperature at this measuring point. If
the temperature is exceeded, no alarm is triggered. Temperatures2) can be read out in different ways in approved
operating systems:
• BIOS
• B&R Control Center3)
• B&R ADI Development Kit2)
• B&R ADI .NET SDK2)
• B&R HMI Service Center2)
• Automation Runtime library2)
In addition, the hard disks available from B&R for PPC900 systems are equipped with Self-Monitoring, Analysis
and Reporting Technology (S.M.A.R.T). This means that various parameters, such as temperature, can be read
out using software (e.g. HDD Thermometer, freeware) in approved Microsoft Windows operating systems.

2) The measured temperature is a guide value for the immediate ambient temperature, but it may have been influenced by neighboring components.
3) Drivers for approved operating systems can be downloaded at no cost from the Downloads section of the B&R website (www.br-automation.com).

Panel PC 900 (Skylake) User's manual V 1.10 33

Technical data

4.1.2.1.7 Temperature sensor positions

Sensors show temperature values at various areas in the PPC900. These temperatures4) can be read out in BIOS
(menu option Advanced - OEM features - System board features / CPU board features - Temperature values) or
Microsoft Windows operating systems using the B&R Control Center5).

B
E

A
D F

Figure 5: Panel PC 900 - Temperature sensor positions

ADI sensors Position Measurement Measurement Max. specified
point for
Panel A Display Temperature of the display (sensor integrated in display unit) 5AP923.1215-00: 80°C
5AP923.1505-00: 80°C
5AP923.1906-00: 75°C
5AP933.156B-00: 75°C
5AP933.185B-00: 75°C
5AP933.215C-00: 80°C
5AP933.240C-00: 75°C
5AP1120.1043-000: 90°C
5AP1180.1043-000: 90°C
5AP1181.1043-000: 90°C
5AP1182.1043-000: 90°C
5AP1120.1214-000: 80°C
5AP1120.1505-000: 90°C
5AP1180.1505-000: 90°C
5AP1181.1505-000: 90°C
5AP1120.156B-000: 75°C
5AP1130.156C-000: 80°C
5AP1130.156C-001: 80°C
5AP1130.185C-000: 80°C
5AP1120.1906-000: 80°C
CPU board B CPU Temperature of the processor (sensor integrated in the processor) 95°C
System unit 1 C Board Temperature of the board (sensor integrated on the CPU board) 95°C
System unit 2 D Chipset Temperature of the chipset area (sensor integrated on the CPU board) 85°C
System unit 3 E Board power sup- Temperature of the board power supply area (sensor integrated on the CPU 95°C
ply board)
System unit 4 F CFast Temperature of the CFast area (sensor integrated on the CPU board) 85°C
Slide-in drive G Slide-in drive Temperature of slide-in drive 1 (sensor integrated on the slide-in drive) Depends on the drive
H Interface option1) Temperature of the interface option (sensor integrated on the interface option) Depends on the IF option

Table 1: Temperature sensor locations

1) A temperature sensor is currently not integrated in the interface options.

4) The measured temperature is a guide value for the immediate ambient temperature, but it may have been influenced by neighboring components.
5) The ADI driver that includes the B&R Control Center can be downloaded at no cost from the Downloads section of the B&R website (www.br-automa-
tion.com).

34 Panel PC 900 (Skylake) User's manual V 1.10

 Technical data

4.1.2.1.8 Fan control

The MTCX constantly monitors the temperature using temperature sensors, which directly determines how the
fans are controlled. Their speed depends on the measured temperature. Limit values may depend on the MTCX
firmware version being used.
Position Measurement point Startup temperature Max. fan speed at:
for
A Display 5AP923.1215-00: 70°C, 5AP923.1505-00: 70°C, 5AP923.1215-00: 86°C, 5AP923.1505-00: 86°C,
5AP923.1906-00: 70°C, 5AP933.156B-00: 70°C, 5AP923.1906-00: 86°C, 5AP933.156B-00: 86°C,
5AP933.185B-00: 70°C, 5AP933.215C-00: 70°C, 5AP933.185B-00: 86°C, 5AP933.215C-00: 86°C,
5AP933.240C-00: 70°C, 5AP1120.1043-000: 70°C, 5AP933.240C-00: 86°C, 5AP1120.1043-000: 86°C,
5AP1180.1043-000: 70°C, 5AP1181.1043-000: 70°C, 5AP1180.1043-000: 86°C, 5AP1181.1043-000: 86°C,
5AP1182.1043-000: 70°C, 5AP1120.1214-000: 70°C, 5AP1182.1043-000: 86°C, 5AP1120.1214-000: 86°C,
5AP1120.1505-000: 70°C, 5AP1180.1505-000: 70°C, 5AP1120.1505-000: 86°C, 5AP1180.1505-000: 86°C,
5AP1181.1505-000: 70°C, 5AP1120.156B-000: 70°C, 5AP1181.1505-000: 86°C, 5AP1120.156B-000: 86°C,
5AP1130.156C-000: 70°C, 5AP1130.156C-001: 70°C, 5AP1130.156C-000: 86°C; 5AP1130.156C-001: 86°C,
5AP1130.185C-000: 70°C, 5AP1130.185C-000: 86°C,
5AP1120.1906-000: 70°C 5AP1120.1906-000: 86°C
B CPU 65°C 81°C
C Board controller 70°C 86°C
D Chipset 70°C 86°C
E Board power supply 70°C 86°C
F CFast 60°C 76°C
G Slide-in drive 1 5AC901.SDVW-00: 44°C, 5AC901.SSCA-00: 55°C 5AC901.SDVW-00: 60°C, 5AC901.SSCA-00: 71°C
H Interface option1) - -

Table 2: Temperature sensor locations

1) A temperature sensor is currently not integrated in the interface options.

Once the startup temperature is reached, the device is started at the minimum fan speed. The maximum fan speed
is reached at a startup temperature of 16°C. The fan speed in this area is controlled depending on the temperature.
Example with slide-in drive 5AC901.SDVW-00: 44°C + 16°C = 60°C --> Maximum fan speed
The fans will only be shut off again if the evaluation temperature is more than 6°C below the switch-on temperature
for a period of 4 hours (overshoot time).

Panel PC 900 (Skylake) User's manual V 1.10 35

Technical data

4.1.2.2 Humidity specifications

The following tables show the minimum and maximum relative humidity (at 30°C, non-condensing) of the individual
components that are relevant for limiting the humidity of the complete system. The smallest or largest value must
always be used for this determination. For more detailed information, see technical data or temperature/humidity
diagrams of the individual components.

AP9x3 panels
Type Model number Operation [%] Storage [%] Transport [%]
12.1" single-touch 5AP923.1215-00 5 to 90 5 to 90 5 to 90
15.0" single-touch 5AP923.1505-00 8 to 90 8 to 90 8 to 90
19.0" single-touch 5AP923.1906-00 5 to 90 5 to 90 5 to 90
15.6" multi-touch 5AP933.156B-00 5 to 90 5 to 90 5 to 90
18.5" multi-touch 5AP933.185B-00 5 to 90 5 to 90 5 to 90
21.5" multi-touch 5AP933.215C-00 ≤ C0 10 to 90 10 to 90 10 to 90
21.5" multi-touch 5AP933.215C-00 ≥ D0 5 to 90 5 to 90 5 to 90
24.0" multi-touch 5AP933.240C-00 5 to 90 5 to 90 5 to 90

AP1000 panels
Type Model number Operation [%] Storage [%] Transport [%]
10.4" single-touch 5AP1120.1043-000 5 to 90 5 to 90 5 to 90
10.4" single-touch with keys 5AP1180.1043-000 5 to 80 5 to 90 5 to 90
10.4" single-touch with keys 5AP1181.1043-000 5 to 80 5 to 90 5 to 90
10.4" single-touch with keys 5AP1182.1043-000 5 to 80 5 to 90 5 to 90
12.1" single-touch 5AP1120.1214-000 8 to 90 8 to 90 8 to 90
15.0" single-touch 5AP1120.1505-000 8 to 90 8 to 90 8 to 90
15.0" single-touch with keys 5AP1180.1505-000 8 to 90 8 to 90 8 to 90
15.0" single-touch with keys 5AP1181.1505-000 8 to 90 8 to 90 8 to 90
15.6" multi-touch 5AP1130.156C-000 5 to 90 5 to 90 5 to 90
15.6" multi-touch 5AP1130.156C-001 5 to 90 5 to 90 5 to 90
15.6" single-touch 5AP1120.156B-000 5 to 90 5 to 90 5 to 90
18.5" multi-touch 5AP1130.185C-000 5 to 90 5 to 90 5 to 90
19.0" single-touch 5AP1120.1906-000 5 to 90 5 to 90 5 to 90

Components
Component Model number Operation Storage Transport
CPU boards 5PC901.TS77-xx 10 to 90% 5 to 95% 5 to 95%
System units 5PC911.SX00-xx 5 to 95% 5 to 95% 5 to 95%
1-slot bus units 5AC902.BX01-xx 5 to 95% 5 to 95% 5 to 95%
2-slot bus units 5AC902.BX02-xx 5 to 95% 5 to 95% 5 to 95%
Power supply 5AC902.PS00-00 7 to 90% 7 to 90% 7 to 90%
5AC901.CHDD-01 8 to 90% 5 to 95% 5 to 95%
5AC901.CSSD-03 ≤ Rev. C0 8 to 90% 8 to 95% 8 to 95%
5AC901.CSSD-03 ≥ Rev. D0 5 to 90% 5 to 95% 5 to 95%
5AC901.CSSD-04 ≤ Rev. C0 8 to 90% 8 to 95% 8 to 95%
Slide-in compact drives
5AC901.CSSD-04 ≥ Rev. D0 5 to 90% 5 to 95% 5 to 95%
5AC901.CSSD-05 5 to 90% 5 to 95% 5 to 95%
5AC901.CSSD-06 5 to 90% 5 to 95% 5 to 95%
5AC901.CCFA-00 5 to 95% 5 to 95% 5 to 95%
Slide-in drives 5AC901.SDVW-00 8 to 80% 5 to 95% 5 to 95%
5AC901.I485-00 5 to 90% 5 to 95% 5 to 95%
5AC901.ICAN-00 5 to 90% 5 to 95% 5 to 95%
5AC901.IHDA-00 5 to 90% 5 to 95% 5 to 95%
Interface options 5AC901.ISRM-00 5 to 90% 5 to 95% 5 to 95%
5AC901.IPLK-00 5 to 90% 5 to 95% 5 to 95%
5AC901.IRDY-00 5 to 90% 5 to 95% 5 to 95%
5AC901.ISIO-00 5 to 90% 5 to 95% 5 to 95%
5CFAST.xxxx-00 Max. 85% at 85°C Max. 85% at 85°C Max. 85% at 85°C
CFast cards
5CFAST.xxxx-10 10 to 95% 10 to 95% 10 to 95%
5AC901.IUPS-00 5 to 90% 5 to 95% 5 to 95%
5AC901.IUPS-01 5 to 90% 5 to 95% 5 to 95%
Uninterruptible power supplies
5AC901.BUPS-00 5 to 95% 5 to 95% 5 to 95%
5AC901.BUPS-01 25 to 85% 25 to 85% 25 to 85%

Table 3: CPU boards, system units, bus units and power supply - Humidity

The values listed correspond to the relative humidity (non-condensing) at an ambient temperature of 30°C. For
more detailed information about the specified relative humidity as a function of temperature, see the technical data
or temperature/humidity diagrams of the individual components.

36 Panel PC 900 (Skylake) User's manual V 1.10

 Technical data

4.1.2.3 Vibration and shock

The following table provides an overview of the maximum vibrations and shock values of the complete system.
Limitations are possible due to individual components.
Vibration
Operation1) Storage1)3) Transport1)3)
Continuous Periodic
With SSD drives and CFast cards 2 to 9 Hz: 2 to 9 Hz: 2 to 8 Hz: 7.5 mm amplitude 2 to 8 Hz: 7.5 mm amplitude
1.75 mm amplitude 3.5 mm amplitude 8 to 200 Hz: 2 g 8 to 200 Hz: 2 g
9 to 200 Hz: 0.5 g 9 to 200 Hz: 1 g 200 to 500 Hz: 4 g 200 to 500 Hz: 4 g
With hard disk drives 5 to 200 Hz: 0.25 g 5 to 200 Hz: 0.5 g 2 to 8 Hz: 7.5 mm amplitude 2 to 8 Hz: 7.5 mm amplitude
8 to 200 Hz: 2 g 8 to 200 Hz: 2 g
200 to 500 Hz: 4 g 200 to 500 Hz: 4 g
With DVD-R/RW drives - 5 to 200 Hz: 0.2 g 2 to 8 Hz: 7.5 mm amplitude 2 to 8 Hz: 7.5 mm amplitude
8 to 200 Hz: 2 g 8 to 200 Hz: 2 g
200 to 500 Hz: 4 g 200 to 500 Hz: 4 g
Shock
Operation2) Storage2)3) Transport2)3)
With SSD drives and CFast cards 15 g, 11 ms 30 g, 6 ms 30 g, 6 ms
With hard disk drives 5 g, 11 ms 30 g, 6 ms 30 g, 6 ms
With DVD-R/RW drives 5 g, 11 ms 30 g, 6 ms 30 g, 6 ms
1) Testing is performed per EN 60068-2-6.
2) Testing is performed per EN 60068-2-27.
3) The specification refers to a device in its original packaging.

4.1.2.4 Degree of protection

Under the following conditions, the Panel PC 900 offers IP65 protection on the front and IP20 protection on the
back per EN 60529:
• The Panel PC 900 is installed correctly (see "Installing a Panel PC with an AP9x3 panel" on page 206).
• All covers and components are installed on the interfaces and slots.
• All environmental conditions are being observed.
The Panel PC 900 with AP9x3 and AP1000 panels additionally has "Type 4X indoor use only" on the front per UL
50 under the same conditions.

Panel PC 900 (Skylake) User's manual V 1.10 37

Technical data

4.1.3 Mechanical properties

4.1.3.1 Dimensions

AP9x3 display units - Dimensions

Figure 6: Panel PC 900 with AP9x3 display units - Dimensions

All dimensions in mm.
Display type Model number A B C D E F G H
12.1" single-touch 5AP923.1215-00 315 239 302 0 9 226 13.5 -
15.0" single-touch 5AP923.1505-00 370 288 357 36.5 9 275 14.5 -
19.0" single-touch 5AP923.1906-00 440 358 427 101 9 345 23 -
15.6" wide multi-touch 5AP933.156B-00 414 258.5 401 57.5 9 245.5 20 -
18.5" wide multi-touch 5AP933.185B-00 475 295 462 118.5 9 282 18 -
21.5" wide multi-touch 5AP933.215C-00 541.5 333 528.5 151.75 9 320 18 -
24.0" wide multi-touch 5AP933.240C-00 598.5 364 585.5 180.25 9 351 18 -

Table 4: AP9x3 panels - Dimensions

Component Order number T U V W X Y Z
CPU board and 5PC901.TS17-xx &
54 226 225 - - - -
System unit 5PC911.SX00-xx
1-slot bus unit 5AC902.BX01-xx - - - - 54.7 218 164
2-slot bus unit 5AC902.BX02-xx - - - - 75 218 164
Power supply 5AC902.PS00-00 53.5 225.5 - 74.5 - - -

Table 5: CPU boards, system units, bus units and power supply - Dimensions

Information:
2D and 3D drawings (DXF and STEP formats) can be downloaded from the B&R website
(www.br-automation.com).

38 Panel PC 900 (Skylake) User's manual V 1.10

 Technical data

AP1000 display units with retaining clips - Dimensions

E
Z
V W D
C

A X T G

H
Y
U
B

F
Figure 7: Panel PC 900 with AP1000 display units with retaining clips - Dimensions
All dimensions in mm.
Display type Model number A B C D E F G H
10.4" single-touch 5AP1120.1043-000 323 260 300 - 5.7 240 21 2.5
10.4" single-touch with keys 5AP1180.1043-000 323 260 300 - 5.7 240 21 2.5
15.6" single-touch 5AP1120.156B-000 414 258.5 401 57.5 9 245.5 20 -
15.6" multi-touch 5AP1130.156C-000 414 258.5 401 57.5 9 245.5 20 0
15.6" multi-touch 5AP1130.156C-001 414 258.5 401 57.5 9 245.5 18 0
18.5" multi-touch 5AP1130.185C-000 475 295 462 118.5 9 282 18 0

Table 6: AP1000 panels with retaining clips - Dimensions

Component Order number T U V W X Y Z
CPU board and 5PC901.TS17-xx &
54 226 225 - - - -
System unit 5PC911.SX00-xx
1-slot bus unit 5AC902.BX01-xx - - - - 54.7 218 164
2-slot bus unit 5AC902.BX02-xx - - - - 75 218 164
Power supply 5AC902.PS00-00 53.5 225.5 - 74.5 - - -

Table 7: CPU boards, system units, bus units and power supply - Dimensions

Information:
2D and 3D drawings (DXF and STEP formats) can be downloaded from the B&R website
(www.br-automation.com).

Panel PC 900 (Skylake) User's manual V 1.10 39

Technical data

AP1000 display units with clamping blocks - Dimensions

Figure 8: Panel PC 900 with AP1000 display units with clamping blocks - Dimensions
All dimensions in mm.
Display type Model number A B C D E F G H I J
10.4" single-touch with keys 5AP1181.1043-000 323 358 270 22.5 5.7 305 21.3 4 338 300
10.4" single-touch with keys 5AP1182.1043-000 423 288 355.5 22.5 5.7 234 21.3 4 268 400
12.1" single-touch 5AP1120.1214-000 362 284 309 4.5 5.7 234 20.3 4 264 339
15.0" single-touch 5AP1120.1505-000 435 330 382 33.5 5.7 280 24.3 10.5 310 412
15.0" single-touch with keys 5AP1180.1505-000 435 330 382 33.5 5.7 280 24.3 10.5 310 412
19.0" single-touch 5AP1120.1906-000 527 421 445 138.5 5.7 351 23.3 5.8 401 507

Table 8: AP1000 display units with clamping blocks - Dimensions

Component Model number T U V W X Y Z
CPU board and 5PC901.TS77-xx &
54 226 225 - - - -
System unit 5PC911.SX00-xx
1-slot bus unit 5AC902.BX01-xx - - - - 54.7 218 164
2-slot bus unit 5AC902.BX02-xx - - - - 75 218 164
Power supply 5AC902.PS00-00 53.5 225.5 - 74.5 - - -

Table 9: CPU boards, system units, bus units and power supply - Dimensions

Information:
2D and 3D drawings (DXF and STEP formats) can be downloaded from the B&R website
(www.br-automation.com).

40 Panel PC 900 (Skylake) User's manual V 1.10

 Technical data

4.1.3.2 Installation diagrams

Information:
When installing the Panel PC 900, spacing for air circulation and additional free space for operating
and servicing the device must be taken into account.

AP9x3 panels - Installation diagrams

X

Z
Y

Figure 9: Panel PC 900 with AP9x3 display units - Installation diagram

Panels
Type Model number X Y Z min. Z max. Number of retaining clips
12.1" single-touch 5AP923.1215-00 304 228 1 6 10 pcs.
15.0" single-touch 5AP923.1505-00 359 277 1 6 10 pcs.
19.0" single-touch 5AP923.1906-00 429 347 1 6 12 pcs.
15.6" multi-touch 5AP933.156B-00 403 247.5 1 6 10 pcs.
18.5" multi-touch 5AP933.185B-00 464 284 1 6 10 pcs.
21.5" multi-touch 5AP933.215C-00 530.5 322 1 6 14 pcs.
24.0" multi-touch 5AP933.240C-00 587.5 353 1 6 14 pcs.

Dimension "Z" describes the thickness of the wall or control cabinet plate.
A hex screwdriver is needed to tighten and remove the screw on the retaining clips. The maximum tightening torque
of the retaining clips is 1 Nm.

Panel PC 900 (Skylake) User's manual V 1.10 41

Technical data

AP1000 panels with retaining clips - Installation diagrams

X

Figure 10: Panel PC 900 with AP1000 display units with retaining clips - Installation diagram
All dimensions in mm.
The cutout tolerances are +0 mm / -0.5 mm.
Display type Model number X Y Z min Z max Number of retaining clips
10.4" single-touch 5AP1120.1043-000 303 243 1 10 8
10.4" single-touch with keys 5AP1180.1043-000 303 243 1 10 8
15.6" single-touch 5AP1120.156B-000 403 247.5 1 6 10
15.6" multi-touch 5AP1130.156C-000 403 247.5 1 6 10
15.6" multi-touch 5AP1130.156C-001 403 247.5 1 6 10
18.5" multi-touch 5AP1130.185C-000 464 284 1 6 10

Table 10: AP1000 panels with retaining clips - Installation diagrams

The "Z" measurement indicates the thickness of the wall or control cabinet panel.
A hex screwdriver is needed to tighten and loosen the screws on the retaining clips. The maximum tightening
torque for the retaining clips is 1 Nm.

42 Panel PC 900 (Skylake) User's manual V 1.10

 Technical data

AP1000 panels with clamping blocks - Installation diagrams

X

Figure 11: Panel PC 900 with AP1000 display units with retaining clips - Clamping blocks
Panels
Type Model number X Y Z min. Z max. Number of clamping blocks
10.4" single-touch with keys 5AP1181.1043-000 303 341 2 10 10
10.4" single-touch with keys 5AP1182.1043-000 403 271 2 10 8
12.1" single-touch 5AP1120.1214-000 342 267 2 10 8
15.0" single-touch 5AP1120.1505-000 415 313 2 10 8
15.0" single-touch with keys 5AP1180.1505-000 415 313 2 10 8
15.0" single-touch with keys 5AP1181.1505-000 415 413 2 10 10
19.0" single-touch 5AP1120.1906-000 510 404 2 10 12

Dimension "Z" describes the thickness of the wall or control cabinet plate.
A 3 mm hex screwdriver is needed to tighten or remove the screw on the clamping blocks. The maximum tightening
torque of the clamping block is 0.5 Nm.

Panel PC 900 (Skylake) User's manual V 1.10 43

Technical data

4.1.3.3 Spacing for air circulation

To ensure sufficient air circulation, a specified clearance must be provided above, below, to the side and behind
the device. For the minimum specified clearance, see the following diagrams. This is valid for all variants.

Information:
The following figure and table exclusively show the thermal view of the complete system. If additional
space is required for operating or servicing the device , this must be taken into account during instal-
lation.
The air intake and outlet are indicated in the following image for active Panel PCs (i.e. with a fan kit). The air intake
on passive Panel PCs (i.e. without a fan kit) is located on the bottom to accommodate the rising warm air.
Rear view Side view

S4
S1 S1 Air intake
S1

S5

S4
S2 S2

S3 Air outlet

Figure 12: Panel PC 900 - Spacing for air circulation

S1: ≥20 mm
S2: ≥20 mm
S3: ≥50 mm
S4: ≥100 mm
S5: ≥50 mm

Caution!
The specified spacing for air circulation is based on worst-case operation at the maximum specified
ambient temperature. The maximum specified ambient temperature is not permitted to be exceeded!
If the spacing specifications for air circulation cannot be observed, then the maximum specified tem-
peratures for the temperature sensors (see "Temperature sensor positions" on page 34) must be mon-
itored by the user and appropriate measures taken if they are exceeded.

44 Panel PC 900 (Skylake) User's manual V 1.10

 Technical data

4.1.3.4 Mounting orientations

The following diagrams show the specified mounting orientations of Panel PC 900 devices. An PPC900 system is
only permitted to be installed as shown or described below.
0° 0°
A B C D

Mounting orientations when operated without a fan kit

Mounting orientation Derating the ambient temperature1)
0° 0° None
A -1° to -90° (counterclockwise) 5°C
B +1° to +90° (clockwise) 5°C
C, D ±±180° (interfaces on top) 5°C
C -1° to -45° None
C -46° to -90° Hardware version A2 or later: 10°C
Up to hardware version A1: 5°C
D +1° to +90° (display facing down) 5°C
1) The maximum ambient temperature must be reduced by ....

Mounting orientations when operated with a fan kit

Mounting orientation Derating the ambient temperature1)
0° 0° None
A -1° to -90° (counterclockwise) None
B +1° to +90° (clockwise) 5°C
C, D ±±180° (interfaces on top) None
C -1° to -45° None
C -46° to -90° 5°C
D +1° to +90° (display facing down) 5°C
1) The maximum ambient temperature must be reduced by ....

Mounting orientations when operated with individual components with limitations

Mounting ori- Limitation1)
entation
5AC901.SDVW-00
0° 0°
A -1° to -30°
B +1° to +30°
C -1° to -5°
D +1° to +30°
1) The mounting orientation may only be max. ....

In order to facilitate natural air circulation, devices must be mounted according to the spacing indicated in section
"Spacing for air circulation" on page 44.

Panel PC 900 (Skylake) User's manual V 1.10 45

Technical data

4.1.3.5 Weight specifications

All weight values in g (grams).

Type Order number Weight [g]
12.1" single-touch 5AP923.1215-00 2200
15.0" single-touch 5AP923.1505-00 3700
19.0" single-touch 5AP923.1906-00 5800
15.6" multi-touch 5AP933.156B-00 3850
18.5" multi-touch 5AP933.185B-00 4850
21.5" multi-touch 5AP933.215C-00 5400
24.0" multi-touch 5AP933.240C-00 7800

Display type Model number Weight

10.4" single-touch 5AP1120.1043-000 2800
10.4" single-touch with keys 5AP1180.1043-000 2800
10.4" single-touch with keys 5AP1181.1043-000 3400
10.4" single-touch with keys 5AP1182.1043-000 3500
12.1" single-touch 5AP1120.1214-000 3200
15.0" single-touch 5AP1120.1505-000 5000
15.0" single-touch with keys 5AP1180.1505-000 4900
15.0" single-touch with keys 5AP1181.1505-000 6000
15.6" single-touch 5AP1120.156B-000 4200
15.6" multi-touch 5AP1130.156C-000 3700
15.6" multi-touch 5AP1130.156C-001 3800
18.5" multi-touch 5AP1130.185C-000 4700
19.0" single-touch 5AP1120.1906-000 7300

Table 11: AP1000 display units - Weight

Component Model number Weight
CPU boards 5PC901.TS17-xx 450
5PC911.SX00-00 2821
System units
5PC911.SX00-01 2821
5AC902.BX01-00 1020
1-slot bus units
5AC902.BX01-01 1020
5AC902.BX02-00 1220
2-slot bus units 5AC902.BX02-01 1220
5AC902.BX02-02 1220
Power supply 5AC902.PS00-00 580
5AC902.FA00-00 70
Fan kits
5AC902.FA0X-00 36
5AC901.CHDD-01 134
5AC901.CSSD-03 118
5AC901.CSSD-04 118
Slide-in compact drives
5AC901.CSSD-05 118
5AC901.CSSD-06 118
5AC901.CCFA-00 50
Slide-in drives 5AC901.SDVW-00 400
5AC901.SSCA-00 195
5AC901.I232-00 30
5AC901.I485-00 34
5AC901.ICAN-00 33
5AC901.ICAN-01 31
Interface options
5AC901.ISRM-00 20
5AC901.IPLK-00 35
5AC901.IHDA-00 21
5AC901.IRDY-00 30
5AC901.IUPS-00 28
5AC901.IUPS-01 28
Uninterruptible power supplies
5AC901.BUPS-00 4600
5AC901.BUPS-01 2550

Table 12: CPU boards, system units, bus units and power supply - Weight

46 Panel PC 900 (Skylake) User's manual V 1.10

 Technical data

4.1.4 Electrical properties

4.1.4.1 Power calculation

In order to calculate the total power of the Panel PC, the power rating of the display being used must be entered
in the "Display unit, permanent consumer" row of the table below.

Information:
The power supply's maximum total power of 130 watts is not permitted to be exceeded.
Information: CPU board Current system
i7 i5 i3 i3 C C
All values in watts 6820EQ 6440EQ 6100E 6100E G3900E G3900E

The values for the suppliers are maximum values. The values for the

5PC901.TS17-00

5PC901.TS17-01

5PC901.TS17-02

5PC901.TS17-02

5PC901.TS17-03

5PC901.TS17-03
@2700 MHz

@1900 MHz

@2400 MHz

@1700 MHz
consumers are average maximum values but not peak values. Enter values in
this column

Total power supply unit power (maximum) 130

Maximum possible 130
Panel, permanent consumer1)
CPU board, permanent consumers 63 63 43 27 38 25
4096 MB RAM, each 2.5 W, max. 2 pcs.
8192 MB RAM, each 3 W, max. 2 pcs.
16384 MB RAM, each 3.5 W, max. 2 pcs.
Fan kit, optional 3 3 3 3 3 3
UPS IF option 5AC901.IUPS-00 during operation, optional 30 30 30 30 30 30
UPS IF option 5AC901.IUPS-01 during operation, optional 25 25 25 25 25 25
+12 V

PCI card power rating, optional

(max. 3 W without fan kit, max. 6 W with fan kit)2)
PCIe x8 card power rating, optional
(max. 3 W without fan kit, max. 20 W with fan kit)2)
Maximum possible at -12 V 1.2
PCI card power rating, optional
Total power supply unit +12 V

-12 V

(max. 1.2 W with or without fan kit)2)

Consumers -12 V ∑
Consumers ∑
Maximum possible at +5 V 50
Panel, permanent consumer1)
CPU board, permanent consumers 2 2 2 2 2 2
Slide-in compact drive (HDD / SSD) 4 4 4 4 4 4
Slide-in drive (DVD / ...) 4 4 4 4 4 4
+5 V

4x USB peripherals, each max. 5 W

Interface option, optional3), max. 2 connections
PCI card power rating, optional
(max. 3 W without fan kit, max. 20 W with fan kit)2)
Consumers +5 V ∑
Maximum possible at 3V3 33
Panel, permanent consumer1)
CPU board, permanent consumers 5 5 5 5 5 5
CFast card 1 1 1 1 1 1
Interface option, optional3)
3V3

PCI card power rating, optional

(max. 3 W without fan kit, max. 15 W with fan kit)2)
PCIe x8 card power rating, optional
(max. 3 W without fan kit, max. 10 W with fan kit)2)
Consumers 3V3 ∑
Total power supply unit, consumers ∑

1) For power ratings of the panels, see the table below.

2) The total power of one PCI/PCIe card per PCI slot (i.e. sum of the power consumption for each voltage range) is not permitted to exceed the max. power
rating stated for operation with or without a fan kit.
3) Power ratings for the interface options are listed in the table below.

Table 13: CPU board - Power calculation

Panel PC 900 (Skylake) User's manual V 1.10 47

Technical data

In order to accurately determine the total power of the complete system, the values in this table must be entered
in the power calculation table depending on the display unit being used.
Type Order number +5 V +3.3 V +12 V Total
power consumption
12.1" single-touch 5AP923.1215-00 - 4.2 W 7.2 W 11.4 W
15.0" single-touch 5AP923.1505-00 - 2.1 W 8.9 W 11 W
19.0" single-touch 5AP923.1906-00 ≤ D0 8W - 22.4 W 30.4 W
19.0" single-touch 5AP923.1906-00 ≥ E0 5W - 22 W 27 W
15.6" multi-touch 5AP933.156B-00 ≤ C0 3.35 W - 10.5 W 13.85 W
15.6" multi-touch 5AP933.156B-00 ≥ D0 1.8 W - 15.6 W 17.4 W
18.5" multi-touch 5AP933.185B-00 ≤ J0 6.1 W - 10.8 W 16.9 W
18.5" multi-touch 5AP933.185B-00 ≥ K0 3.9 W - 7.9 W 11.77 W
21.5" multi-touch 5AP933.215C-00 ≤ C0 7.4 W - 18.3 W 25.7 W
21.5" multi-touch 5AP933.215C-00 ≥ D0 4W - 15 W 19 W
24.0" multi-touch 5AP933.240C-00 ≤ C0 6.35 W - 24 W 30.35 W
24.0" multi-touch 5AP933.240C-00 5W - 24.5 W 29.5 W

The following specifications are maximum values without additional consumers (e.g. USB devices).
Display type Model number +5 V +3.3 V +12 V Power consumption
Total
10.4" single-touch 5AP1120.1043-000 - 1.3 W 3.6 W 4.9 W
10.4" single-touch with keys 5AP1180.1043-000 0.5 W 1.9 W 3.6 W 6W
10.4" single-touch with keys 5AP1181.1043-000 0.7 W 1.9 W 3.6 W 6.2 W
10.4" single-touch with keys 5AP1182.1043-000 1W 1.9 W 3.6 W 6.5 W
12.1" single-touch 5AP1120.1214-000 - 1.9 W 7W 8.9 W
15.0" single-touch 5AP1120.1505-000 - 2.1 W 8.9 W 11 W
15.0" single-touch with keys 5AP1180.1505-000 0.5 W 2.7 W 8.9 W 12.1 W
15.0" single-touch with keys 5AP1181.1505-000 0.8 W 2.7 W 8.9 W 12.4 W
15.6" single-touch 5AP1120.156B-000 2.5 W - 10.5 W 13 W
15.6" multi-touch 5AP1130.156C-000 6W 18 W 24 W
15.6" multi-touch 5AP1130.156C-001 6W 18 W 24 W
18.5" multi-touch 5AP1130.185C-000 7W 18.6 W 25.6 W
19.0" single-touch 5AP1120.1906-000 5W - 22 W 27 W

Table 14: AP1000 display units - Power calculation

In order to accurately determine the total power of the complete system, the values in this table must be entered
in the power calculation table if one or more of these options are connected to the system unit.
Component Model number +5 V +3.3 V +12 V Power consumption
Total
Interface option
RS232 IF option 5AC901.I232-00 1W - - 1W
RS232/RS422/RS485 IF op- 5AC901.I485-00 1W - - 1W
tion
CAN IF option 5AC901.ICAN-00 1W - - 1W
CAN IF option 5AC901.ICAN-01 1W - - 1W
Audio IF option 5AC901.IHDA-00 0.2 W 0.2 W - 0.4 W
POWERLINK IF option 5AC901.IPLK-00 - 1.5 W - 1.5 W
SRAM IF option 5AC901.ISRM-00 - 2W - 2W
Ready relay IF option 5AC901.IRDY-00 0.2 W - - 0.2 W
System I/O IF option 5AC901.ISIO-00 - 0.5 W - 0.5 W
UPS IF option 5AC901.IUPS-00 in standby - - 0.1 W 0.1 W
UPS IF option 5AC901.IUPS-01 in standby - - 0.1 W 0.1 W
Gigabit Ethernet IF option 5AC901.IETH-00 - 1W - 1W
PCIe cards
PCIe x1 Ethernet card 5ACPCE.ETH1-00 - 1W - 1W
PCIe x4 Ethernet card 5ACPCE.ETH4-00 - 4W - 4W

Table 15: Interface options - Power calculation

48 Panel PC 900 (Skylake) User's manual V 1.10

 Technical data

4.1.4.2 Block diagram

The following block diagram shows the simplified structure of the Panel PC 900 complete system without a display
unit.

SO-DIMM
DDR4 Ch A
DDR4
(Skylake) Female connector 1 / 2
DDR4 Ch B

Intel PCH Bus units

5AC902.BX01-00
5AC902.BX01-01
5AC902.BX02-00
5AC902.BX02-01
5AC902.BX02-02
Fans 1-3

Battery
IF option 1 IF option 2
UPS
HDA SRAM
CAN CAN
RS232/RS422/RS485 RS232/RS422/RS485
Ready relay Ready relay

Green/Red Yellow Yellow Green/Red

Interface optional or internal Interface routed externally

Panel PC 900 (Skylake) User's manual V 1.10 49

Technical data

4.1.5 Device interfaces and slots

4.1.5.1 Overview of device interfaces

The interfaces available on the device or module are numbered for the purpose of clear differentiation.
The numbering used by the operating system may deviate, however.
For all connections, only connections within a building are permitted, taking into account maximum
lengths.
The following figures shows the interfaces on the Panel PC 900 with an installed bus unit and AC power supply.

No. Type of interface No. Type of interface

1 230 VAC power "Optional VAC power supply" 10 Audio "USB interfaces"
"Audio"
2 On/Off switch "Optional VAC power supply" 11 Monitor/Panel "Panel/Monitor interface"
3 Power 24 VDC "+24 VDC power supply" 12 ETH2 (Ethernet 2) "Onboard Ethernet interfaces"
4 Battery "Battery" 13 USB3 / USB4 "USB interfaces"
5 Functional ground connection Grounding 14 ETH1 (Ethernet 1) "Onboard Ethernet interfaces"
6 IF option 1 "IF options" 15 USB2 / USB1 "USB interfaces"
7 IF option 2 "IF options" 16 Card slot 1 "Card slot (PCI / PCIe)"
8 COM 2 Serial interfaces (COM1 and COM2) 17 Card slot 2 "Card slot (PCI / PCIe)"
9 COM 1 Serial interfaces (COM1 and COM2) -

A
9

11

2 10
1
3 4
5 6 7 8
View A
No. Type of interface No. Type of interface
1 CFast "CFast slot" 7 LED "HDD" "LED status indicators"
2 Main memory and "Main memory slots" 8 LED "POWER" "LED status indicators"
Slide-in compact drive Slide-in compact slot
3 Reset button "Power button / Reset button" 9 Slide-in drive on bus unit "Slide-in slot"
4 Power button "Power button / Reset button" 10 Fan kit for system unit
5 LED "RUN" "LED status indicators" 11 Fan kit for bus unit
6 LED "LINK" "LED status indicators" -

50 Panel PC 900 (Skylake) User's manual V 1.10

 Technical data

4.1.5.2 Power supply

The Panel PC can be operated with 24 VDC or optionally with 100~240 VAC. The 5AC902.PS00-00 power supply
is required for AC power.
For information about installing or replacing the power supply, see section "Installing or replacing the AC power
supply" on page 212.

Danger!
• The entire power supply must be disconnected and electrostatic discharge must take place on
the housing or ground connection before removing any covers or components from the device
and installing or removing any accessories, hardware or cables.
• Remove the power cable from the device and from the power supply.
• All covers and components, accessories, hardware and cables must be installed or secured
before the device is connected to the power supply and switched on.
• To meet the requirements of UL certification, copper cables must be used that are designed for
an operating temperature >90°C.

4.1.5.2.1 +24 VDC power supply

Danger!
This device is only permitted to by supplied by a SELV/PELV power supply unit or with safety extra-low
voltage (SELV) per IEC 61010-2-201.
The necessary 3-pin connector is not included in delivery; for suitable accessories, see "0TB103.9x" on page 314.
The device is protected against overload and reverse polarity by a soldered fuse (15 A, fast-acting). If the fuse
is defective (e.g. due to overload), the device must be sent to B&R for repairs. If the polarity is reversed, it is not
necessary to replace the fuse.
Pin Description Figure
1 +
2 Functional ground
3 -

• Reverse polarity protection

• 3-pin
• Male

Electrical properties
Operating voltage 24 VDC ±25%
Operating current Max. 7.4 A
Nominal voltage 24 VDC
Nominal current Max. 5.5 A
Inrush current Max. 60 A for < 300 µs
Galvanic isolation Yes
Uninterruptible power supply Optional, with 5AC901.IUPS-00 or 5AC901.IUPS-01

4.1.5.2.1.1 Grounding

Caution!
The functional ground (power supply pin 2 and
ground connection) must be connected to the
central grounding point (e.g. control cabinet
or system) via the shortest possible path with
the lowest possible resistance and with the
largest possible wire cross section. This type of
grounding is mandatory for proper functionali-
ty.

For example, a copper strip must be attached to the ground connection at a central grounding point of the control
cabinet or system in which the device is installed. The wire cross section should be as large as possible (at least
2.5 mm²).

Panel PC 900 (Skylake) User's manual V 1.10 51

Technical data

4.1.5.2.2 Optional VAC power supply

The optional 5AC902.PS00-00 power supply must be installed on the Panel PC in order to operate the Panel PC
with AC power.
The 3-pin male connector required for the power supply interface is not included in delivery. It can be ordered from
B&R using model number 0TB3103.8000.
The device is protected against overload and reverse polarity by a soldered fuse. If the fuse is defective (e.g. due
to overload), the device must be sent to B&R for repairs. If the polarity is reversed, it is not necessary to replace
the fuse.
Description Figure
Power supply connection
• Reverse polarity protection
• 3-pin, male
Pin Description
1 Protective ground
2 L
3 N
Electrical properties
Nominal voltage 100 to 240 VAC
Frequency 45 to 65 Hz
Nominal current 1.25 to 2.5 A
Inrush current <20 A (on cold restart, 100% load and 100 VAC)
Internal fuse Yes
Uninterruptible power supply Optional with external UPS
On/Off switch
O The Panel PC is switched off.
I The Panel PC is switched on.

4.1.5.3 Serial interfaces (COM1 and COM2)

Description Figure
RS232
DSUB,
Variant 9-pin,
male
Modem supported,
Type
not galvanically isolated
16550-compatible,
UART
16-byte FIFO buffer
Transfer rate Max. 115 kbit/s
Bus length Max. 15 m
1
Pin Pinout 6
1 DCD
2 RXD 9
5
3 TXD
4 DTR
5 GND
6 DSR
7 RTS
8 CTS
9 RI

52 Panel PC 900 (Skylake) User's manual V 1.10

 Technical data

4.1.5.4 Panel/Monitor interface

Panel/Monitor interface - SDL (Smart Display Link) / DVI / RGB

The following overview lists the video signals available on the panel/monitor output. For
details, see the technical data for the CPU board being used.
CPU board Video signals with all system unit variants
5PC901.TS17-00 SDL, DVI, RGB
5PC901.TS17-01 SDL, DVI, RGB
5PC901.TS17-02 SDL, DVI, RGB
5PC901.TS17-03 SDL, DVI, RGB

Table 16: Panel/Monitor interface - SDL, DVI, RGB

Information:
The hardware and graphics drivers of approved operating systems support the hot plugging of display
devices to the panel/monitor interface for service purposes. The panel/monitor connector is specified
for 100 connection cycles.

Information:
If a display device with touch screen is connected to the panel/monitor interface and then disconnected
again during operation (hot plugging), it may be necessary to recalibrate the touch screen.

Information:
The RGB interface uses an analog signal; the line length depends on the resolution and prevailing
environmental conditions. This interface is therefore only recommended for service purposes.

4.1.5.4.1 USB transfer in SDL and DVI operation

It is important to note the following information about the transfer rate:

• In SDL operation without USB type A/B cable, the USB transfer rate is limited to USB 1.1.
• A USB transfer rate of USB 2.0 is possible in DVI or SDL operation with a USB type A/B cable.

4.1.5.4.2 Pinout

Pin Pinout Description Pin Pinout Description

1 TMDS data 2- DVI lane 2 (negative) 16 HPD Hot plug detection
2 TMDS data 2+ DVI lane 2 (positive) 17 TMDS data 0- DVI lane 0 (negative)
3 TMDS data 2/4 SHIELD Shield for data pairs 2 and 4 18 TMDS data 0+ DVI lane 0 (positive)
4 TMDS data 0/XUSB1
SDL- SDL lane (negative) 19 Shield of data pair 0 and USB1
SHIELD
5 SDL+ SDL lane (positive) 20 XUSB1- USB lane 1 (negative)
6 DDC clock DDC-based control signal (clock) 21 XUSB1+ USB lane 1 (positive)
7 DDC data DDC-based control signal (data) 22 TMDS clock shield Shield of clock pair
8 ANALOG VERT SYNC Analog vertical synchronization 23 TMDS clock+ DVI clock (positive)
9 TMDS data 1- DVI lane 1 (negative) 24 TMDS clock - DVI clock (negative)
10 TMDS data 1+ DVI lane 1 (positive) C1 ANALOG RED Analog red
TMDS data 1/XUSB0
11 Shield of data pair 1 and USB0 C2 ANALOG GREEN Analog green
SHIELD
12 XUSB0- USB lane 0 (negative) C3 ANALOG BLUE Analog blue
13 XUSB0+ USB lane 0 (positive) C4 ANALOG HORZ SYNC Analog horizontal synchronization
14 +5 V power1) +5 V power supply C5 ANALOG GND Analog ground (return for R, G and B signals)
Ground (return for +5 V,
15 Ground - -
HSync and VSync)
1) Protected internally by a multifuse.

Panel PC 900 (Skylake) User's manual V 1.10 53

Technical data

4.1.5.4.3 Cable lengths and resolutions for SDL transfer

The following table shows the relationship between segment length and maximum resolution depending on the
SDL cable:
SDL cable Resolution
VGA SVGA XGA HD SXGA UXGA FHD
Segment length [m] 640 x 480 800 x 600 1024 x 768 1366 x 768 1280 x 1024 1600 x 1200 1920 x 1080
0.8 5CASDL.0008-00 5CASDL.0008-00 5CASDL.0008-00 5CASDL.0008-00 5CASDL.0008-00 5CASDL.0008-00 5CASDL.0008-00
5CASDL.0018-00 5CASDL.0018-00 5CASDL.0018-00 5CASDL.0018-00 5CASDL.0018-00 5CASDL.0018-00 5CASDL.0018-00
1.8 5CASDL.0018-01 5CASDL.0018-01 5CASDL.0018-01 5CASDL.0018-01 5CASDL.0018-01 5CASDL.0018-01 5CASDL.0018-01
5CASDL.0018-03 5CASDL.0018-03 5CASDL.0018-03 5CASDL.0018-03 5CASDL.0018-03 5CASDL.0018-03 5CASDL.0018-03
5CASDL.0050-00 5CASDL.0050-00 5CASDL.0050-00 5CASDL.0050-00 5CASDL.0050-00 5CASDL.0050-00 5CASDL.0050-00
5 5CASDL.0050-01 5CASDL.0050-01 5CASDL.0050-01 5CASDL.0050-01 5CASDL.0050-01 5CASDL.0050-01 5CASDL.0050-01
5CASDL.0050-03 5CASDL.0050-03 5CASDL.0050-03 5CASDL.0050-03 5CASDL.0050-03 5CASDL.0050-03 5CASDL.0050-03
6 5CASDL.0060-00 5CASDL.0060-00 5CASDL.0060-00 5CASDL.0060-00 5CASDL.0060-00 5CASDL.0060-00 5CASDL.0060-00
5CASDL.0100-00 5CASDL.0100-00 5CASDL.0100-00 5CASDL.0100-00 5CASDL.0100-00 5CASDL.0100-00 5CASDL.0100-00
10 5CASDL.0100-01 5CASDL.0100-01 5CASDL.0100-01 5CASDL.0100-01 5CASDL.0100-01 5CASDL.0100-01 5CASDL.0100-01
5CASDL.0100-03 5CASDL.0100-03 5CASDL.0100-03 5CASDL.0100-03 5CASDL.0100-03 5CASDL.0100-03 5CASDL.0100-03
5CASDL.0150-00 5CASDL.0150-00 5CASDL.0150-00 5CASDL.0150-00 5CASDL.0150-00 - -
15 5CASDL.0150-01 5CASDL.0150-01 5CASDL.0150-01 5CASDL.0150-01 5CASDL.0150-01 - -
5CASDL.0150-03 5CASDL.0150-03 5CASDL.0150-03 5CASDL.0150-03 5CASDL.0150-03 - 5CASDL.0150-03
5CASDL.0200-00 5CASDL.0200-00 5CASDL.0200-00 5CASDL.0200-00 5CASDL.0200-00 - -
20
5CASDL.0200-03 5CASDL.0200-03 5CASDL.0200-03 5CASDL.0200-03 5CASDL.0200-03 - 5CASDL.0200-03
5CASDL.0250-00 5CASDL.0250-00 5CASDL.0250-00 5CASDL.0250-00 - - -
25
5CASDL.0250-03 5CASDL.0250-03 5CASDL.0250-03 5CASDL.0250-03 - - -
5CASDL.0300-00 5CASDL.0300-00 - - - - -
30
5CASDL.0300-03 5CASDL.0300-03 5CASDL.0300-13 5CASDL.0300-13 5CASDL.0300-13 - 5CASDL.0300-13
40 5CASDL.0400-13 5CASDL.0400-13 5CASDL.0400-13 5CASDL.0400-13 5CASDL.0400-13 - 5CASDL.0400-13

4.1.5.4.4 Cable lengths and resolutions for DVI transfer

The following table shows the relationship between segment length and maximum resolution depending on the
DVI cable:
DVI cable Resolution
VGA SVGA XGA HD SXGA UXGA FHD
Segment length [m] 640 x 480 800 x 600 1024 x 768 1366 x 768 1280 x 1024 1600 x 1200 1920 x 1080
1.8 5CADVI.0018-00 5CADVI.0018-00 5CADVI.0018-00 5CADVI.0018-00 5CADVI.0018-00 5CADVI.0018-00 5CADVI.0018-00
5 5CADVI.0050-00 5CADVI.0050-00 5CADVI.0050-00 5CADVI.0050-00 5CADVI.0050-00 5CADVI.0050-00 5CADVI.0050-00

The maximum cable length for DVI transfer is limited to 5 m due to the USB specification.

54 Panel PC 900 (Skylake) User's manual V 1.10

 Technical data

4.1.5.5 Onboard Ethernet interfaces

ETH1
This Ethernet controller is integrated in the CPU board and is routed externally via the system unit.
Description Image
Variant RJ45, female
Controller Intel I219
Cabling S/STP (Cat 5e)
Transfer rate 10/100/1000 Mbit/s1)
Cable length Max. 100 m (min. Cat5e)
Speed LED On Off
Green 100 Mbit/s 10 Mbit/s2)
Orange (light) 1000 Mbit/s -
Link LED On Off
Orange (light) Link (Ethernet network Activity (blinking - da-
connection available) ta transfer in progress)

1) Switching takes place automatically.

2) The 10 Mbit/s transfer speed / connection only exists if the Link LED is also lit at the same time.

ETH2
This Ethernet controller is integrated in the CPU board and is routed externally via the system unit.
Description Image
Variant RJ45, female
Controller Intel I210
Wiring S/STP (Cat 5e)
Transfer rate 10/100/1000 Mbit/s1)
Cable length Max. 100 m (min. Cat 5e)
LED "Speed" On Off
Green 100 Mbit/s 10 Mbit/s2)
Orange (light) 1000 Mbit/s -
LED "Link" On Off
Orange (light) Link (a connection to an Activity (blinks) (data
Ethernet network exists) is being transferred)

1) Switching takes place automatically.

2) The 10 Mbit/s transfer rate / connection is only available if LED "Link" is active at the same time.

Driver support
A special driver is required to operate the Ethernet controller. Drivers for approved operating systems are available
for download in the Downloads section of the B&R website (www.br-automation.com) (if required and not already
included in the operating system).

Information:
Necessary drivers must be downloaded from the B&R website, not from manufacturer websites.

Panel PC 900 (Skylake) User's manual V 1.10 55

Technical data

4.1.5.6 USB interfaces

The Panel PC comes equipped with a USB 3.0 (Universal Serial Bus) host controller with multiple USB interfaces,
4 of which are accessible externally for the user.

Warning!
USB peripheral devices can be connected to the USB interfaces. Due to the variety of USB devices
available on the market, B&R cannot guarantee their functionality. The functionality of USB devices
available from B&R is ensured.

Caution!
Because this interface is designed according to general PC specifications, extreme care should be
exercised with regard to EMC, cable routing, etc.
4 USB 3.0 interfaces are provided on the bottom of the Panel PC.
USB1-4
Description Figure
Type USB 3.0
Design Type A, female
Transfer rate Low speed (1.5 Mbit/s)
Full speed (12 Mbit/s)
High speed (480 Mbit/s)
SuperSpeed (5 Gbit/s)1)
Current-carrying capacity1) Max. 1 A per USB
Cable length USB 2.0: Max. 5 m (without hub)
USB 3.0: Max. 3 m (without hub)

1) Compatibility with SuperSpeed depends on the operating system used.

2) Each USB interface is protected by a maintenance-free "USB current-limiting switch" (max. 1 A).

56 Panel PC 900 (Skylake) User's manual V 1.10

 Technical data

4.1.5.7 CFast slot

The PPC900 offers an easy-to-access CFast slot behind its front cover so that a CFast card can be used as a
removable storage medium for transferring data or performing upgrades.
This CFast slot is connected to the chipset internally via SATA 1 with SATA III design (SATA 6 Gbit/s).
Description Figure
Connection SATA 1
Model number Short description
CFast cards
5CFAST.2048-00 CFast card, 2 GB SLC
5CFAST.4096-00 CFast card, 4 GB SLC
5CFAST.8192-00 CFast card, 8 GB SLC
5CFAST.016G-00 CFast card, 16 GB SLC
5CFAST.032G-00 CFast card, 32 GB SLC
5CFAST.032G-10 CFast 32 GB MLC
5CFAST.064G-10 CFast 64 GB MLC
5CFAST.128G-10 CFast 128 GB MLC
-

Warning!
CFast cards are only permitted to be connected and disconnected in a voltage-free state!

4.1.5.8 Audio

The MIC and Line IN inputs use the same female connector (pink). The Line OUT output has its own female
connector (green). Connecting a device is detected by the driver so that the user can configure the connections.
MIC, Line IN, Line OUT
Variant 3.5 mm female connector
Controller Realtek RTL888
MIC (2) Connection of a mono microphone with a 3.5 mm jack
Line IN (2) Stereo Line IN signal supplied via a 3.5 mm jack
Line OUT (1) Connection of a stereo playback de-
vice (e.g. amplifier) via a 3.5 mm jack

A special driver is required to operate the audio controller. Drivers for approved operating systems are available
for download in the Downloads section of the B&R website (www.br-automation.com).

Information:
Necessary drivers must be downloaded from the B&R website, not from manufacturer websites.

Panel PC 900 (Skylake) User's manual V 1.10 57

Technical data

4.1.5.9 LED status indicators

The LED status indicators are located on the right-hand side of the Panel PC when viewed from the front.
The following timing is used for the LED status indicators:
Block size: 250 ms
Repeat interval: 500 ms, 2 boxes thus represent one interval
Assignment LED Color Status Function LED status indicators
Power Green On Voltage supply OK

Blinking Device booted, battery status "BAD"

Information:
For more information, see "Battery" on page
60.

Red On System in standby mode (S5: Soft-off mode or S4: Hi-

bernation mode suspend-to-disk)
Blinking MTCX running, battery status "BAD". System in standby
mode (S5: Soft-off mode or S4: Hibernation mode sus-
pend-to-disk)
Red/Green Blinking Faulty or incomplete BIOS, MTCX or I/O FPGA update,
battery status OK, voltage supply OK
Faulty or incomplete BIOS, MTCX or I/O FPGA up-
date, battery status OK, standby mode (S5: Soft-off
mode or S4: Hibernation mode suspend-to-disk)
Faulty or incomplete BIOS, MTCX or I/O FPGA up-
date, battery status BAD, voltage supply OK
Faulty or incomplete BIOS, MTCX or I/O FPGA up-
date, battery status BAD, standby mode (S5: Soft-off
mode or S4: Hibernation mode suspend-to-disk)

Information:
An update must be performed again.

Yellow On Voltage supply not OK, system operating from UPS

HDD Yellow On Indicates drive access (HDD, CFast)

Link Yellow On Indicates an active SDL connection on the male panel

connector

Blinking Indicates that an active SDL connection has been in-

terrupted by a loss of power to the display unit

Information:
Check the voltage supply / power connector
of the connected display unit.

Run Green Blinking Automation Runtime booting

Controlled by Automation Runtime (ARemb and AR-
win)
Green On Application running
Controlled by Automation Runtime (ARemb and AR-
win)
Red On Application in service mode
Controlled by Automation Runtime (ARemb and AR-
win)
Blinking Indicates a licensing violation

Table 17: LED status indicators - Data

58 Panel PC 900 (Skylake) User's manual V 1.10

 Technical data

4.1.5.10 Power button / Reset button

Due to full ATX power supply support, the power button has various functions.
Description Figure
The power button can be pressed with a pointed object (e.g. tip of a pen).

The power button behaves like the power switch on current desktop PCs with an ATX power supply:
Short press: Switches on the Automation PC or performs the action configured in the operating system when pressing
the power button (shutdown, sleep, etc.) and switches off the Automation PC.
Long press (approx. 4 seconds): ATX power supply unit switches off the Automation PC without shutting down.
Data loss possible!

Pressing the power button does not reset the MTCX processor.
The reset button can be pressed with a pointed object (e.g. paper clip or tip of a pen).

Pressing the reset button triggers a hardware and PCI reset. The APC910 is restarted.
Cold restart - Data loss possible!

During a reset, the MTCX processor is not reset.

Warning!
Resetting the system can result in data loss!

Panel PC 900 (Skylake) User's manual V 1.10 59

Technical data

4.1.5.11 Battery

The lithium battery (3 V, 950 mAh) buffers the internal real-time clock (RTC). It is located on the back of the Panel
PC. The battery is installed in a battery holder, making it very easy to replace.
The self-discharge time of the battery is at least 4 years (at 50°C, 8.5 μA for the components being supplied and
self-discharge of 40%). If an SRAM interface option is installed, the service life is 2½ years. The battery is subject
to wear and should be replaced regularly (at least after the specified service life) by changing the battery.
Description Figure
Battery
Type Renata 950 mAh
Removable Yes, accessible from the outside
Service life 4 years1)
Model number Short description
Batteries
0AC201.91 Lithium batteries, 4 pcs., 3 V / 950 mAh, button cell
4A0006.00-000 Lithium battery, 1 pc., 3 V / 950 mAh, button cell
1) At 50°C, 8.5 µA for the components being supplied and self-discharge of 40%. If an SRAM interface option is installed, the service life is 2½ years.

The status of the battery is determined immediately after the device is started and subsequently checked by the
system every 24 hours. During this measurement, the battery is subjected to a brief load (approximately 1 second)
and then evaluated. Once determined, the battery status is displayed in BIOS (Advanced - OEM features - System
board features - Voltage values) and in the B&R Control Center (ADI driver); it can also be read in a customer
application using the ADI library.
Battery status Function
N/A The hardware or firmware being used is too old and does not support reading the battery status.
GOOD Data buffering is intact.
BAD From the point when battery capacity is recognized as insufficient (BAD), data buffering is intact for approximately another 500
hours.

From the point when battery capacity is recognized as insufficient, data buffering is intact for approximately another
500 hours. When replacing the battery, data is buffered for approximately 10 minutes by a gold leaf capacitor.

60 Panel PC 900 (Skylake) User's manual V 1.10

 Technical data

4.1.5.12 Slide-in compact slot

The slide-in compact slot is connected to the chipset internally via SATA 0 with SATA III design (SATA 6.0 Gbit/s).
Description Figure
Connection SATA 0
Model number Short description
Drives
5AC901.CHDD-01 500 GB hard disk - Slide-in compact - SATA
5AC901.CSSD-03 60 GB SSD MLC - Slide-in compact - SATA
5AC901.CSSD-04 128 GB SSD MLC - Slide-in compact - SATA
5AC901.CSSD-05 256 GB SSD MLC - Slide-in compact - Toshiba - SATA
5AC901.CSSD-06 512 GB SSD MLC - Slide-in compact - Toshiba - SATA
5AC901.CCFA-00 CFast adapter - For slide-in compact slot

Information:
For information about installing or replacing a slide-in compact drive, please refer to the section "In-
stalling or replacing a slide-in compact drive" on page 219.

4.1.5.13 Slide-in slot

The slide-in slot is integrated on the bus unit, meaning that it is only available when the bus unit is installed. It is
connected to the chipset internally via SATA 2 and USB with SATA III (SATA 6.0 Gbit/s) design.
Description Figure
Connection SATA 2 and USB
Model number Short description
Drives
5AC901.SDVW-00 DVD drive - DVD-R/RW|DVD+R/RW - Slide-in
5AC901.SSCA-00 Slide-in compact adapter - For slide-in compact drives

Information:
For information about installing or replacing a slide-in drive, please refer to the section "Installing a
slide-in drive" on page 226.

Panel PC 900 (Skylake) User's manual V 1.10 61

Technical data

4.1.5.14 Main memory slots

The Panel PC 900 provides 2 slots for DDR4 main memory modules.
Description Figure
Velocity DDR4-2133 (PC4-17000)
Order number Short description
Main memory
5MMDDR.4096-04 SO-DIMM DDR4, 4096 MB
5MMDDR.8192-04 SO-DIMM DDR4, 8192 MB
5MMDDR.016G-04 SO-DIMM DDR4, 16 GB

Information:
For information about replacing or installing a main memory module, see section "Replacing main
memory" on page 214.

Caution!
If using only one main memory module, it must be installed in RAM slot 2.

RAM slot 2

RAM slot 1

62 Panel PC 900 (Skylake) User's manual V 1.10

 Technical data

4.1.5.15 IF options

PPC900 system units have 2 slots for interface options:

• IF option 1 slot (1)
• IF option 2 slot (2)

Information:
For information about replacing or installing an
interface option, see section Installing the inter-
face option.

IF option 1 slot
Order number Interface option - Short description
5AC901.I232-001) Interface card - 1x RS232 interface - For APC910/PPC900/APC3100/PPC3100
5AC901.I485-001) Interface card - 1x RS232/422/458 interface - For APC910/PPC900/APC3100/PPC3100
5AC901.ICAN-001)2) Interface card - 1x CAN interface - For APC910/PPC900/APC3100/PPC3100
5AC901.ICAN-011)2) Interface card - 1x CAN interface (SJA1000) - For APC910/PPC900/APC3100/PPC3100
5AC901.IHDA-00 Interface card - 1x audio interface (1x MIC / 1x Line In / 1x OUT) - For APC910/PPC900/APC3100/PPC3100
5AC901.IRDY-00 Interface card - Ready relay - For APC910/PPC900/APC3100/PPC3100
5AC901.ISIO-00 Interface card - System I/O - For APC910/PPC900/APC3100/PPC3100
5AC901.IUPS-003) UPS - For 4.5 Ah battery
5AC901.IUPS-014) UPS - For 2.2 Ah battery
1) If IF options 5AC901.I232-00/5AC901.I485-00 and 5AC901.ICAN are used simultaneously, the 5AC901.ICAN should be installed in the IF option 1 slot and
the 5AC901.I232-00/5AC901.I485-00 should be installed in the IF option 2 slot.
2) Simultaneous operation of 2 5AC901.ICAN-xx CAN options in the IF option 1 and IF option 2 slots is not possible.
3) UPS IF option 5AC901.IUPS-00 is only permitted to be operated with battery unit 5AC901.BUPS-00!
4) UPS IF option 5AC901.IUPS-01 is only permitted to be operated with battery unit 5AC901.BUPS-01!

IF option 2 slot
Order number Interface option - Short description
5AC901.I232-001) Interface card - 1x RS232 interface - For APC910/PPC900/APC3100/PPC3100
5AC901.I485-001) Interface card - 1x RS232/422/458 interface - For APC910/PPC900/APC3100/PPC3100
5AC901.ICAN-001)2) Interface card - 1x CAN interface - For APC910/PPC900/APC3100/PPC3100
5AC901.ICAN-011)2) Interface card - 1x CAN interface (SJA1000) - For APC910/PPC900/APC3100/PPC3100
5AC901.IETH-00 Interface card - 1x ETH 10/100/1000 - For APC910/PPC900/APC3100/PPC3100
5AC901.IPLK-00 Interface card - 1x POWERLINK interface - 2 MB SRAM - For APC910/PPC900/APC3100/PPC3100
5AC901.ISRM-00 Interface card - 2 MB RAM - For APC910/PPC900/APC3100/PPC3100
5AC901.IRDY-00 Interface card - Ready relay - For APC910/PPC900/APC3100/PPC3100
5AC901.ISIO-00 Interface card - System I/O - For APC910/PPC900/APC3100/PPC3100
1) If IF options 5AC901.I232-00/5AC901.I485-00 and 5AC901.ICAN are used simultaneously, the 5AC901.ICAN should be installed in the IF option 1 slot and
the 5AC901.I232-00/5AC901.I485-00 should be installed in the IF option 2 slot.
2) Simultaneous operation of 2 5AC901.ICAN-xx CAN options in the IF option 1 and IF option 2 slots is not possible.

Panel PC 900 (Skylake) User's manual V 1.10 63

Technical data

4.1.5.16 Card slot (PCI / PCIe)

If a bus unit is installed in the Panel PC 900, the bus unit variant being used will determine whether standard PCI
2.2 half-size cards or PCI Express (PCIe) half-size cards can be inserted. They must not exceed the following
dimensions.
177.7

106.7
100.5
9

9
17.4 25.8 55

Figure 13: Standard half-size 32-bit PCI card - Dimensions

167.65
106.65
111.15

100.36

11.65
8.25

3.65

15
49.65
57.15
59.05

Figure 14: Standard half-size PCIe card - Dimensions

Information:
For information about installing or replacing a PCI/PCIe card, please refer to section "Installing PCI/
PCIe cards" on page 224.

64 Panel PC 900 (Skylake) User's manual V 1.10

 Technical data

4.1.6 Layout of AP1000 display units

A wide selection of different display sizes and display units with touch screen are available. The following table
provides an overview of the display units and their features.
Display type Model number Resolution Touch screen Function keys System keys Front USB interface
10.4" single-touch 5AP1120.1043-000 VGA Single-touch No No Yes
10.4" single-touch with keys 5AP1180.1043-000 VGA Single-touch Yes No Yes
10.4" single-touch with keys 5AP1181.1043-000 VGA Single-touch Yes Yes Yes
10.4" single-touch with keys 5AP1182.1043-000 VGA Single-touch Yes Yes Yes
12.1" single-touch 5AP1120.1214-000 SVGA Single-touch No No Yes
15.0" single-touch 5AP1120.1505-000 XGA Single-touch No No Yes
15.0" single-touch with keys 5AP1180.1505-000 XGA Single-touch Yes No Yes
15.0" single-touch with keys 5AP1181.1505-000 XGA Single-touch Yes Yes Yes
15.6" single-touch 5AP1120.156B-000 HD Single-touch No No No
15.6" multi-touch 5AP1130.156C-000 Full HD Multi-touch No No No
15.6" multi-touch 5AP1130.156C-001 Full HD Multi-touch No No No
18.5" multi-touch 5AP1130.185C-000 Full HD Multi-touch No No No
19.0" single-touch 5AP1120.1906-000 SXGA Single-touch No No Yes
Function keys Function keys

Front USB interface Function keys Front USB interface

Function keys
Function keys

Function keys
Function keys
System keys

4.1.6.1 Slide-in labels

Panels with keys are delivered with inserted, transparent slide-in labels in the function keys. These can be labeled
by hand.
It is also possible to download a template for slide-in labels with individual captions from the B&R website (www.br-
automation.com).
The slots provided for slide-in labels are accessible on the rear of the Automation Panel devices.

Panel PC 900 (Skylake) User's manual V 1.10 65

Technical data

4.1.6.2 Key and LED configuration

Each key and LED can be individually configured and adapted to the application. Various tools from B&R are
available for configuration:
• B&R Key Editor for Windows operating systems
• B&R KCF Editor for Windows operating systems
• Visual Components
Keys and LEDs from each device are processed by the matrix controller in a bit string of 128 bits each. The positions
of the keys and LEDs in the matrix are displayed as hardware numbers and can be read directly on the target
system using B&R tools and the ADI Control Center.

Keys and LEDs in the matrix: Illustration examples:

• Hardware numbers of keys are specified in the follow- Key Operating element with LED

ing with black indexes.

• Hardware numbers of LEDs are specified in the follow-
Key with LED
ing with blue indexes.

LED

5AP1180.1043-000

66 Panel PC 900 (Skylake) User's manual V 1.10

 Technical data

5AP1181.1043-000

5AP1182.1043-000

5AP1180.1505-000

Panel PC 900 (Skylake) User's manual V 1.10 67

Technical data

5AP1181.1505-000

68 Panel PC 900 (Skylake) User's manual V 1.10

 Technical data

4.1.6.3 USB interface

AP1000 panels with 10.4", 12.1" (4:3 format only), 15" and 19" display diagonals are equipped with a USB 2.0
interface on the front. This is equipped with a USB interface cover. IP65 protection (front) is only provided if the
USB interface cover is correctly installed.

Warning!
USB peripheral devices can be connected to the USB interfaces. Due to the variety of USB devices
available on the market, B&R cannot guarantee their functionality. The functionality of USB devices
available from B&R is ensured.

Caution!
Due to the general PC specification, this interface must be handled with the utmost care with regard
to EMC, cable routing, etc.

Front USB
The front USB interface is available for service purposes.
Universal Serial Bus (front USB)1)
Type USB 2.0 1x USB type A, female
Variant Type A
Transfer rate Low speed (1.5 Mbit/s)
Full speed (12 Mbit/s)
High speed (480 Mbit/s)
Current-carrying capacity2) Max. 0.5 A
Cable length
USB 2.0 Max. 5 m (without hub)

1) The interfaces, etc. available on the device or module have been numbered for the purpose of clear differentiation. This numbering may deviate from the
numbering used by the respective operating system, however.
2) The USB interface is protected by a maintenance-free "USB current-limiting switch" (max. 0.5 A).

Panel PC 900 (Skylake) User's manual V 1.10 69

Technical data

4.2 Individual components

4.2.1 AP9x3 panels

4.2.1.1 5AP923.1215-00

4.2.1.1.1 General information

• Panel for AP9x3, PPC900, PPC2100, PPC2200 or PPC3100

• 12.1" TFT XGA color display
• Single-touch (analog resistive)
• Control cabinet installation

4.2.1.1.2 Order data

Order number Short description Figure

Panels
5AP923.1215-00 Automation Panel 12.1" XGA TFT - 1024 x 768 pixels (4:3) - Sin-
gle-touch (analog resistive) - Control cabinet installation - Land-
scape format - For PPC900/PPC2100/PPC3100/PPC2200 - For
link modules

4.2.1.1.3 Technical data

Information:
The following specified characteristic data, features and limit values are only valid for these individual
components and may differ from those of the complete system. The data specified for the complete
system applies to the complete system in which this individual component is used, for example.
Order number 5AP923.1215-00
General information
B&R ID code 0xE1B0
Certifications
CE Yes
UL cULus E115267
Industrial control equipment
HazLoc cULus HazLoc E180196
Industrial control equipment
for hazardous locations
Class I, Division 2, Groups ABCD, T4 1)
EAC Yes
Display
Type TFT color
Diagonal 12.1"
Colors 16.7 million
Resolution XGA, 1024 x 768 pixels
Contrast 700:1
Viewing angles
Horizontal Direction R = 80° / Direction L = 80°
Vertical Direction U = 80° / Direction D = 80°
Backlight
Type LED
Brightness (dimmable) Typ. 25 to 500 cd/m²
Half-brightness time 2) 50,000 h
Touch screen 3)
Technology Analog, resistive
Controller B&R, serial, 12-bit
Transmittance 81% ±3%
Operating conditions
Pollution degree per EN 61131-2 Pollution degree 2
Degree of protection per EN 60529 Front: IP65
Back: IP20 (only with installed link module or installed system unit)
Degree of protection per UL 50 Front: Type 4X indoor use only

70 Panel PC 900 (Skylake) User's manual V 1.10

 Technical data
Order number 5AP923.1215-00
Mechanical properties
Front
Frame Aluminum, coated
Panel overlay
Material Polyester
Light background color RAL 9006
Dark border color around display RAL 7024
Gasket 3 mm fixed gasket
Dimensions
Width 315 mm
Height 239 mm
Weight 2200 g
1) Yes, but applies only if all components installed in the complete system have this certification and the complete system bears the corresponding mark.
2) At 25°C ambient temperature. Reducing the brightness by 50% can increase the half-brightness time by approximately 50%.
3) Touch screen drivers for approved operating systems are available for download in the Downloads section of the B&R website (www.br-automation.com).

4.2.1.1.4 Dimensions

315
239

4.2.1.1.5 Temperature/Humidity diagram

RH [%]
100
95
90

80

70

60

50 (1)
40

30

20 (2)
10
5
0 T [°C]
-80 -70 -60 -50 -40 -30 -20 -10 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100

Diagram legend
(1) Operation T [°C] Temperature in °C
(2) Storage and transport RH [%] Relative humidity (RH) in percent and non-condensing

Panel PC 900 (Skylake) User's manual V 1.10 71

Technical data

4.2.1.2 5AP923.1505-00

4.2.1.2.1 General information

• Panel for AP9x3, PPC900, PPC2100, PPC2200 or PPC3100

• 15.0" TFT XGA color display
• Single-touch (analog resistive)
• Control cabinet installation

4.2.1.2.2 Order data

Order number Short description Figure

Panels
5AP923.1505-00 Automation Panel 15.0" XGA TFT - 1024 x 768 pixels (4:3) - Sin-
gle-touch (analog resistive) - Control cabinet installation - Land-
scape format - For PPC900/PPC2100/PPC3100/PPC2200 - For
link modules

4.2.1.2.3 Technical data

Information:
The following specified characteristic data, features and limit values are only valid for these individual
components and may differ from those of the complete system. The data specified for the complete
system applies to the complete system in which this individual component is used, for example.
Order number 5AP923.1505-00
General information
B&R ID code 0xE169
Certifications
CE Yes
UL cULus E115267
Industrial control equipment
HazLoc cULus HazLoc E180196
Industrial control equipment
for hazardous locations
Class I, Division 2, Groups ABCD, T4 1)
DNV Temperature: B (0 - 55°C)
Humidity: B (up to 100%)
Vibration: A (0.7 g)
EMC: B (bridge and open deck) 2)
EAC Yes
Display
Type TFT color
Diagonal 15.0"
Colors 16.7 million
Resolution XGA, 1024 x 768 pixels
Contrast 700:1
Viewing angles
Horizontal Direction R = 80° / Direction L = 80°
Vertical Direction U = 70° / Direction D = 70°
Backlight
Type LED
Brightness (dimmable) Typ. 20 to 400 cd/m²
Half-brightness time 3) 50,000 h
Touch screen 4)
Technology Analog, resistive
Controller B&R, serial, 12-bit
Transmittance 81% ±3%
Operating conditions
Pollution degree per EN 61131-2 Pollution degree 2
Degree of protection per EN 60529 Front: IP65
Back: IP20 (only with installed link module or installed system unit)
Degree of protection per UL 50 Front: Type 4X indoor use only

72 Panel PC 900 (Skylake) User's manual V 1.10

 Technical data
Order number 5AP923.1505-00
Mechanical properties
Front
Frame Aluminum, coated
Panel overlay
Material Polyester
Light background color RAL 9006
Dark border color around display RAL 7024
Gasket 3 mm fixed gasket
Dimensions
Width 370 mm
Height 288 mm
Weight 3700 g
1) Yes, but applies only if all components installed in the complete system have this certification and the complete system bears the corresponding mark.
2) Yes, but applies only if all components installed in the complete system have this certification and are listed on the associated DNV certificate for the product
family.
3) At 25°C ambient temperature. Reducing the brightness by 50% can increase the half-brightness time by approximately 50%.
4) Touch screen drivers for approved operating systems are available for download in the Downloads section of the B&R website (www.br-automation.com).

4.2.1.2.4 Dimensions

370
288

4.2.1.2.5 Temperature/Humidity diagram

RH [%]
100
95
90

80

70

60

50 (1)
40

30

20 (2)
10 8
5
0 T [°C]
-80 -70 -60 -50 -40 -30 -20 -10 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100

Diagram legend
(1) Operation T [°C] Temperature in °C
(2) Storage and transport RH [%] Relative humidity (RH) in percent and non-condensing

Panel PC 900 (Skylake) User's manual V 1.10 73

Technical data

4.2.1.3 5AP923.1906-00

4.2.1.3.1 General information

• Panel for AP9x3, PPC900, PPC2100, PPC2200 or PPC3100

• 19.0" TFT SXGA color display
• Single-touch (analog resistive)
• Control cabinet installation

4.2.1.3.2 Order data

Order number Short description Figure

Panels
5AP923.1906-00 Automation Panel 19.0" SXGA TFT - 1280 x 1024 pixels (5:4)
- Single-touch (analog resistive) - Control cabinet installation -
Landscape format - For PPC900/PPC2100/PPC3100/PPC2200
- For link modules

4.2.1.3.3 Technical data

Information:
The following specified characteristic data, features and limit values are only valid for these individual
components and may differ from those of the complete system. The data specified for the complete
system applies to the complete system in which this individual component is used, for example.
Order number 5AP923.1906-00
Revision D0 E0
General information
B&R ID code 0xE1B1
Certifications
CE Yes
UL cULus E115267
Industrial control equipment
HazLoc cULus HazLoc E180196
Industrial control equipment
for hazardous locations
Class I, Division 2, Groups ABCD, T4 1)
EAC Yes
Display
Type TFT color
Diagonal 19.0"
Colors 16.7 million
Resolution SXGA, 1280 × 1024 pixels
Contrast 2000:1 1500:1
Viewing angles
Horizontal Direction R = 89° / Direction L = 89° Direction R = 85° / Direction L = 85°
Vertical Direction U = 89° / Direction D = 89° Direction U = 85° / Direction D = 85°
Backlight
Type LED
Brightness (dimmable) Typ. 30 to 300 cd/m² Typ. 35 to 350 cd/m²
Half-brightness time 2) 50,000 h 70,000 h
Touch screen 3)
Technology Analog, resistive
Controller B&R, serial, 12-bit
Transmittance 81% ±3%
Operating conditions
Pollution degree per EN 61131-2 Pollution degree 2
Degree of protection per EN 60529 Front: IP65
Back: IP20 (only with installed link module or installed system unit)
Degree of protection per UL 50 Front: Type 4X indoor use only

74 Panel PC 900 (Skylake) User's manual V 1.10

 Technical data
Order number 5AP923.1906-00
Revision D0 E0
Mechanical properties
Front
Frame Aluminum, coated
Panel overlay
Material Polyester
Light background color RAL 9006
Dark border color around display RAL 7024
Gasket 3 mm fixed gasket
Dimensions
Width 440 mm
Height 358 mm
Weight 5800 g
1) Yes, but applies only if all components installed in the complete system have this certification and the complete system bears the corresponding mark.
2) At 25°C ambient temperature. Reducing the brightness by 50% can increase the half-brightness time by approximately 50%.
3) Touch screen drivers for approved operating systems are available for download in the Downloads section of the B&R website (www.br-automation.com).

4.2.1.3.4 Dimensions

440
358

4.2.1.3.5 Temperature/Humidity diagram

5AP923.1906-00 ≥ Rev. E0

RH [%]
100
95
90

80

70

60
(2)
50 (1)
40

30

20

10
5
0 T [°C]
-80 -70 -60 -50 -40 -30 -20 -10 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100

Diagram legend
(1) Operation T [°C] Temperature in °C
(2) Storage and transport RH [%] Relative humidity (RH) in percent and non-condensing

Panel PC 900 (Skylake) User's manual V 1.10 75

Technical data

5AP923.1906-00 ≤ Rev. D0

RH [%]
100
95
90

80

70

60

50
(2) (1)
40

30

20

10
5
0 T [°C]
-80 -70 -60 -50 -40 -30 -20 -10 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100

Diagram legend
(1) Operation T [°C] Temperature in °C
(2) Storage and transport RH [%] Relative humidity (RH) in percent and non-condensing

76 Panel PC 900 (Skylake) User's manual V 1.10

 Technical data

4.2.1.4 5AP933.156B-00

4.2.1.4.1 General information

• Panel for AP9x3, PPC900, PPC2100, PPC2200 or PPC3100

• 15.6" TFT HD color display
• Multi-touch (PCT)
• Control cabinet installation

4.2.1.4.2 Order data

Order number Short description Figure

Panels
5AP933.156B-00 Automation Panel 15.6" HD TFT - 1366 x 768 pixels (16:9) -
Multi-touch (projected capacitive) - Control cabinet installation -
Landscape format - For PPC900/PPC2100/PPC3100/PPC2200
- For link modules

4.2.1.4.3 Technical data

Information:
The following specified characteristic data, features and limit values are only valid for these individual
components and may differ from those of the complete system. The data specified for the complete
system applies to the complete system in which this individual component is used, for example.
Order number 5AP933.156B-00
Revision C0 D0
General information
B&R ID code 0xE16A
Certifications
CE Yes
UL cULus E115267
Industrial control equipment
EAC Yes
Display
Type TFT color
Diagonal 15.6"
Colors 16.7 million
Resolution HD, 1366 × 768 pixels
Contrast 500:1 1000:1
Viewing angles
Horizontal Direction R = 85° / Direction L = 85°
Vertical Direction U = 80° / Direction D = 80° Direction U = 85° / Direction D = 85°
Backlight
Type LED
Brightness (dimmable) Typ. 15 to 300 cd/m² Typ. 40 to 400 cd/m²
Half-brightness time 1) 50,000 h 70,000 h
Touch screen 2)
Technology Projected capacitive touch (PCT)
Transmittance 88% ±2% >90%
Operating conditions
Pollution degree per EN 61131-2 Pollution degree 2
Degree of protection per EN 60529 Front: IP65
Back: IP20 (only with installed link module or installed system unit)
Degree of protection per UL 50 Front: Type 4X indoor use only
Mechanical properties
Front
Frame Aluminum, coated
Design Black
Gasket 3 mm fixed gasket
Dimensions
Width 414 mm
Height 258.5 mm
Weight 3850 g
1) At 25°C ambient temperature. Reducing the brightness by 50% can increase the half-brightness time by approximately 50%.
2) The specifications of the touch screen driver must be taken into account; see section "Multi-touch driver".

Panel PC 900 (Skylake) User's manual V 1.10 77

Technical data

4.2.1.4.4 Dimensions

414

258.5

4.2.1.4.5 Temperature/Humidity diagram

5AP933.156B-00 ≥ Rev. D0

RH [%]
100
95
90

80

70

60

50 (2) (1)
40

30

20

10
5
0 T [°C]
-80 -70 -60 -50 -40 -30 -20 -10 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100

Diagram legend
(1) Operation T [°C] Temperature in °C
(2) Storage and transport RH [%] Relative humidity (RH) in percent and non-condensing

5AP933.156B-00 ≤ Rev. C0

RH [%]
100
95
90

80

70

60
(2)
50 (1)
40

30

20

10
5
0 T [°C]
-80 -70 -60 -50 -40 -30 -20 -10 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100

Diagram legend
(1) Operation T [°C] Temperature in °C
(2) Storage and transport RH [%] Relative humidity (RH) in percent and non-condensing

78 Panel PC 900 (Skylake) User's manual V 1.10

 Technical data

4.2.1.5 5AP933.185B-00

4.2.1.5.1 General information

• Panel for AP9x3, PPC900, PPC2100, PPC2200 or PPC3100

• 18.5" TFT HD color display
• Multi-touch (PCT)
• Control cabinet installation

4.2.1.5.2 Order data

Order number Short description Figure

Panels
5AP933.185B-00 Automation Panel 18.5" HD TFT - 1366 x 768 pixels (16:9) -
Multi-touch (projected capacitive) - Control cabinet installation -
Landscape format - For PPC900/PPC2100/PPC3100/PPC2200
- For link modules

4.2.1.5.3 Technical data

Information:
The following specified characteristic data, features and limit values are only valid for these individual
components and may differ from those of the complete system. The data specified for the complete
system applies to the complete system in which this individual component is used, for example.
Order number 5AP933.185B-00
Revision C0 D0
General information
B&R ID code 0xE16B
Certifications
CE Yes
UL cULus E115267
Industrial control equipment
EAC Yes
Display
Type TFT color
Diagonal 18.5"
Colors 16.7 million
Resolution HD, 1366 × 768 pixels
Contrast 1000:1
Viewing angles
Horizontal Direction R = 85° / Direction L = 85°
Vertical Direction U = 80° / Direction D = 80°
Backlight
Type LED
Brightness (dimmable) Typ. 15 to 300 cd/m²
Half-brightness time 1) 50,000 h
Touch screen 2)
Technology Projected capacitive touch (PCT)
Transmittance 88% ±2% >90%
Operating conditions
Pollution degree per EN 61131-2 Pollution degree 2
Degree of protection per EN 60529 Front: IP65
Back: IP20 (only with installed link module or installed system unit)
Degree of protection per UL 50 Front: Type 4X indoor use only
Mechanical properties
Front
Frame Aluminum, coated
Design Black
Gasket 3 mm fixed gasket
Dimensions
Width 475 mm
Height 295 mm
Weight 4850 g
1) At 25°C ambient temperature. Reducing the brightness by 50% can increase the half-brightness time by approximately 50%.
2) The specifications of the touch screen driver must be taken into account; see section "Multi-touch driver".

Panel PC 900 (Skylake) User's manual V 1.10 79

Technical data

4.2.1.5.4 Dimensions

475

295

4.2.1.5.5 Temperature/Humidity diagram

5AP933.185B-00 ≥ Rev. D0
RH [%]
100
95
90

80

70

60

50
(2) (1)
40

30

20

10
5
0 T [°C]
-80 -70 -60 -50 -40 -30 -20 -10 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100

Diagram legend
(1) Operation T [°C] Temperature in °C
(2) Storage and transport RH [%] Relative humidity (RH) in percent and non-condensing

5AP933.185B-00 ≤ Rev. C0
RH [%]
100
95
90

80

70 (2)
60

50 (1)
40

30

20

10
5
0 T [°C]
-80 -70 -60 -50 -40 -30 -20 -10 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100

Diagram legend
(1) Operation T [°C] Temperature in °C
(2) Storage and transport RH [%] Relative humidity (RH) in percent and non-condensing

80 Panel PC 900 (Skylake) User's manual V 1.10

 Technical data

4.2.1.6 5AP933.215C-00

4.2.1.6.1 General information

• Panel for AP9x3, PPC900, PPC2100, PPC2200 or PPC3100

• 21.5" TFT FHD color display
• Multi-touch (PCT)
• Control cabinet installation

4.2.1.6.2 Order data

Order number Short description Figure

Panels
5AP933.215C-00 Automation Panel 21.5" Full HD TFT - 1920 x 1080 pixels (16:9)
- Multi-touch (projected capacitive) - Control cabinet installation -
Landscape format - For PPC900/PPC2100/PPC3100/PPC2200
- For link modules

4.2.1.6.3 Technical data

Information:
The following specified characteristic data, features and limit values are only valid for these individual
components and may differ from those of the complete system. The data specified for the complete
system applies to the complete system in which this individual component is used, for example.
Order number 5AP933.215C-00
Revision C0 D0
General information
B&R ID code 0xE16C
Certifications
CE Yes
UL cULus E115267
Industrial control equipment
EAC Yes
Display
Type TFT color
Diagonal 21.5"
Colors 16.7 million
Resolution FHD, 1920 × 1080 pixels
Contrast 1000:1 5000:1
Viewing angles
Horizontal Direction R = 89° / Direction L = 89°
Vertical Direction U = 89° / Direction D = 89°
Backlight
Type LED
Brightness (dimmable) Typ. 12.5 to 250 cd/m²
Half-brightness time 1) 30,000 h
Touch screen 2)
Technology Projected capacitive touch (PCT)
Transmittance 88% ±2% >90%
Operating conditions
Pollution degree per EN 61131-2 Pollution degree 2
Degree of protection per EN 60529 Front: IP65
Back: IP20 (only with installed link module or installed system unit)
Degree of protection per UL 50 Front: Type 4X indoor use only
Mechanical properties
Front
Frame Aluminum, coated
Design Black
Gasket 3 mm fixed gasket
Dimensions
Width 541.5 mm
Height 333 mm
Weight 5400 g
1) At 25°C ambient temperature. Reducing the brightness by 50% can increase the half-brightness time by approximately 50%.
2) The specifications of the touch screen driver must be taken into account; see section "Multi-touch driver".

Panel PC 900 (Skylake) User's manual V 1.10 81

Technical data

4.2.1.6.4 Dimensions

541.5

333

4.2.1.6.5 Temperature/Humidity diagram

5AP933.215C-00 ≥ Rev. D0
RH [%]
100
95
90

80

70

60

50
(2) (1)
40

30

20

10
5
0 T [°C]
-80 -70 -60 -50 -40 -30 -20 -10 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100

Diagram legend
(1) Operation T [°C] Temperature in °C
(2) Storage and transport RH [%] Relative humidity (RH) in percent and non-condensing

5AP933.215C-00 ≤ Rev. C0
RH [%]
100
95
90

80

70

60

50
(1)
40

30

20 (2)
10
5
0 T [°C]
-80 -70 -60 -50 -40 -30 -20 -10 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100

Diagram legend
(1) Operation T [°C] Temperature in °C
(2) Storage and transport RH [%] Relative humidity (RH) in percent and non-condensing

82 Panel PC 900 (Skylake) User's manual V 1.10

 Technical data

4.2.1.7 5AP933.240C-00

4.2.1.7.1 General information

• Panel for AP9x3, PPC900, PPC2100, PPC2200 or PPC3100

• 24" TFT FHD color display
• Multi-touch (PCT)
• Control cabinet installation

4.2.1.7.2 Order data

Order number Short description Figure

Panels
5AP933.240C-00 Automation Panel 24.0" Full HD TFT - 1920 x 1080 pixels (16:9)
- Multi-touch (projected capacitive) - Control cabinet installation -
Landscape format - For PPC900/PPC2100/PPC3100/PPC2200
- For link modules

4.2.1.7.3 Technical data

Information:
The following specified characteristic data, features and limit values are only valid for these individual
components and may differ from those of the complete system. The data specified for the complete
system applies to the complete system in which this individual component is used, for example.
Order number 5AP933.240C-00
Revision C0 D0
General information
B&R ID code 0xE1B4
Certifications
CE Yes
UL cULus E115267
Industrial control equipment
DNV Temperature: B (0 - 55°C)
Humidity: B (up to 100%)
Vibration: A (0.7 g)
EMC: B (bridge and open deck) 1)
EAC Yes
Display
Type TFT color
Diagonal 24.0"
Colors 16.7 million
Resolution FHD, 1920 × 1080 pixels
Contrast 5000:1
Viewing angles
Horizontal Direction R = 89° / Direction L = 89°
Vertical Direction U = 89° / Direction D = 89°
Backlight
Type LED
Brightness (dimmable) Typ. 30 to 300 cd/m²
Half-brightness time 2) 50,000 h
Touch screen 3)
Technology Projected capacitive touch (PCT)
Transmittance 88% ±2% >90%
Operating conditions
Pollution degree per EN 61131-2 Pollution degree 2
Degree of protection per EN 60529 Front: IP65
Back: IP20 (only with installed link module or installed system unit)
Degree of protection per UL 50 Front: Type 4X indoor use only
Mechanical properties
Front
Frame Aluminum, coated
Design Black
Gasket 3 mm fixed gasket

Panel PC 900 (Skylake) User's manual V 1.10 83

Technical data
Order number 5AP933.240C-00
Revision C0 D0
Dimensions
Width 598.5 mm
Height 364 mm
Weight Approx. 7800 g
1) Yes, but applies only if all components installed in the complete system have this certification and are listed on the associated DNV certificate for the product
family.
2) At 25°C ambient temperature. Reducing the brightness by 50% can increase the half-brightness time by approximately 50%.
3) The specifications of the touch screen driver must be taken into account; see section "Multi-touch driver".

4.2.1.7.4 Dimensions

598.5
364

4.2.1.7.5 Temperature/Humidity diagram

5AP933.240C-00 ≥ Rev. D0

RH [%]
100
95
90

80

70

60

50 (2) (1)
40

30

20

10
5
0 T [°C]
-80 -70 -60 -50 -40 -30 -20 -10 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100

Diagram legend
(1) Operation T [°C] Temperature in °C
(2) Storage and transport RH [%] Relative humidity (RH) in percent and non-condensing

84 Panel PC 900 (Skylake) User's manual V 1.10

 Technical data

5AP933.240C-00 ≤ Rev. C0

RH [%]
100
95
90

80

70

60

50
(1)
40

30

20 (2)
10
5
0 T [°C]
-80 -70 -60 -50 -40 -30 -20 -10 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100

Diagram legend
(1) Operation T [°C] Temperature in °C
(2) Storage and transport RH [%] Relative humidity (RH) in percent and non-condensing

Panel PC 900 (Skylake) User's manual V 1.10 85

Technical data

4.2.2 AP1000 panels

4.2.2.1 5AP1120.1043-000

4.2.2.1.1 General information

• Panel for AP1000, PPC900, PPC2100, PPC2200 or PPC3100

• 10.4" TFT VGA color display
• Single-touch (analog resistive)
• Front USB interface
• Control cabinet installation

4.2.2.1.2 Order data

Order number Short description Figure

Panels
5AP1120.1043-000 Automation Panel 10.4" VGA TFT - 640 x 480 pixels (4:3) - Sin-
gle-touch (analog resistive) - Control cabinet installation - Land-
scape format - Front USB - For PPC900/PPC2100/PPC3100/
PPC2200 - For link modules - Compatible with 5PP520.1043-00

4.2.2.1.3 Technical data

Information:
The following specified characteristic data, features and limit values are only valid for these individual
components and may differ from those of the complete system. The data specified for the complete
system applies to the complete system in which this individual component is used, for example.
Order number 5AP1120.1043-000
General information
B&R ID code 0xE7AD
Certifications
CE Yes
UL cULus E115267
Industrial control equipment
HazLoc cULus HazLoc E180196
Industrial control equipment
for hazardous locations
Class I, Division 2, Groups ABCD, T4 1)
EAC Yes
Display
Type TFT color
Diagonal 10.4"
Colors 16.7 million
Resolution VGA, 640 x 480 pixels
Contrast 900:1
Viewing angles
Horizontal Direction R = 80° / Direction L = 80°
Vertical Direction U = 80° / Direction D = 80°
Backlight
Type LED
Brightness (dimmable) Typ. 22.5 to 450 cd/m²
Half-brightness time 2) 70,000 h
Touch screen 3)
Technology Analog, resistive
Controller B&R, serial, 12-bit
Transmittance 81% ±3%

86 Panel PC 900 (Skylake) User's manual V 1.10

 Technical data
Order number 5AP1120.1043-000
Interfaces
USB
Quantity 1
Type USB 2.0
Variant Type A
Transfer rate Low speed (1.5 Mbit/s), full speed (12 Mbit/s) to high speed (480 Mbit/s)
Current-carrying capacity Max. 500 mA
Operating conditions
Pollution degree per EN 61131-2 Pollution degree 2
Degree of protection per EN 60529 Front: IP65
Back: IP20 (only with installed link module or installed system unit)
Degree of protection per UL 50 Front: Type 4X indoor use only
Mechanical properties
Front 4)
Frame Aluminum, naturally anodized
Panel overlay
Material Polyester
Light background color RAL 9006
Dark border color around display RAL 7024
Gasket 3 mm fixed gasket
Dimensions
Width 323 mm
Height 260 mm
Weight 2800 g
1) Yes, but applies only if all components installed in the complete system have this certification and the complete system bears the corresponding mark.
2) At 25°C ambient temperature. Reducing the brightness by 50% can increase the half-brightness time by approximately 50%.
3) Touch screen drivers for approved operating systems are available for download in the Downloads section of the B&R website (www.br-automation.com).
4) Visual deviations in color and surface quality are possible due to process or batch conditions.

4.2.2.1.4 Dimensions

323
260

4.2.2.1.5 Temperature/Humidity diagram

RH [%]
100
95
90

80

70

60

50 (1)
40

30

20 (2)
10
5
0 T [°C]
-80 -70 -60 -50 -40 -30 -20 -10 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100

Diagram legend
(1) Operation T [°C] Temperature in °C
(2) Storage and transport RH [%] Relative humidity (RH) in percent and non-condensing

Panel PC 900 (Skylake) User's manual V 1.10 87

Technical data

4.2.2.2 5AP1180.1043-000

4.2.2.2.1 General information

• Panel for AP1000, PPC900, PPC2100, PPC2200 or PPC3100

• 10.4" TFT VGA color display
• Single-touch (analog resistive)
• 22 function keys
• Front USB interface
• Control cabinet installation

4.2.2.2.2 Order data

Order number Short description Figure

Panels
5AP1180.1043-000 Automation Panel 10.4" VGA TFT - 640 x 480 pixels (4:3) - Sin-
gle-touch (analog resistive) - Control cabinet installation - Land-
scape format - Front USB - 22 function keys - For PPC900/
PPC2100/PPC3100/PPC2200 - For link modules - Compatible
with 5PP580.1043-00, 5AP980.1043-01

4.2.2.2.3 Technical data

Information:
The following specified characteristic data, features and limit values are only valid for these individual
components and may differ from those of the complete system. The data specified for the complete
system applies to the complete system in which this individual component is used, for example.
Order number 5AP1180.1043-000
General information
B&R ID code 0xE7AE
Certifications
CE Yes
UL cULus E115267
Industrial control equipment
HazLoc cULus HazLoc E180196
Industrial control equipment
for hazardous locations
Class I, Division 2, Groups ABCD, T4 1)
EAC Yes
Display
Type TFT color
Diagonal 10.4"
Colors 16.7 million
Resolution VGA, 640 x 480 pixels
Contrast 900:1
Viewing angles
Horizontal Direction R = 80° / Direction L = 80°
Vertical Direction U = 80° / Direction D = 80°
Backlight
Type LED
Brightness (dimmable) Typ. 22.5 to 450 cd/m²
Half-brightness time 2) 70,000 h
Touch screen 3)
Technology Analog, resistive
Controller B&R, serial, 12-bit
Transmittance 81% ±3%
Interfaces
USB
Quantity 1
Type USB 2.0
Variant Type A
Transfer rate Low speed (1.5 Mbit/s), full speed (12 Mbit/s) to high speed (480 Mbit/s)
Current-carrying capacity Max. 500 mA

88 Panel PC 900 (Skylake) User's manual V 1.10

 Technical data
Order number 5AP1180.1043-000
Keys
Function keys 22 with LED (yellow)
System keys No
Service life >1,000,000 actuations at 1 ±0.3 N to 3 ±0.3 N actuating force
LED luminous intensity
Yellow Typ. 38 mcd
Operating conditions
Pollution degree per EN 61131-2 Pollution degree 2
Degree of protection per EN 60529 Front: IP65
Back: IP20 (only with installed link module or installed system unit)
Degree of protection per UL 50 Front: Type 4X indoor use only
Mechanical properties
Front 4)
Frame Aluminum, naturally anodized
Panel overlay
Material Polyester
Light background color RAL 9006
Dark border color around display RAL 7024
Gasket 3 mm fixed gasket
Dimensions
Width 323 mm
Height 260 mm
Weight 2800 g
1) Yes, but applies only if all components installed in the complete system have this certification and the complete system bears the corresponding mark.
2) At 25°C ambient temperature. Reducing the brightness by 50% can increase the half-brightness time by approximately 50%.
3) Touch screen drivers for approved operating systems are available for download in the Downloads section of the B&R website (www.br-automation.com).
4) Visual deviations in color and surface quality are possible due to process or batch conditions.

4.2.2.2.4 Dimensions

323
260

4.2.2.2.5 Temperature/Humidity diagram

RH [%]
100
95
90
(2)
80

70

60

50 (1)
40

30

20

10
5
0 T [°C]
-80 -70 -60 -50 -40 -30 -20 -10 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100

Diagram legend
(1) Operation T [°C] Temperature in °C
(2) Storage and transport RH [%] Relative humidity (RH) in percent and non-condensing

Panel PC 900 (Skylake) User's manual V 1.10 89

Technical data

4.2.2.3 5AP1181.1043-000

4.2.2.3.1 General information

• Panel for AP1000, PPC900, PPC2100, PPC2200 or PPC3100

• 10.4" TFT VGA color display
• Single-touch (analog resistive)
• 38 function keys and 20 system keys
• Front USB interface
• Control cabinet installation

4.2.2.3.2 Order data

Order number Short description Figure

Panels
5AP1181.1043-000 Automation Panel 10.4" VGA TFT - 640 x 480 pixels (4:3) -
Single-touch (analog resistive) - Control cabinet installation -
Portrait format - Front USB - 38 function keys and 20 sys-
tem keys - For PPC900/PPC2100/PPC3100/PPC2200 - For link
modules - Compatible with 5PP581.1043-00, 5AP981.1043-01,
5PC781.1043-00

4.2.2.3.3 Technical data

Information:
The following specified characteristic data, features and limit values are only valid for these individual
components and may differ from those of the complete system. The data specified for the complete
system applies to the complete system in which this individual component is used, for example.
Order number 5AP1181.1043-000
General information
B&R ID code 0xE7AF
Certifications
CE Yes
UL cULus E115267
Industrial control equipment
HazLoc cULus HazLoc E180196
Industrial control equipment
for hazardous locations
Class I, Division 2, Groups ABCD, T4 1)
EAC Yes
Display
Type TFT color
Diagonal 10.4"
Colors 16.7 million
Resolution VGA, 640 x 480 pixels
Contrast 900:1
Viewing angles
Horizontal Direction R = 80° / Direction L = 80°
Vertical Direction U = 80° / Direction D = 80°
Backlight
Type LED
Brightness (dimmable) Typ. 22.5 to 450 cd/m²
Half-brightness time 2) 70,000 h
Touch screen 3)
Technology Analog, resistive
Controller B&R, serial, 12-bit
Transmittance 81% ±3%

90 Panel PC 900 (Skylake) User's manual V 1.10

 Technical data
Order number 5AP1181.1043-000
Interfaces
USB
Quantity 1
Type USB 2.0
Variant Type A
Transfer rate Low speed (1.5 Mbit/s), full speed (12 Mbit/s) to high speed (480 Mbit/s)
Current-carrying capacity Max. 500 mA
Keys
Function keys 38 with LED (yellow)
System keys Numeric keys, cursor block
Service life >1,000,000 actuations at 1 ±0.3 N to 3 ±0.3 N actuating force
LED luminous intensity
Yellow Typ. 38 mcd
Operating conditions
Pollution degree per EN 61131-2 Pollution degree 2
Degree of protection per EN 60529 Front: IP65
Back: IP20 (only with installed link module or installed system unit)
Degree of protection per UL 50 Front: Type 4X indoor use only
Mechanical properties
Front 4)
Frame Aluminum, naturally anodized
Panel overlay
Material Polyester
Light background color RAL 9006
Dark border color around display RAL 7024
Gasket 3 mm fixed gasket
Dimensions
Width 323 mm
Height 358 mm
Weight 3400 g
1) Yes, but applies only if all components installed in the complete system have this certification and the complete system bears the corresponding mark.
2) At 25°C ambient temperature. Reducing the brightness by 50% can increase the half-brightness time by approximately 50%.
3) Touch screen drivers for approved operating systems are available for download in the Downloads section of the B&R website (www.br-automation.com).
4) Visual deviations in color and surface quality are possible due to process or batch conditions.

4.2.2.3.4 Dimensions

323
358

Panel PC 900 (Skylake) User's manual V 1.10 91

Technical data

4.2.2.3.5 Temperature/Humidity diagram

RH [%]
100
95
90
(2)
80

70

60

50 (1)
40

30

20

10
5
0 T [°C]
-80 -70 -60 -50 -40 -30 -20 -10 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100

Diagram legend
(1) Operation T [°C] Temperature in °C
(2) Storage and transport RH [%] Relative humidity (RH) in percent and non-condensing

92 Panel PC 900 (Skylake) User's manual V 1.10

 Technical data

4.2.2.4 5AP1182.1043-000

4.2.2.4.1 General information

• Panel for AP1000, PPC900, PPC2100, PPC2200 or PPC3100

• 10.4" TFT VGA color display
• Single-touch (analog resistive)
• 44 function keys and 20 system keys
• Front USB interface
• Control cabinet installation

4.2.2.4.2 Order data

Order number Short description Figure

Panels
5AP1182.1043-000 Automation Panel 10.4" VGA TFT - 640 x 480 pixels (4:3) -
Single-touch (analog resistive) - Control cabinet installation -
Landscape format - Front USB - 44 function keys and 20 sys-
tem keys - For PPC900/PPC2100/PPC3100/PPC2200 - For link
modules - Compatible with 5PP582.1043-00, 5AP982.1043-01,
5PC782.1043-00

4.2.2.4.3 Technical data

Information:
The following specified characteristic data, features and limit values are only valid for these individual
components and may differ from those of the complete system. The data specified for the complete
system applies to the complete system in which this individual component is used, for example.
Order number 5AP1182.1043-000
General information
B&R ID code 0xE7B0
Certifications
CE Yes
UL cULus E115267
Industrial control equipment
HazLoc cULus HazLoc E180196
Industrial control equipment
for hazardous locations
Class I, Division 2, Groups ABCD, T4 1)
EAC Yes
Display
Type TFT color
Diagonal 10.4"
Colors 16.7 million
Resolution VGA, 640 x 480 pixels
Contrast 900:1
Viewing angles
Horizontal Direction R = 80° / Direction L = 80°
Vertical Direction U = 80° / Direction D = 80°
Backlight
Type LED
Brightness (dimmable) Typ. 22.5 to 450 cd/m²
Half-brightness time 2) 70,000 h
Touch screen 3)
Technology Analog, resistive
Controller B&R, serial, 12-bit
Transmittance 81% ±3%
Interfaces
USB
Quantity 1
Type USB 2.0
Variant Type A
Transfer rate Low speed (1.5 Mbit/s), full speed (12 Mbit/s) to high speed (480 Mbit/s)
Current-carrying capacity Max. 500 mA
Keys
Function keys 44 with LED (yellow)

Panel PC 900 (Skylake) User's manual V 1.10 93

Technical data
Order number 5AP1182.1043-000
System keys Numeric keys, cursor block
Service life >1,000,000 actuations at 1 ±0.3 N to 3 ±0.3 N actuating force
LED luminous intensity
Yellow Typ. 38 mcd
Operating conditions
Pollution degree per EN 61131-2 Pollution degree 2
Degree of protection per EN 60529 Front: IP65
Back: IP20 (only with installed link module or installed system unit)
Degree of protection per UL 50 Front: Type 4X indoor use only
Mechanical properties
Front 4)
Frame Aluminum, naturally anodized
Panel overlay
Material Polyester
Light background color RAL 9006
Dark border color around display RAL 7024
Gasket 3 mm fixed gasket
Dimensions
Width 423 mm
Height 288 mm
Weight 3500 g
1) Yes, but applies only if all components installed in the complete system have this certification and the complete system bears the corresponding mark.
2) At 25°C ambient temperature. Reducing the brightness by 50% can increase the half-brightness time by approximately 50%.
3) Touch screen drivers for approved operating systems are available for download in the Downloads section of the B&R website (www.br-automation.com).
4) Visual deviations in color and surface quality are possible due to process or batch conditions.

4.2.2.4.4 Dimensions

423
288

4.2.2.4.5 Temperature/Humidity diagram

RH [%]
100
95
90
(2)
80

70

60

50 (1)
40

30

20

10
5
0 T [°C]
-80 -70 -60 -50 -40 -30 -20 -10 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100

Diagram legend
(1) Operation T [°C] Temperature in °C
(2) Storage and transport RH [%] Relative humidity (RH) in percent and non-condensing

94 Panel PC 900 (Skylake) User's manual V 1.10

 Technical data

4.2.2.5 5AP1120.1214-000

4.2.2.5.1 General information

• Panel for AP1000, PPC900, PPC2100, PPC2200 or PPC3100

• 12.1" TFT SVGA color display
• Single-touch (analog resistive)
• Front USB interface
• Control cabinet installation

4.2.2.5.2 Order data

Order number Short description Figure

Panels
5AP1120.1214-000 Automation Panel 12.1" SVGA TFT - 800 x 600 pixels (4:3) - Sin-
gle-touch (analog resistive) - Control cabinet installation - Land-
scape format - Front USB - For PPC900/PPC2100/PPC3100/
PPC2200 - For link modules - Compatible with 5PP520.1214-00

4.2.2.5.3 Technical data

Information:
The following specified characteristic data, features and limit values are only valid for these individual
components and may differ from those of the complete system. The data specified for the complete
system applies to the complete system in which this individual component is used, for example.
Order number 5AP1120.1214-000
General information
B&R ID code 0xE7BB
Certifications
CE Yes
UL cULus E115267
Industrial control equipment
HazLoc cULus HazLoc E180196
Industrial control equipment
for hazardous locations
Class I, Division 2, Groups ABCD, T4 1)
EAC Yes
Display
Type TFT color
Diagonal 12.1"
Colors 16.7 million
Resolution SVGA, 800 x 600 pixels
Contrast 1500:1
Viewing angles
Horizontal Direction R = 89° / Direction L = 89°
Vertical Direction U = 89° / Direction D = 89°
Backlight
Type LED
Brightness (dimmable) Typ. 22.5 to 450 cd/m²
Half-brightness time 2) 50,000 h
Touch screen 3)
Technology Analog, resistive
Controller B&R, serial, 12-bit
Transmittance 81% ±3%
Interfaces
USB
Quantity 1
Type USB 2.0
Variant Type A
Transfer rate Low speed (1.5 Mbit/s), full speed (12 Mbit/s) to high speed (480 Mbit/s)
Current-carrying capacity Max. 500 mA

Panel PC 900 (Skylake) User's manual V 1.10 95

Technical data
Order number 5AP1120.1214-000
Operating conditions
Pollution degree per EN 61131-2 Pollution degree 2
Degree of protection per EN 60529 Front: IP65
Back: IP20 (only with installed link module or installed system unit)
Degree of protection per UL 50 Front: Type 4X indoor use only
Mechanical properties
Front 4)
Frame Aluminum, naturally anodized
Panel overlay
Material Polyester
Light background color RAL 9006
Dark border color around display RAL 7024
Gasket 3 mm fixed gasket
Dimensions
Width 362 mm
Height 284 mm
Weight 3200 g
1) Yes, but applies only if all components installed in the complete system have this certification and the complete system bears the corresponding mark.
2) At 25°C ambient temperature. Reducing the brightness by 50% can increase the half-brightness time by approximately 50%.
3) Touch screen drivers for approved operating systems are available for download in the Downloads section of the B&R website (www.br-automation.com).
4) Visual deviations in color and surface quality are possible due to process or batch conditions.

4.2.2.5.4 Dimensions

362
284

4.2.2.5.5 Temperature/Humidity diagram

RH [%]
100
95
90

80

70

60

50 (1)
40

30

20 (2)
10
5
0 T [°C]
-80 -70 -60 -50 -40 -30 -20 -10 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100

Diagram legend
(1) Operation T [°C] Temperature in °C
(2) Storage and transport RH [%] Relative humidity (RH) in percent and non-condensing

96 Panel PC 900 (Skylake) User's manual V 1.10

 Technical data

4.2.2.6 5AP1120.1505-000

4.2.2.6.1 General information

• Panel for AP1000, PPC900, PPC2100, PPC2200 or PPC3100

• 15.0" TFT XGA color display
• Single-touch (analog resistive)
• Front USB interface
• Control cabinet installation

4.2.2.6.2 Order data

Order number Short description Figure

Panels
5AP1120.1505-000 Automation Panel 15.0" XGA TFT - 1024 x 768 pixels (4:3) - Sin-
gle-touch (analog resistive) - Control cabinet installation - Land-
scape format - Front USB - For PPC900/PPC2100/PPC3100/
PPC2200 - For link modules - Compatible with 5PP520.1505-00,
5AP920.1505-01, 5PC720.1505-xx, 5PC820.1505-00

4.2.2.6.3 Technical data

Information:
The following specified characteristic data, features and limit values are only valid for these individual
components and may differ from those of the complete system. The data specified for the complete
system applies to the complete system in which this individual component is used, for example.
Order number 5AP1120.1505-000
General information
B&R ID code 0xE7BC
Certifications
CE Yes
UL cULus E115267
Industrial control equipment
HazLoc cULus HazLoc E180196
Industrial control equipment
for hazardous locations
Class I, Division 2, Groups ABCD, T4 1)
EAC Yes
Display
Type TFT color
Diagonal 15.0"
Colors 16.7 million
Resolution XGA, 1024 x 768 pixels
Contrast 700:1
Viewing angles
Horizontal Direction R = 80° / Direction L = 80°
Vertical Direction U = 70° / Direction D = 70°
Backlight
Type LED
Brightness (dimmable) Typ. 20 to 400 cd/m²
Half-brightness time 2) 50,000 h
Touch screen 3)
Technology Analog, resistive
Controller B&R, serial, 12-bit
Transmittance 81% ±3%
Interfaces
USB
Quantity 1
Type USB 2.0
Variant Type A
Transfer rate Low speed (1.5 Mbit/s), full speed (12 Mbit/s) to high speed (480 Mbit/s)
Current-carrying capacity Max. 500 mA
Operating conditions
Pollution degree per EN 61131-2 Pollution degree 2

Panel PC 900 (Skylake) User's manual V 1.10 97

Technical data
Order number 5AP1120.1505-000
Degree of protection per EN 60529 Front: IP65
Back: IP20 (only with installed link module or installed system unit)
Degree of protection per UL 50 Front: Type 4X indoor use only
Mechanical properties
Front 4)
Frame Aluminum, naturally anodized
Panel overlay
Material Polyester
Light background color RAL 9006
Dark border color around display RAL 7024
Gasket 3 mm fixed gasket
Dimensions
Width 435 mm
Height 330 mm
Weight 5000 g
1) Yes, but applies only if all components installed in the complete system have this certification and the complete system bears the corresponding mark.
2) At 25°C ambient temperature. Reducing the brightness by 50% can increase the half-brightness time by approximately 50%.
3) Touch screen drivers for approved operating systems are available for download in the Downloads section of the B&R website (www.br-automation.com).
4) Visual deviations in color and surface quality are possible due to process or batch conditions.

4.2.2.6.4 Dimensions

435
330

4.2.2.6.5 Temperature/Humidity diagram

RH [%]
100
95
90

80

70

60

50 (1)
40

30

20 (2)
10 8
5
0 T [°C]
-80 -70 -60 -50 -40 -30 -20 -10 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100

Diagram legend
(1) Operation T [°C] Temperature in °C
(2) Storage and transport RH [%] Relative humidity (RH) in percent and non-condensing

98 Panel PC 900 (Skylake) User's manual V 1.10

 Technical data

4.2.2.7 5AP1180.1505-000

4.2.2.7.1 General information

• Panel for AP1000, PPC900, PPC2100, PPC2200 or PPC3100

• 15.0" TFT XGA color display
• Single-touch (analog resistive)
• 32 function keys
• Front USB interface
• Control cabinet installation

4.2.2.7.2 Order data

Order number Short description Figure

Panels
5AP1180.1505-000 Automation Panel 15.0" XGA TFT - 1024 x 768 pixels (4:3) - Sin-
gle-touch (analog resistive) - Control cabinet installation - Land-
scape format - Front USB - 32 function keys - For PPC900/
PPC2100/PPC3100/PPC2200 - For link modules - Compatible
with 5PP580.1505-00, 5AP980.1505-01

4.2.2.7.3 Technical data

Information:
The following specified characteristic data, features and limit values are only valid for these individual
components and may differ from those of the complete system. The data specified for the complete
system applies to the complete system in which this individual component is used, for example.
Order number 5AP1180.1505-000
General information
B&R ID code 0xE7BD
Certifications
CE Yes
UL cULus E115267
Industrial control equipment
HazLoc cULus HazLoc E180196
Industrial control equipment
for hazardous locations
Class I, Division 2, Groups ABCD, T4 1)
EAC Yes
Display
Type TFT color
Diagonal 15.0"
Colors 16.7 million
Resolution XGA, 1024 x 768 pixels
Contrast 700:1
Viewing angles
Horizontal Direction R = 80° / Direction L = 80°
Vertical Direction U = 70° / Direction D = 70°
Backlight
Type LED
Brightness (dimmable) Typ. 20 to 400 cd/m²
Half-brightness time 2) 50,000 h
Touch screen 3)
Technology Analog, resistive
Controller B&R, serial, 12-bit
Transmittance 81% ±3%
Interfaces
USB
Quantity 1
Type USB 2.0
Variant Type A
Transfer rate Low speed (1.5 Mbit/s), full speed (12 Mbit/s) to high speed (480 Mbit/s)
Current-carrying capacity Max. 500 mA

Panel PC 900 (Skylake) User's manual V 1.10 99

Technical data
Order number 5AP1180.1505-000
Keys
Function keys 32 with LED (yellow)
System keys No
Service life >1,000,000 actuations at 1 ±0.3 N to 3 ±0.3 N actuating force
LED luminous intensity
Yellow Typ. 38 mcd
Operating conditions
Pollution degree per EN 61131-2 Pollution degree 2
Degree of protection per EN 60529 Front: IP65
Back: IP20 (only with installed link module or installed system unit)
Degree of protection per UL 50 Front: Type 4X indoor use only
Mechanical properties
Front 4)
Frame Aluminum, naturally anodized
Panel overlay
Material Polyester
Light background color RAL 9006
Dark border color around display RAL 7024
Gasket 3 mm fixed gasket
Dimensions
Width 435 mm
Height 330 mm
Weight 4900 g
1) Yes, but applies only if all components installed in the complete system have this certification and the complete system bears the corresponding mark.
2) At 25°C ambient temperature. Reducing the brightness by 50% can increase the half-brightness time by approximately 50%.
3) Touch screen drivers for approved operating systems are available for download in the Downloads section of the B&R website (www.br-automation.com).
4) Visual deviations in color and surface quality are possible due to process or batch conditions.

4.2.2.7.4 Dimensions

435
330

4.2.2.7.5 Temperature/Humidity diagram

RH [%]
100
95
90

80

70

60
(2)
50 (1)
40

30

20

10 8
5
0 T [°C]
-80 -70 -60 -50 -40 -30 -20 -10 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100

Diagram legend
(1) Operation T [°C] Temperature in °C
(2) Storage and transport RH [%] Relative humidity (RH) in percent and non-condensing

100 Panel PC 900 (Skylake) User's manual V 1.10

 Technical data

4.2.2.8 5AP1181.1505-000

4.2.2.8.1 General information

• Panel for AP1000, PPC900, PPC2100, PPC2200 or PPC3100

• 15.0" TFT XGA color display
• Single-touch (analog resistive)
• 32 function keys
• 92 system keys
• Front USB interface
• Control cabinet installation

Information:
This Automation Panel is not approved for DVI operation.

4.2.2.8.2 Order data

Order number Short description Figure

Panels
5AP1181.1505-000 Automation Panel 15" XGA TFT - 1024 x 768 pixels (4:3) - Sin-
gle-touch (analog resistive) - Control cabinet installation - Land-
scape format - Front USB - 32 function keys and 92 system keys
- For PPC900/PPC2100/PPC3100/PPC2200 - For link modules
- Compatible with 5PP581.1505-000

4.2.2.8.3 Technical data

Information:
The following specified characteristic data, features and limit values are only valid for these individual
components and may differ from those of the complete system. The data specified for the complete
system applies to the complete system in which this individual component is used, for example.
Order number 5AP1181.1505-000
General information
B&R ID code 0xEF61
Certifications
CE Yes
UL cULus E115267
Industrial control equipment
HazLoc cULus HazLoc E180196
Industrial control equipment
for hazardous locations
Class I, Division 2, Groups ABCD, T4 1)
EAC Yes
Display
Type TFT color
Diagonal 15.0"
Colors 16.7 million
Resolution XGA, 1024 x 768 pixels
Contrast 700:1
Viewing angles
Horizontal Direction R = 80° / Direction L = 80°
Vertical Direction U = 70° / Direction D = 70°
Backlight
Type LED
Brightness (dimmable) Typ. 20 to 400 cd/m²
Half-brightness time 2) 50,000 h

Panel PC 900 (Skylake) User's manual V 1.10 101

Technical data
Order number 5AP1181.1505-000
Touch screen 3)
Technology Analog, resistive
Controller B&R, serial, 12-bit
Transmittance 81% ±3%
Interfaces
USB
Quantity 1
Type USB 2.0
Variant Type A
Transfer rate Low speed (1.5 Mbit/s), full speed (12 Mbit/s) to high speed (480 Mbit/s)
Current-carrying capacity Max. 500 mA
Keys
Function keys 32 with LED (yellow)
System keys Alphanumeric keys, numeric keys, cursor block
Service life >1,000,000 actuations at 1 ±0.3 N to 3 ±0.3 N actuating force
LED luminous intensity
Yellow Typ. 38 mcd
Operating conditions
Pollution degree per EN 61131-2 Pollution degree 2
Degree of protection per EN 60529 Front: IP65
Back: IP20 (only with installed link module or installed system unit)
Degree of protection per UL 50 Front: Type 4X indoor use only
Mechanical properties
Front 4)
Frame Aluminum, naturally anodized
Panel overlay
Material Polyester
Light background color RAL 9006
Dark border color around display RAL 7024
Gasket 3 mm fixed gasket
Dimensions
Width 435 mm
Height 430 mm
Weight 6000 g
1) Yes, but applies only if all components installed in the complete system have this certification and the complete system bears the corresponding mark.
2) At 25°C ambient temperature. Reducing the brightness by 50% can increase the half-brightness time by approximately 50%.
3) Touch screen drivers for approved operating systems are available for download in the Downloads section of the B&R website (www.br-automation.com).
4) Visual deviations in color and surface quality are possible due to process or batch conditions.

4.2.2.8.4 Dimensions

102 Panel PC 900 (Skylake) User's manual V 1.10

 Technical data

4.2.2.8.5 Temperature/Humidity diagram

RH [%]
100
95
90

80

70

60
(2)
50 (1)
40

30

20

10 8
5
0 T [°C]
-80 -70 -60 -50 -40 -30 -20 -10 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100

Diagram legend
(1) Operation T [°C] Temperature in °C
(2) Storage and transport RH [%] Relative humidity (RH) in percent and non-condensing

Panel PC 900 (Skylake) User's manual V 1.10 103

Technical data

4.2.2.9 5AP1120.156B-000

4.2.2.9.1 General information

• Panel for AP1000, PPC900, PPC2100, PPC2200 or PPC3100

• 15.6" TFT HD color display
• Single-touch (analog resistive)
• Control cabinet installation

4.2.2.9.2 Order data

Order number Short description Figure

Panels
5AP1120.156B-000 Automation Panel 15.6" HD TFT - 1366 x 768 pixels (16:9) - Sin-
gle-touch (analog resistive) - Control cabinet installation - Land-
scape format - For PPC900/PPC2100/PPC3100/PPC2200 - For
link modules

4.2.2.9.3 Technical data

Information:
The following specified characteristic data, features and limit values are only valid for these individual
components and may differ from those of the complete system. The data specified for the complete
system applies to the complete system in which this individual component is used, for example.
Order number 5AP1120.156B-000
General information
B&R ID code 0xE8E5
Certifications
CE Yes
UL cULus E115267
Industrial control equipment
HazLoc cULus HazLoc E180196
Industrial control equipment
for hazardous locations
Class I, Division 2, Groups ABCD, T4 1)
EAC Yes
Display
Type TFT color
Diagonal 15.6"
Colors 16.7 million
Resolution HD, 1366 x 768 pixels
Contrast 1000:1
Viewing angles
Horizontal Direction R = 85° / Direction L = 85°
Vertical Direction U = 85° / Direction D = 85°
Backlight
Type LED
Brightness (dimmable) Typ. 40 to 400 cd/m²
Half-brightness time 2) 70,000 h
Touch screen 3)
Technology Analog, resistive
Controller B&R, serial, 12-bit
Transmittance 81% ±3%
Light transmission 80 ±3%
Service life 10,000,000 touch operations at the same position (release pressure: 250 g, interval: 0.25 s)
Operating conditions
Pollution degree per EN 61131-2 Pollution degree 2
Degree of protection per EN 60529 Front: IP65
Back: IP20 (only with installed link module or installed system unit)
Degree of protection per UL 50 Front: Type 4X indoor use only

104 Panel PC 900 (Skylake) User's manual V 1.10

 Technical data
Order number 5AP1120.156B-000
Mechanical properties
Front 4)
Frame Aluminum, coated
Panel overlay
Material Polyester
Light background color RAL 9006
Dark border color around display RAL 7024
Gasket 3 mm fixed gasket
Dimensions
Width 414 mm
Height 258.5 mm
Weight 4200 g
1) Yes, but applies only if all components installed in the complete system have this certification and the complete system bears the corresponding mark.
2) At 25°C ambient temperature. Reducing the brightness by 50% can increase the half-brightness time by approximately 50%.
3) Touch screen drivers for approved operating systems are available for download in the Downloads section of the B&R website (www.br-automation.com).
4) Visual deviations in color and surface quality are possible due to process or batch conditions.

4.2.2.9.4 Dimensions

414
258.5

4.2.2.9.5 Temperature/Humidity diagram

Hardware revision H0 and later

RH [%]
100
95
90

80
(2)
70

60

50 (1)
40

30

20

10
5
0 T [°C]
-80 -70 -60 -50 -40 -30 -20 -10 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100

Diagram legend
(1) Operation T [°C] Temperature in °C
(2) Storage and transport RH [%] Relative humidity (RH) in percent and non-condensing

Panel PC 900 (Skylake) User's manual V 1.10 105

Technical data

Up to hardware revision G0

RH [%]
100
95
90

80

70

60
(2)
50 (1)
40

30

20

10
5
0 T [°C]
-80 -70 -60 -50 -40 -30 -20 -10 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100

Diagram legend
(1) Operation T [°C] Temperature in °C
(2) Storage and transport RH [%] Relative humidity (RH) in percent and non-condensing

106 Panel PC 900 (Skylake) User's manual V 1.10

 Technical data

4.2.2.10 5AP1130.156C-000

4.2.2.10.1 General information

• Panel for AP1000, PPC900, PPC2100, PPC2200 or PPC3100

• 15.6" FHD color display
• Multi-touch (projected capacitive)
• Control cabinet installation

4.2.2.10.2 Order data

Order number Short description Figure

Panels
5AP1130.156C-000 Automation Panel 15.6" Full HD TFT - 1920 x 1080 pixels (16:9)
- Multi-touch (projected capacitive) - Control cabinet installation -
Landscape format - For PPC900/PPC2100/PPC3100/PPC2200
- For link modules

4.2.2.10.3 Technical data

Information:
The following specified characteristic data, features and limit values are only valid for these individual
components and may differ from those of the complete system. The data specified for the complete
system applies to the complete system in which this individual component is used, for example.
Order number 5AP1130.156C-000
General information
B&R ID code 0xEC5D
Certifications
CE Yes
UL cULus E115267
Industrial control equipment
HazLoc cULus HazLoc E180196
Industrial control equipment
for hazardous locations
Class I, Division 2, Groups ABCD, T4 1)
DNV Temperature: B (0 - 55°C)
Humidity: B (up to 100%)
Vibration: A (0.7 g)
EMC: B (bridge and open deck) 2)
EAC Yes
Display
Type TFT color
Diagonal 15.6"
Colors 16.7 million
Resolution FHD, 1920 x 1080 pixels
Contrast 800:1
Viewing angles
Horizontal Direction R = 85° / Direction L = 85°
Vertical Direction U = 85° / Direction D = 85°
Backlight
Type LED
Brightness (dimmable) Typ. 40 to 450 cd/m²
Half-brightness time 3) ≥50,000 h
Touch screen 4)
Technology Projected capacitive touch (PCT)
Transmittance See "Appendix A - Touch screen".
Operating conditions
Pollution degree per EN 61131-2 Pollution degree 2
Degree of protection per EN 60529 Front: IP65
Back: IP20 (only with installed link module or installed system unit)
Degree of protection per UL 50 Front: Type 4X indoor use only
Mechanical properties
Front 5)
Frame Aluminum, coated
Design Black
Gasket 3 mm fixed gasket

Panel PC 900 (Skylake) User's manual V 1.10 107

Technical data
Order number 5AP1130.156C-000
Dimensions
Width 414 mm
Height 258.5 mm
Weight 3700 g
1) Yes, but applies only if all components installed in the complete system have this certification and the complete system bears the corresponding mark.
2) Yes, but applies only if all components installed in the complete system have this certification and are listed on the associated DNV certificate for the product
family.
3) At 25°C ambient temperature. Reducing the brightness by 50% can increase the half-brightness time by approximately 50%.
4) The specifications for the touch screen driver must be taken into account. See section "Multi-touch drivers" in chapter 4 "Software".
5) Visual deviations in color and surface quality are possible due to process or batch conditions.

4.2.2.10.4 Dimensions

414
258.5

4.2.2.10.5 Temperature/Humidity diagram

RH [%]
100
95
90

80

70

60

50 (1)
40

30

20 (2)
10
5
0 T [°C]
-80 -70 -60 -50 -40 -30 -20 -10 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100

Diagram legend
(1) Operation T [°C] Temperature in °C
(2) Storage and transport RH [%] Relative humidity (RH) in percent and non-condensing

108 Panel PC 900 (Skylake) User's manual V 1.10

 Technical data

4.2.2.11 5AP1130.156C-001

4.2.2.11.1 General information

• Panel for AP1000, PPC2100, PPC2200 or PPC3100

• 15.6" TFT WXGA color display
• Multi-touch (projected capacitive)
• Manufactured with optical bonding technology

4.2.2.11.2 Order data

Order number Short description Figure

Panels
5AP1130.156C-001 Automation Panel 15.6" Full HD TFT - 1920 x 1080 pixels (16:9)
- Multi-touch (projected capacitive) - Control cabinet installation
- Landscape format - Optical bonding - For PPC900/PPC2100/
PPC3100/PPC2200 - For link modules

4.2.2.11.3 Technical data

Information:
The following specified characteristic data, features and limit values are only valid for these individual
components and may differ from those of the complete system. The data specified for the complete
system applies to the complete system in which this individual component is used, for example.
Order number 5AP1130.156C-001
General information
B&R ID code 0x28B5
Certifications
CE Yes
UL cULus E115267
Industrial control equipment
HazLoc cULus HazLoc E180196
Industrial control equipment
for hazardous locations
Class I, Division 2, Groups ABCD, T4 1)
Display
Type TFT color
Diagonal 15.6"
Colors 16.7 million
Resolution FHD, 1920 x 1080 pixels
Contrast 1500:1
Viewing angles
Horizontal Direction R = 85° / Direction L = 85°
Vertical Direction U = 85° / Direction D = 85°
Backlight
Type LED
Brightness (dimmable) Typ. 40 to 400 cd/m²
Half-brightness time 2) 70,000 h
Touch screen 3)
Technology Projected capacitive touch (PCT)
Transmittance See "Appendix A - Touch screen".
Operating conditions
Pollution degree per EN 61131-2 Pollution degree 2
Degree of protection per EN 60529 Front: IP65
Back: IP20 (only with installed link module or installed system unit)
Degree of protection per UL 50 Front: Type 4X indoor use only
Mechanical properties
Front 4)
Frame Aluminum, coated
Design Black
Gasket 3 mm fixed gasket

Panel PC 900 (Skylake) User's manual V 1.10 109

Technical data
Order number 5AP1130.156C-001
Dimensions
Width 414 mm
Height 258.5 mm
Weight Approx. 3,800 g
1) Yes, but applies only if all components installed in the complete system have this certification and the complete system bears the corresponding mark.
2) At 25°C ambient temperature. Reducing the brightness by 50% can increase the half-brightness time by approximately 50%.
3) The specifications for the touch screen driver must be taken into account. See section "Multi-touch drivers" in chapter 4 "Software".
4) Visual deviations in color and surface quality are possible due to process or batch conditions.

4.2.2.11.4 Dimensions

414

258.5

4.2.2.11.5 Temperature/Humidity diagram

RH [%]
100
95
90

80

70

60

50 (1)
40

30

20 (2)
10
5
0 T [°C]
-80 -70 -60 -50 -40 -30 -20 -10 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100

Diagram legend
(1) Operation T [°C] Temperature in °C
(2) Storage and transport RH [%] Relative humidity (RH) in percent and non-condensing

110 Panel PC 900 (Skylake) User's manual V 1.10

 Technical data

4.2.2.12 5AP1130.185C-000

4.2.2.12.1 General information

• Panel for AP1000, PPC900, PPC2100, PPC2200 or PPC3100

• 18.5" FHD color display
• Multi-touch (projected capacitive)
• Control cabinet installation

4.2.2.12.2 Order data

Order number Short description Figure

Panels
5AP1130.185C-000 Automation Panel 18.5" Full HD TFT - 1920 x 1080 pixels (16:9)
- Multi-touch (projected capacitive) - Control cabinet installation -
Landscape format - For PPC900/PPC2100/PPC3100/PPC2200
- For link modules

4.2.2.12.3 Technical data

Information:
The following specified characteristic data, features and limit values are only valid for these individual
components and may differ from those of the complete system. The data specified for the complete
system applies to the complete system in which this individual component is used, for example.
Order number 5AP1130.185C-000
General information
B&R ID code 0xEC5E
Certifications
CE Yes
UL cULus E115267
Industrial control equipment
HazLoc cULus HazLoc E180196
Industrial control equipment
for hazardous locations
Class I, Division 2, Groups ABCD, T4 1)
DNV Temperature: B (0 - 55°C)
Humidity: B (up to 100%)
Vibration: A (0.7 g)
EMC: B (bridge and open deck) 2)
EAC Yes
Display
Type TFT color
Diagonal 18.5"
Colors 16.7 million
Resolution FHD, 1920 x 1080 pixels
Contrast 1500:1
Viewing angles
Horizontal Direction R = 85° / Direction L = 85°
Vertical Direction U = 85° / Direction D = 85°
Backlight
Type LED
Brightness (dimmable) Typ. 40 to 400 cd/m²
Half-brightness time 3) 50,000 h
Touch screen 4)
Technology Projected capacitive touch (PCT)
Transmittance See "Appendix A - Touch screen".
Operating conditions
Pollution degree per EN 61131-2 Pollution degree 2
Degree of protection per EN 60529 Front: IP65
Back: IP20 (only with installed link module or installed system unit)
Degree of protection per UL 50 Front: Type 4X indoor use only
Mechanical properties
Front 5)
Frame Aluminum, coated
Design Black
Gasket 3 mm fixed gasket

Panel PC 900 (Skylake) User's manual V 1.10 111

Technical data
Order number 5AP1130.185C-000
Dimensions
Width 475 mm
Height 295 mm
Weight 4700 g
1) Yes, but applies only if all components installed in the complete system have this certification and the complete system bears the corresponding mark.
2) Yes, but applies only if all components installed in the complete system have this certification and are listed on the associated DNV certificate for the product
family.
3) At 25°C ambient temperature. Reducing the brightness by 50% can increase the half-brightness time by approximately 50%.
4) The specifications for the touch screen driver must be taken into account. See section "Multi-touch drivers" in chapter 4 "Software".
5) Visual deviations in color and surface quality are possible due to process or batch conditions.

4.2.2.12.4 Dimensions

475
295

4.2.2.12.5 Temperature/Humidity diagram

RH [%]
100
95
90

80

70

60

50 (1)
40

30

20 (2)
10
5
0 T [°C]
-80 -70 -60 -50 -40 -30 -20 -10 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100

Diagram legend
(1) Operation T [°C] Temperature in °C
(2) Storage and transport RH [%] Relative humidity (RH) in percent and non-condensing

112 Panel PC 900 (Skylake) User's manual V 1.10

 Technical data

4.2.2.13 5AP1120.1906-000

4.2.2.13.1 General information

• Panel for AP1000, PPC900, PPC2100, PPC2200 or PPC3100

• 19.0" TFT SXGA color display
• Single-touch (analog resistive)
• Front USB interface
• Control cabinet installation

4.2.2.13.2 Order data

Order number Short description Figure

Panels
5AP1120.1906-000 Automation Panel 19.0" SXGA TFT - 1280 x 1024 pixels
(5:4) - Single-touch (analog resistive) - Control cabinet in-
stallation - Landscape format - Front USB - For PPC900/
PPC2100/PPC3100/PPC2200 - For link modules - Compatible
with 5AP920.1906-01, 5PC720.1906-00, 5PC820.1906-00

4.2.2.13.3 Technical data

Information:
The following specified characteristic data, features and limit values are only valid for these individual
components and may differ from those of the complete system. The data specified for the complete
system applies to the complete system in which this individual component is used, for example.
Order number 5AP1120.1906-000
General information
B&R ID code 0xE7BE
Certifications
CE Yes
UL cULus E115267
Industrial control equipment
HazLoc cULus HazLoc E180196
Industrial control equipment
for hazardous locations
Class I, Division 2, Groups ABCD, T4 1)
DNV Temperature: B (0 - 55°C)
Humidity: B (up to 100%)
Vibration: A (0.7 g)
EMC: B (bridge and open deck) 2)
EAC Yes
Display
Type TFT color
Diagonal 19.0"
Colors 16.2 million
Resolution SXGA, 1280 x 1024 pixels
Contrast 1500:1
Viewing angles
Horizontal Direction R = 85° / Direction L = 85°
Vertical Direction U = 85° / Direction D = 85°
Backlight
Type LED
Brightness (dimmable) Typ. 35 to 350 cd/m²
Half-brightness time 3) 70,000 h
Touch screen 4)
Technology Analog, resistive
Controller B&R, serial, 12-bit
Transmittance 81% ±3%

Panel PC 900 (Skylake) User's manual V 1.10 113

Technical data
Order number 5AP1120.1906-000
Interfaces
USB
Quantity 1
Type USB 2.0
Variant Type A
Transfer rate Low speed (1.5 Mbit/s), full speed (12 Mbit/s) to high speed (480 Mbit/s)
Current-carrying capacity Max. 500 mA
Operating conditions
Pollution degree per EN 61131-2 Pollution degree 2
Degree of protection per EN 60529 Front: IP65
Back: IP20 (only with installed link module or installed system unit)
Degree of protection per UL 50 Front: Type 4X indoor use only
Mechanical properties
Front 5)
Frame Aluminum, naturally anodized
Panel overlay
Material Polyester
Light background color RAL 9006
Dark border color around display RAL 7024
Gasket 3 mm fixed gasket
Dimensions
Width 527 mm
Height 421 mm
Weight 7300 g
1) Yes, but applies only if all components installed in the complete system have this certification and the complete system bears the corresponding mark.
2) Yes, but applies only if all components installed in the complete system have this certification and are listed on the associated DNV certificate for the product
family.
3) At 25°C ambient temperature. Reducing the brightness by 50% can increase the half-brightness time by approximately 50%.
4) Touch screen drivers for approved operating systems are available for download in the Downloads section of the B&R website (www.br-automation.com).
5) Visual deviations in color and surface quality are possible due to process or batch conditions.

4.2.2.13.4 Dimensions

527
421

114 Panel PC 900 (Skylake) User's manual V 1.10

 Technical data

4.2.2.13.5 Temperature/Humidity diagram

RH [%]
100
95
90

80

70

60
(2)
50 (1)
40

30

20

10
5
0 T [°C]
-80 -70 -60 -50 -40 -30 -20 -10 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100

Diagram legend
(1) Operation T [°C] Temperature in °C
(2) Storage and transport RH [%] Relative humidity (RH) in percent and non-condensing

Panel PC 900 (Skylake) User's manual V 1.10 115

Technical data

4.2.3 QM170 CPU boards

4.2.3.1 5PC901.TS17-00, -01

4.2.3.1.1 General information

• Intel Core i-series processors

• Intel QM170 chipset
• 2x DDR4 memory slots
• Intel Gen 9 HD graphics
• AMI BIOS (UEFI)

Information:
A fan kit is required when using CPU boards 5PC901.TS17-00 and 5PC901.TS17-01.

4.2.3.1.2 Order data

Order number Short description Figure

CPU boards
5PC901.TS17-00 CPU board Intel Core i7 6820EQ 2.8 GHz - Quad core - QM170
chipset - For Panel PC 900
5PC901.TS17-01 CPU board Intel Core i5 6440EQ 2.7 GHz - Quad core - QM170
chipset - For Panel PC 900

Table 58: 5PC901.TS17-00, 5PC901.TS17-01 - Order data

4.2.3.1.3 Technical data

Information:
The following specified characteristic data, features and limit values are only valid for these individual
components and may differ from those of the complete system. The data specified for the complete
system applies to the complete system in which this individual component is used, for example.
Order number 5PC901.TS17-00 5PC901.TS17-01
General information
LEDs Power, HDD, Link, Run
B&R ID code 0xFC84 0xFC85
Cooling Active via fan kit
Battery
Type Renata 950 mAh
Service life 4 years 1)
Removable Yes, on the back of the Panel PC
Variant Lithium ion
Power button Yes
Reset button Yes
Buzzer Yes
Certifications
CE Yes
UL cULus E115267
Industrial control equipment
Controller
Bootloader Embedded AMI BIOS

Table 59: 5PC901.TS17-00, 5PC901.TS17-01 - Technical data

116 Panel PC 900 (Skylake) User's manual V 1.10

 Technical data
Order number 5PC901.TS17-00 5PC901.TS17-01
Processor
Type Intel Core i7-6820EQ Intel Core i5-6440EQ
Clock frequency 2800 MHz 2700 MHz
Number of cores 4
Architecture 14 nm
Thermal design power (TDP) 45 W
Intel Smart Cache 8 MB 6 MB
External bus DMI3, 8 GT/s
Intel 64 architecture Yes
Intel Turbo Boost Technology 2.0
Intel Hyper-Threading Technology Yes No
Intel vPro Technology Yes
Intel Virtualization Technology (VT-x) Yes
Intel Virtualization Technology for Directed I/O Yes
(VT-d)
Enhanced Intel SpeedStep Technology Yes
Chipset Intel QM170
Trusted Platform Module TPM 2.0
Real-time clock
Accuracy At 25°C: Typ. 12 ppm (1 second) per day 2)
Battery-backed Yes
Power failure logic
Controller MTCX 3)
Buffer time 10 ms
Memory slot
Number of memory channels 2
Type DDR4
Memory size Max. 32 GB
Max. memory bandwidth 34.1 GB/s
Graphics
Controller Intel HD Graphics 530
Max. dynamic graphics frequency 1 GHz
Color depth Max. 32-bit
DirectX support 12
OpenGL support 4.4
Resolution
DVI Resolution up to 1920 x 1200 (WUXGA)
RGB 350 MHz RAMDAC, resolution up to 4096 x 2304 @ 60 Hz (QXGA)
DisplayPort Version 1.2, resolution up to 4K
Mass memory management 3x SATA
Power management ACPI 5.0 with battery support
Interfaces
COM1
Type RS232, modem supported, not galvanically isolated
Variant DSUB, 9-pin, male
UART 16550-compatible, 16-byte FIFO buffer
Max. baud rate 115 kbit/s
COM2
Type RS232, modem supported, not galvanically isolated
Variant DSUB, 9-pin, male
UART 16550-compatible, 16-byte FIFO buffer
Max. baud rate 115 kbit/s
CFast slot
Quantity 1
Type SATA III (SATA 6.0 Gbit/s)
USB
Quantity 4
Type USB 3.0 (on bottom)
Variant Type A
Transfer rate Low speed (1.5 Mbit/s), full speed (12 Mbit/s), high speed (480 Mbit/s) to SuperSpeed (5 Gbit/s) 4)
Current-carrying capacity Max. 1 A per connection
Ethernet
Quantity 2
Variant RJ45, shielded
Transfer rate 10/100/1000 Mbit/s
Max. baud rate 1 Gbit/s
Panel/Monitor interface
Variant DVI-I
Type SDL/DVI/Monitor

Table 59: 5PC901.TS17-00, 5PC901.TS17-01 - Technical data

Panel PC 900 (Skylake) User's manual V 1.10 117

Technical data
Order number 5PC901.TS17-00 5PC901.TS17-01
Audio
Type HDA
Controller Realtek RTL888
Inputs Microphone, Line In
Outputs Line Out
Slots
Slide-in compact drives
Quantity 1
Type SATA III (SATA 6.0 Gbit/s)
Interface option 2
Add-on UPS slot Yes 5)
Slot for fan kit Yes
Electrical properties
Nominal voltage 24 VDC, SELV 6) 24 VDC ±25%, SELV 6)
Nominal current 5.5 A
Operating voltage 24 VDC (±25%), max. 7.4 A
Inrush current Max. 60 A for < 300 μs
Overvoltage category per EN 61131-2 II
Galvanic isolation Yes
Operating conditions
Pollution degree per EN 61131-2 Pollution degree 2
Ambient conditions
Elevation
Operation Max. 3000 m (component-dependent) 7)
Mechanical properties
Housing 8)
Material Aluminum, Light metal die casting
Coating Anthracite
Dimensions
Width 225 mm
Height 226 mm
Depth 54 mm
Weight Approx. 450 g

Table 59: 5PC901.TS17-00, 5PC901.TS17-01 - Technical data

1) At 50°C, 8.5 µA for the components being supplied and self-discharge of 40%. If an SRAM interface option is installed, the service life is 2½ years.
2) At max. specified ambient temperature: Typ. 58 ppm (5 seconds) - worst case 220 ppm (19 seconds).
3) Maintenance Controller Extended
4) The SuperSpeed transfer rate (5 Gbit/s) is only possible with USB 3.0.
5) The UPS module can only be operated in the IF option 1 slot.
6) IEC 61010-2-201 requirements must be observed; see section "+24 VDC power supply" in the user's manual.
7) The maximum ambient temperature is typically derated 1°C per 1000 meters starting at 500 m above sea level.
8) Visual deviations in color and surface quality are possible due to process or batch conditions.

118 Panel PC 900 (Skylake) User's manual V 1.10

 Technical data

4.2.4 HM170 CPU boards

4.2.4.1 5PC901.TS17-02, -03

4.2.4.1.1 General information

• Intel Celeron and Intel Core i processors

• Intel HM170 chipset
• 2x DDR4 memory slots
• Intel Gen 9 HD graphics
• AMI BIOS (UEFI)

Information:
The following applies when operated without a fan kit:
• CPU board 5PC901.TS17-02 is limited to a maximum CPU frequency of 1900 MHz.
• CPU board 5PC901.TS17-03 is limited to a maximum CPU frequency of 1700 MHz.

4.2.4.1.2 Order data

Order number Short description Figure

CPU boards
5PC901.TS17-02 CPU board Intel Core i3 6100E - Dual core - HM170 chipset -
2.7 GHz active, 1.9 GHz passive - For Panel PC 900
5PC901.TS17-03 CPU board Intel Celeron G3900E - Dual core - HM170 chipset
- 2.4 GHz active, 1.7 GHz passive - For Panel PC 900

Table 60: 5PC901.TS17-02, 5PC901.TS17-03 - Order data

4.2.4.1.3 Technical data

Information:
The following specified characteristic data, features and limit values are only valid for these individual
components and may differ from those of the complete system. The data specified for the complete
system applies to the complete system in which this individual component is used, for example.
Order number 5PC901.TS17-02 5PC901.TS17-03
General information
LEDs Power, HDD, Link, Run
B&R ID code 0xFC86 0xFC87
Cooling Active via fan kit
Passive via heat sink
Battery
Type Renata 950 mAh
Service life 4 years 1)
Removable Yes, on the back of the Panel PC
Variant Lithium ion
Power button Yes
Reset button Yes
Buzzer Yes
Certifications
CE Yes
UL In preparation
Controller
Bootloader Embedded AMI BIOS

Table 61: 5PC901.TS17-02, 5PC901.TS17-03 - Technical data

Panel PC 900 (Skylake) User's manual V 1.10 119

Technical data
Order number 5PC901.TS17-02 5PC901.TS17-03
Processor
Type Intel Core i3-6100E Intel Celeron G3900E
Clock frequency 2700 MHz 2400 MHz
Number of cores 2
Architecture 14 nm
Thermal design power (TDP) 35 W
Intel Smart Cache 3 MB 2 MB
External bus DMI3, 8 GT/s
Intel 64 architecture Yes
Intel Turbo Boost Technology No
Intel Hyper-Threading Technology Yes No
Intel vPro Technology No
Intel Virtualization Technology (VT-x) Yes
Intel Virtualization Technology for Directed I/O Yes
(VT-d)
Enhanced Intel SpeedStep Technology Yes
Chipset Intel HM170
Trusted Platform Module TPM 2.0
Real-time clock
Accuracy At 25°C: Typ. 12 ppm (1 second) per day 2)
Battery-backed Yes
Power failure logic
Controller MTCX 3)
Buffer time 10 ms
Memory slot
Number of memory channels 2
Type DDR4
Memory size Max. 32 GB
Max. memory bandwidth 34.1 GB/s
Graphics
Controller Intel HD Graphics 530 Intel HD Graphics 510
Max. dynamic graphics frequency 950 MHz
Color depth Max. 32-bit
DirectX support 12
OpenGL support 4.4
Resolution
DVI Resolution up to 1920 x 1200 (WUXGA)
RGB 350 MHz RAMDAC, resolution up to 2048 x 1536 @ 75 Hz (QXGA)
DisplayPort Version 1.2, resolution up to 4K
Mass memory management 3x SATA
Power management ACPI 5.0 with battery support
Interfaces
COM1
Type RS232, modem supported, not galvanically isolated
Variant DSUB, 9-pin, male
UART 16550-compatible, 16-byte FIFO buffer
Max. baud rate 115 kbit/s
COM2
Type RS232, modem supported, not galvanically isolated
Variant DSUB, 9-pin, male
UART 16550-compatible, 16-byte FIFO buffer
Max. baud rate 115 kbit/s
CFast slot
Quantity 1
Type SATA III (SATA 6.0 Gbit/s)
USB
Quantity 4
Type USB 3.0 (on bottom)
Variant Type A
Transfer rate Low speed (1.5 Mbit/s), full speed (12 Mbit/s), high speed (480 Mbit/s) to SuperSpeed (5 Gbit/s) 4)
Current-carrying capacity Max. 1 A per connection
Ethernet
Quantity 2
Variant RJ45, shielded
Transfer rate 10/100/1000 Mbit/s
Max. baud rate 1 Gbit/s
Panel/Monitor interface
Variant DVI-I
Type SDL/DVI/Monitor

Table 61: 5PC901.TS17-02, 5PC901.TS17-03 - Technical data

120 Panel PC 900 (Skylake) User's manual V 1.10

 Technical data
Order number 5PC901.TS17-02 5PC901.TS17-03
Audio
Type HDA
Controller Realtek RTL888
Inputs Microphone, Line In
Outputs Line Out
Slots
Slide-in compact drives
Quantity 1
Type SATA III (SATA 6.0 Gbit/s)
Interface option 2
Add-on UPS slot Yes 5)
Slot for fan kit Yes
Electrical properties
Nominal voltage 24 VDC ±25%, SELV 6)
Nominal current 5.5 A
Operating voltage 24 VDC (±25%), max. 7.4 A
Inrush current Max. 60 A for < 300 μs
Overvoltage category per EN 61131-2 II
Galvanic isolation Yes
Operating conditions
Pollution degree per EN 61131-2 Pollution degree 2
Ambient conditions
Elevation
Operation Max. 3000 m (component-dependent) 7)
Mechanical properties
Housing 8)
Material Aluminum, Light metal die casting
Coating Anthracite
Dimensions
Width 225 mm
Height 226 mm
Depth 54 mm
Weight Approx. 450 g

Table 61: 5PC901.TS17-02, 5PC901.TS17-03 - Technical data

1) At 50°C, 8.5 µA for the components being supplied and self-discharge of 40%. If an SRAM interface option is installed, the service life is 2½ years.
2) At max. specified ambient temperature: Typ. 58 ppm (5 seconds) - worst case 220 ppm (19 seconds).
3) Maintenance Controller Extended
4) The SuperSpeed transfer rate (5 Gbit/s) is only possible with USB 3.0.
5) The UPS module can only be operated in the IF option 1 slot.
6) IEC 61010-2-201 requirements must be observed; see section "+24 VDC power supply" in the user's manual.
7) The maximum ambient temperature is typically derated 1°C per 1000 meters starting at 500 m above sea level.
8) Visual deviations in color and surface quality are possible due to process or batch conditions.

Panel PC 900 (Skylake) User's manual V 1.10 121

Technical data

4.2.5 System units

4.2.5.1 5PC911.SX00-00

4.2.5.1.1 General information

The active Panel PC 900 system unit consists of a housing and heat sink. A fan kit is also required for operation.
A CPU board, main memory, IF options, fan kit and slide-in compact drive are installed in the system unit.
The 5AC902.FA00-00 fan kit is not included with the system unit and must be ordered separately.

4.2.5.1.2 Order data

Order number Short description Figure

System units
5PC911.SX00-00 PPC900 active system unit
Required accessories
5PC901.TS17-00 CPU board Intel Core i7 6820EQ 2.8 GHz - Quad core - QM170
chipset - For Panel PC 900
5PC901.TS17-01 CPU board Intel Core i5 6440EQ 2.7 GHz - Quad core - QM170
chipset - For Panel PC 900
5PC901.TS17-02 CPU board Intel Core i3 6100E 2.7 GHz - Dual core - HM170
chipset - For Panel PC 900
5PC901.TS17-03 CPU board Intel Celeron G3900E 2.4 GHz - Dual core - HM170 Figure 15: (symbolic image)
chipset - For Panel PC 900
5AC902.FA00-00 PPC900 fan kit - For system unit 5PC911.SX00-00

Table 62: 5PC911.SX00-00 - Order data

4.2.5.1.3 Technical data

Order number 5PC911.SX00-00

General information
Cooling Active via fan kit
Passive via heat sink
Certifications
CE Yes
UL cULus E115267
Industrial control equipment
HazLoc cULus HazLoc E180196
Industrial control equipment
for hazardous locations
Class I, Division 2, Groups ABCD, T3C 1)
EAC Product family certification
Mechanical properties
Housing
Material Aluminum, Light metal die casting
Coating Anthracite
Dimensions
Width 225 mm
Height 226 mm
Depth 54 mm
Weight Approx. 2821 g

Table 63: 5PC911.SX00-00 - Technical data

1) Yes, although applies only if all components installed within the complete system have this certification and the complete system itself carries the corresponding
mark.

122 Panel PC 900 (Skylake) User's manual V 1.10

 Technical data

4.2.5.2 5PC911.SX00-01

4.2.5.2.1 General information

The passive Panel PC 900 system unit consists of a housing and heat sink. A CPU board, main memory, IF options
and slide-in compact drive are installed in the system unit.

4.2.5.2.2 Order data

Order number Short description Figure

System units
5PC911.SX00-01 PPC900 passive system unit
Required accessories
5PC901.TS17-02 CPU board Intel Core i3 6100E 2.7 GHz - Dual core - HM170
chipset - For Panel PC 900
5PC901.TS17-03 CPU board Intel Celeron G3900E 2.4 GHz - Dual core - HM170
chipset - For Panel PC 900

Table 64: 5PC911.SX00-01 - Order data

4.2.5.2.3 Technical data

Order number 5PC911.SX00-01

General information
Cooling Passive via heat sink
Certifications
CE Yes
UL cULus E115267
Industrial control equipment
HazLoc cULus HazLoc E180196
Industrial control equipment
for hazardous locations
Class I, Division 2, Groups ABCD, T3C 1)
EAC Product family certification
Mechanical properties
Housing
Material Aluminum, Light metal die casting
Coating Anthracite
Dimensions
Width 225 mm
Height 226 mm
Depth 54 mm
Weight Approx. 2821 g

Table 65: 5PC911.SX00-01 - Technical data

1) Yes, although applies only if all components installed within the complete system have this certification and the complete system itself carries the corresponding
mark.

Panel PC 900 (Skylake) User's manual V 1.10 123

Technical data

4.2.6 Main memory

4.2.6.1 5MMDDR.xxxx-04

4.2.6.1.1 General information

These 260-pin DDR4 main memory modules operate with a data rate of 2133 MHz and are available in sizes
ranging from 4 GB to 16 GB.
If two main memory modules of identical size (e.g. 4 GB) are connected to the CPU board, then dual-channel
memory technology is supported. This technology is not supported if two main memory modules of different sizes
(e.g. 4 GB and 8 GB) are connected.

4.2.6.1.2 Order data

Order number Short description Figure

Main memory
5MMDDR.4096-04 SO-DIMM DDR4, 4096 MB
5MMDDR.8192-04 SO-DIMM DDR4, 8192 MB
5MMDDR.016G-04 SO-DIMM DDR4, 16384 MB

4.2.6.1.3 Technical data

Information:
The following specified characteristic data, features and limit values are only valid for these individual
components and may differ from those of the complete system. The data specified for the complete
system applies to the complete system in which this individual component is used, for example.
Order number 5MMDDR.4096-04 5MMDDR.8192-04 5MMDDR.016G-04
General information
Certifications
CE Yes
UKCA Yes
UL cULus E115267
Industrial control equipment
DNV Temperature: B (0 - 55°C)
Humidity: B (up to 100%)
Vibration: A (0.7 g)
EMC: B (bridge and open deck) 1)
LR ENV3
KR Yes
ABS Yes
BV EC31B
Temperature: 5 - 55°C
Vibration: 0.7 g
EMC: Bridge and open deck
EAC Product family certification
Controller
Memory
Type SO-DIMM DDR4 SDRAM
Memory size 4 GB 8 GB 16 GB
Construction 260-pin
Organization 512M x 64-bit 1024M x 64-bit 2048M x 64-bit
Velocity DDR4-2133 (PC4-17000)
Operating conditions
Pollution degree per EN 61131-2 Pollution degree 2
1) Yes, but applies only if all components installed in the complete system have this certification and are listed on the associated DNV certificate for the product
family.

124 Panel PC 900 (Skylake) User's manual V 1.10

 Technical data

4.2.7 Bus units

Information:
For information about installing or replacing a bus unit, please refer to the section "Installing the bus
unit" on page 222.
When installing or replacing a bus unit, it is also necessary to load the default settings in BIOS Setup
(Save & Exit).

4.2.7.1 5AC902.BX0x-xx

4.2.7.1.1 General information

Bus units consist of a housing and bus. They can be expanded on the Panel PC 900 system unit.
In addition to the availability of different variants with PCI and PCIe slots, every bus unit has a slide-in drive slot
and fan kit.
The fan kit is not included in the delivery of the bus unit and must be ordered separately. If an active system unit
(5PC911.SX00-00) is being used, then a fan kit must be configured in the bus unit.

1-slot bus units

PCI slot 1 PCIe slot 1 (x8)

5AC902.BX01-00 5AC902.BX01-01

Figure 16: 1-slot bus units

2-slot bus units

PCI slot 1 PCIe slot 1 (x8) PCIe slot 1 (x4)
PCI slot 2 PCI slot 2 PCIe slot 2 (x4)

5AC902.BX02-00 5AC902.BX02-01 5AC902.BX02-02

Figure 17: 2-slot bus units

Information:
Bus unit 5AC902.BX02-02 is supported beginning with firmware version V1.14. Additional information
about firmware upgrades can be found in the section "Firmware upgrade" on page 291.

Panel PC 900 (Skylake) User's manual V 1.10 125

Technical data

4.2.7.1.2 Order data

Order number Short description Figure

Bus units
5AC902.BX01-00 PPC900 bus unit, 1-slot - 1 PCI - 1 slide-in
5AC902.BX01-01 PPC900 bus unit, 1-slot - 1 PCI Express x8 - 1 slide-in
5AC902.BX02-00 PPC900 bus unit, 2-slot - 2 PCI - 1 slide-in
5AC902.BX02-01 PPC900 2-slot bus unit - 1 PCI - 1 PCI Express x8 - 1 slide-in
5AC902.BX02-02 PPC900 bus unit, 2-slot - 2 PCI Express x4 - 1 slide-in
Optional accessories
Fan kit
5AC902.FA0X-00 PPC900 fan kit - For PPC900 bus unit

Table 68: 5AC902.BX01-00, 5AC902.BX01-01, 5AC902.BX02-00, 5AC902.BX02-01, 5AC902.BX02-02 - Order data

4.2.7.1.3 Technical data

Order number 5AC902.BX01-00 5AC902.BX01-01 5AC902.BX02-00 5AC902.BX02-01 5AC902.BX02-02

General information
Certifications
CE Yes
UL cULus E115267
Industrial control equipment
HazLoc cULus HazLoc E180196
Industrial control equipment
for hazardous locations
Class I, Division 2, Groups ABCD, T3C 1)
EAC Product family certification
Slots
PCI slots
Quantity 1 - 2 1 -
Type 32-bit - 32-bit 32-bit -
Variant PCI half-size - PCI half-size PCI half-size -
Standard 2.2 - 2.2 2.2 -
Bus speed 33 MHz - 33 MHz 33 MHz -
PCIe to PCI bridge Yes - Yes Yes -
PCIe slots
Quantity - 1 - 1 2
Variant - PCIe half-size - PCIe half-size PCIe half-size
Standard - 2.0 - 2.0 2.0
Bus speed - x8 (4 GB/s) - x8 (4 GB/s) x4 (2 GB/s)
Slide-in drives 1
Mechanical properties
Dimensions
Width 164 mm
Height 218 mm
Depth 54.7 mm 54.7 mm 75 mm 75 mm 75 mm
Weight Approx. 1020 g Approx. 1020 g Approx. 1220 g Approx. 1220 g Approx. 1220 g

Table 69: 5AC902.BX01-00, 5AC902.BX01-01, 5AC902.BX02-00, 5AC902.BX02-01, 5AC902.BX02-02 - Technical data

1) Yes, although applies only if all components installed within the complete system have this certification and the complete system itself carries the corresponding
mark.

Information:
By default, PCIe slots are limited to Gen1 in BIOS. However, this PCIe Gen setting can be changed in
BIOS (Advanced - PCI Express configuration - PCI Express GEN 2 settings).

126 Panel PC 900 (Skylake) User's manual V 1.10

 Technical data

4.2.8 Fan kit

Information:
Fan kits are subject to wear and must be checked at appropriate intervals and cleaned or replaced
when not functioning properly (e.g. due to dirt and grime). For information about replacing fan filters,
please refer to the section "Replacing the fan filter" on page 221.

Information:
For information about installing or replacing a fan kit, please refer to the section "Replacing the fan
kit" on page 220.

4.2.8.1 5AC902.FA00-00

4.2.8.1.1 General information

This fan kit includes 2 fans that are installed to improve the heat dissipation of the active 5PC911.SX00-00 PPC900
system unit.
• 2 fans for improved heat dissipation of the system unit
• Simple installation and removal
The 5AC902.FA00-00 fan kit is not included with the system unit and must be ordered separately.

4.2.8.1.2 Order data

Order number Short description Figure

Fan kit
5AC902.FA00-00 PPC900 fan kit - For system unit 5PC911.SX00-00
Optional accessories
Accessories
5AC902.FI00-00 PPC900 filter kit for system unit

Table 70: 5AC902.FA00-00 - Order data

4.2.8.1.3 Technical data

Order number 5AC902.FA00-00

General information
Number of fans 2
Speed Max. 9500 ±10% rpm
Noise level 40.2 dB(A) 1)
Service life 70,000 hours at 40°C
Certifications
CE Yes
UL cULus E115267
Industrial control equipment
HazLoc cULus HazLoc E180196
Industrial control equipment
for hazardous locations
Class I, Division 2, Groups ABCD, T3C 2)
EAC Product family certification
Mechanical properties
Weight Approx. 70 g

Table 71: 5AC902.FA00-00 - Technical data

1) At maximum fan speed.
2) Yes, although applies only if all components installed within the complete system have this certification and the complete system itself carries the corresponding
mark.

Panel PC 900 (Skylake) User's manual V 1.10 127

Technical data

4.2.8.2 5AC902.FA0X-00

4.2.8.2.1 General information

This fan kit includes a fan that is installed to improve the heat dissipation of a PPC900 bus unit.
• 1 fan for improved heat dissipation on the bus unit
• Simple installation and removal
The fan kit is not included in the delivery of the bus unit and must be ordered separately. If an active system unit
(5PC911.SX00-00) is being used, then a fan kit must be configured in the bus unit.

4.2.8.2.2 Order data

Order number Short description Figure

Fan kit
5AC902.FA0X-00 PPC900 fan kit - For PPC900 bus unit
Optional accessories
Accessories
5AC902.FI0X-00 PPC900 filter kit for bus unit

Table 72: 5AC902.FA0X-00 - Order data

4.2.8.2.3 Technical data

Order number 5AC902.FA0X-00

General information
Number of fans 1
Speed Max. 9500 ±10% rpm
Noise level 40.2 dB(A) 1)
Service life 70,000 hours at 40°C
Certifications
CE Yes
UL cULus E115267
Industrial control equipment
HazLoc cULus HazLoc E180196
Industrial control equipment
for hazardous locations
Class I, Division 2, Groups ABCD, T3C 2)
EAC Product family certification
Mechanical properties
Weight Approx. 36 g

Table 73: 5AC902.FA0X-00 - Technical data

1) At maximum fan speed.
2) Yes, although applies only if all components installed within the complete system have this certification and the complete system itself carries the corresponding
mark.

128 Panel PC 900 (Skylake) User's manual V 1.10

 Technical data

4.2.9 Drives

Information:
Current information, such as revision-dependent technical data, is available on the B&R website.

4.2.9.1 5AC901.CHDD-01

4.2.9.1.1 General information

This 500 GB slide-in compact hard disk is specified for 24-hour operation. The slide-in compact drive can be used
in APC910 and PPC900 system units.
• 500 GB hard disk
• Slide-in compact
• Specified for 24-hour operation
• S.M.A.R.T. support

4.2.9.1.2 Order data

Order number Short description Figure

Drives
5AC901.CHDD-01 500 GB hard disk - Slide-in compact - SATA
Optional accessories
Drives
5MMHDD.0500-00 500 GB hard disk - SATA

Table 74: 5AC901.CHDD-01 - Order data

4.2.9.1.3 Technical data

Caution!
A sudden power failure can result in data loss! In very rare cases, the mass storage device may also
be damaged!
The preventive use of a UPS is therefore recommended.

Information:
The following specified characteristic data, features and limit values are only valid for this accessory
and may differ from those of the complete system. The data specified for the complete system applies
to the complete system in which this accessory is installed, for example.
Order number 5AC901.CHDD-01
General information
Certifications
CE Yes
UL cULus E115267
Industrial control equipment
HazLoc cULus HazLoc E180196
Industrial control equipment
for hazardous locations
Class I, Division 2, Groups ABCD, T3C 1)
EAC Product family certification
Hard disk
Capacity 500 GB
Number of heads 2
Number of sectors 976,773,168
Bytes per sector 512 (logical) / 4096 (physical)
Cache 16 MB
Speed 5400 rpm ±0.2%
Startup time Typ. 3.5 s (from 0 rpm to read access)
Service life 5 years
MTBF 1,000,000 hours 2)
S.M.A.R.T. support Yes
Interface SATA
Access time 5.5 ms

Table 75: 5AC901.CHDD-01 - Technical data

Panel PC 900 (Skylake) User's manual V 1.10 129

Technical data
Order number 5AC901.CHDD-01
Supported transfer modes SATA II
Data transfer rate
Internal Max. 147 MB/s
To/From host Max. 150 Mbit/s (SATA I), max. 300 Mbit/s (SATA II)
Positioning time
Nominal (read access) 11 ms
Maximum (read access) 21 ms
Operating conditions
Pollution degree per EN 61131-2 Pollution degree 2
Ambient conditions
Temperature 3)
Operation 4) 0 to 60°C
24-hour operation 5) 0 to 60°C
Storage -40 to 70°C
Transport -40 to 70°C
Relative humidity 6)
Operation 8 to 90%, non-condensing
Storage 5 to 95%, non-condensing
Transport 5 to 95%, non-condensing
Vibration
Operation (continuous) 5 to 500 Hz: 0.25 g, no unrecoverable errors
Operation (occasional) 5 to 500 Hz: 0.5 g, no unrecoverable errors
Storage 10 to 500 Hz: 5 g, no unrecoverable errors
Transport 10 to 500 Hz: 5 g, no unrecoverable errors
Shock
Operation 400 g and 2 ms duration, no unrecoverable errors
Storage 1000 g and 2 ms duration, no unrecoverable errors
Transport 1000 g and 2 ms duration, no unrecoverable errors
Elevation
Operation -305 to 3048 m
Storage -305 to 12192 m
Mechanical properties
Installation Fixed 7)
Dimensions
Width 10 mm
Height 75 mm
Depth 105 mm
Weight 134 g
Vendor information
Manufacturer Western Digital
Manufacturer's product ID WD5000LUCT

Table 75: 5AC901.CHDD-01 - Technical data

1) Yes, although applies only if all components installed within the complete system have this certification and the complete system itself carries the corresponding
mark.
2) With 8760 POH (power-on hours) per year and 25°C surface temperature.
3) Temperature values at an elevation of 305 meters. The temperature specification must be reduced linearly by 1°C every 305 meters. The temperature is
permitted to increase or decrease by a maximum of 20°C per hour.
4) Standard operation refers to 333 POH (power-on hours) per month.
5) 24-hour operation refers to 732 POH (power-on hours) per month.
6) Humidity gradient: Maximum 20% per hour.
7) Slide-in compact installation.

130 Panel PC 900 (Skylake) User's manual V 1.10

 Technical data

4.2.9.1.4 Temperature/Humidity diagram

RH [%]
100
95
90

80

70

60

50
(2) (1)
40

30

20

10 8
5
0 T [°C]
-80 -70 -60 -50 -40 -30 -20 -10 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100

Diagram legend
(1) Operation T [°C] Temperature in °C
(2) Storage and transport RH [%] Relative humidity (RH) in percent and non-condensing

Panel PC 900 (Skylake) User's manual V 1.10 131

Technical data

4.2.9.2 5AC901.CSSD-03

4.2.9.2.1 General information

This 60 GB slide-in compact solid-state drive (SSD) is based on multi-level cell (MLC) technology and is SATA 3.0
compatible. The slide-in compact drive can be used in APC910 and PPC900 system units.
• 60 GB solid-state drive
• MLC flash memory
• S.M.A.R.T. support
• Slide-in compact
• Compatible with SATA 3.0

4.2.9.2.2 Order data

Order number Short description Figure

Drives
5AC901.CSSD-03 60 GB SSD MLC - Slide-in compact - SATA
Optional accessories
Drives
5MMSSD.0060-01 60 GB SSD MLC - Innodisk - SATA

Table 76: 5AC901.CSSD-03 - Order data

4.2.9.2.3 Technical data

Caution!
A sudden power failure can result in data loss! In very rare cases, the mass storage device may also
be damaged!
The preventive use of a UPS is therefore recommended.

Information:
The following specified characteristic data, features and limit values are only valid for this accessory
and may differ from those of the complete system. The data specified for the complete system applies
to the complete system in which this accessory is installed, for example.
Order number 5AC901.CSSD-03
Revision C0 D0 F0
General information
Certifications
CE Yes
UL cULus E115267
Industrial control equipment
HazLoc cULus HazLoc E180196
Industrial control equipment
for hazardous locations
Class I, Division 2, Groups ABCD, T3C 1)
DNV GL Temperature: B (0 - 55°C)
Humidity: B (up to 100%)
Vibration: A (0.7 g)
EMC: B (bridge and open deck) 2)
EAC Product family certification
Solid-state drive
Capacity 60 GB
Data reliability Max. 1 unrecoverable error per 1015 bits read
MTBF Min. 1,500,000 h
S.M.A.R.T. support Yes

Table 77: 5AC901.CSSD-03, 5AC901.CSSD-03, 5AC901.CSSD-03 - Technical data

132 Panel PC 900 (Skylake) User's manual V 1.10

 Technical data
Order number 5AC901.CSSD-03
Revision C0 D0 F0
Interface SATA
Servicing None
Continuous reading Max. 510 MB/s
Continuous writing Max. 430 MB/s
IOPS 3)
4k read Max. 50,000 (random)
4k write Max. 25,000 (random)
Endurance
MLC flash memory Yes
Guaranteed data volume
Guaranteed 35 TBW 4) 47 TBW 4)
Compatibility SATA 3.0 compliant
ACS-2
SSD Enhanced SMART ATA feature set
Native Command Queuing (NCQ)
Operating conditions
Pollution degree per EN 61131-2 Pollution degree 2
Ambient conditions
Temperature
Operation 0 to 70°C -30 to 85 °C -40 to 85°C
Storage -40 to 85°C
Transport -40 to 85°C
Relative humidity
Operation 8 to 90 %, non-condensing 5 to 90%, non-condensing
Storage 8 to 95%, non-condensing 5 to 95%, non-condensing
Transport 8 to 95%, non-condensing 5 to 95%, non-condensing
Vibration
Operation 10 to 2000 Hz: 20 g
Storage 10 to 2000 Hz: 20 g
Transport 10 to 2000 Hz: 20 g
Shock
Operation 1500 g, 0.5 ms
Storage 1500 g, 0.5 ms
Transport 1500 g, 0.5 ms
Elevation
Operation -300 to 12,192 m
Storage -300 to 12,192 m
Transport -300 to 12,192 m
Mechanical properties
Installation Permanent 5)
Dimensions
Width 13 mm
Height 98 mm
Depth 105 mm
Weight 118 g
Vendor information
Manufacturer Toshiba
Manufacturer's product ID THNSNH060GBST THNSNJ060WCST THNSNJ060WCSU

Table 77: 5AC901.CSSD-03, 5AC901.CSSD-03, 5AC901.CSSD-03 - Technical data

1) Yes, but applies only if all components installed in the complete system have this certification and the complete system bears the corresponding mark.
2) Yes, but applies only if all components installed in the complete system have this certification and are listed on the associated DNV GL certificate for the
product family.
3) IOPS: Random read and write input/output operations per second
4) TBW: Terabytes written
5) Slide-in compact installation.

Panel PC 900 (Skylake) User's manual V 1.10 133

Technical data

4.2.9.2.4 Temperature/Humidity diagram

5AC901.CSSD-03 Rev. F0
RH [%]
100
95 (2)
90

80

70

60

50 (1)
40

30

20

10
5
0 T [°C]
-80 -70 -60 -50 -40 -30 -20 -10 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100

Diagram legend
(1) Operation T [°C] Temperature in °C
(2) Storage and transport RH [%] Relative humidity (RH) in percent and non-condensing

5AC901.CSSD-03 ≤ Rev. D0
RH [%]
100
95
90

80

70

60

50 (2) (1)
40

30

20

10
5
0 T [°C]
-80 -70 -60 -50 -40 -30 -20 -10 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100

Diagram legend
(1) Operation T [°C] Temperature in °C
(2) Storage and transport RH [%] Relative humidity (RH) in percent and non-condensing

5AC901.CSSD-03 ≤ Rev. C0
RH [%]
100
95
90

80

70

60

50 (2) (1)
40

30

20

10 8
5
0 T [°C]
-80 -70 -60 -50 -40 -30 -20 -10 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100

Diagram legend
(1) Operation T [°C] Temperature in °C
(2) Storage and transport RH [%] Relative humidity (RH) in percent and non-condensing

134 Panel PC 900 (Skylake) User's manual V 1.10

 Technical data

4.2.9.3 5AC901.CSSD-04

4.2.9.3.1 General information

This 128 GB slide-in compact solid-state drive (SSD) is based on multi-level cell (MLC) technology and is SATA
3.0 compatible. The slide-in compact drive can be used in APC910 and PPC900 system units.
• 128 GB solid-state drive
• MLC flash memory
• S.M.A.R.T. support
• Slide-in compact
• Compatible with SATA 3.0

4.2.9.3.2 Order data

Order number Short description Figure

Drives
5AC901.CSSD-04 128 GB SSD MLC - Slide-in compact - Innodisk - SATA
Optional accessories
Drives
5MMSSD.0128-01 128 GB SSD MLC - Innodisk - SATA

Table 78: 5AC901.CSSD-04 - Order data

4.2.9.3.3 Technical data

Caution!
A sudden power failure can result in data loss! In very rare cases, the mass storage device may also
be damaged!
The preventive use of a UPS is therefore recommended.

Information:
The following specified characteristic data, features and limit values are only valid for this accessory
and may differ from those of the complete system. The data specified for the complete system applies
to the complete system in which this accessory is installed, for example.
Order number 5AC901.CSSD-04
Revision C0 D0 E0 G0
General information
Certifications
CE Yes
UL cULus E115267
Industrial control equipment
HazLoc cULus HazLoc E180196
Industrial control equipment
for hazardous locations
Class I, Division 2, Groups ABCD, T3C 1)
DNV GL Temperature: B (0 - 55°C)
Humidity: B (up to 100%)
Vibration: A (0.7 g)
EMC: B (bridge and open deck) 2)
EAC Product family certification
Solid-state drive
Capacity 128 GB
Data reliability Max. 1 unrecoverable error per 1015 bits read
MTBF Min. 1,500,000 h
S.M.A.R.T. support Yes

Table 79: 5AC901.CSSD-04, 5AC901.CSSD-04, 5AC901.CSSD-04, 5AC901.CSSD-04 - Technical data

Panel PC 900 (Skylake) User's manual V 1.10 135

Technical data
Order number 5AC901.CSSD-04
Revision C0 D0 E0 G0
Interface SATA
Servicing None
Continuous reading Max. 510 MB/s
Continuous writing Max. 450 MB/s
IOPS 3)
4k read Max. 80,000 (random) Max. 85,000 (random)
4k write Max. 35,000 (random)
Endurance
MLC flash memory Yes
Guaranteed data volume
Guaranteed 74 TBW 4) 100 TBW 4)
Compatibility Compliant with SATA revision 3.0 compliant
ACS-2
SSD Enhanced SMART ATA feature set
Native Command Queuing (NCQ)
Operating conditions
Pollution degree per EN 61131-2 Pollution degree 2
Ambient conditions
Temperature
Operation 0 to 70°C -30 to 85 °C -40 to 85°C
Storage -40 to 85°C
Transport -40 to 85°C
Relative humidity
Operation 8 to 90 %, non-condensing 5 to 90%, non-condensing
Storage 8 to 95%, non-condensing 5 to 95%, non-condensing
Transport 8 to 95%, non-condensing 5 to 95%, non-condensing
Vibration
Operation 10 to 2000 Hz: 20 g
Storage 10 to 2000 Hz: 20 g
Transport 10 to 2000 Hz: 20 g
Shock
Operation 1500 g, 0.5 ms
Storage 1500 g, 0.5 ms
Transport 1500 g, 0.5 ms
Elevation
Operation -300 to 12,192 m
Storage -300 to 12,192 m
Transport -300 to 12,192 m
Mechanical properties
Installation Permanent 5)
Dimensions
Width 13 mm
Height 98 mm
Depth 105 mm
Weight 118 g
Vendor information
Manufacturer Toshiba
Manufacturer's product ID THNSNH128GBST THNSNJ128WBST THNSNJ128WCST THNSNJ128WCSU

Table 79: 5AC901.CSSD-04, 5AC901.CSSD-04, 5AC901.CSSD-04, 5AC901.CSSD-04 - Technical data

1) Yes, but applies only if all components installed in the complete system have this certification and the complete system bears the corresponding mark.
2) Yes, but applies only if all components installed in the complete system have this certification and are listed on the associated DNV GL certificate for the
product family.
3) IOPS: Random read and write input/output operations per second
4) TBW: Terabytes written
5) Slide-in compact installation.

136 Panel PC 900 (Skylake) User's manual V 1.10

 Technical data

4.2.9.3.4 Temperature/Humidity diagram

5AC901.CSSD-04 Rev. G0
RH [%]
100
95 (2)
90

80

70

60

50 (1)
40

30

20

10
5
0 T [°C]
-80 -70 -60 -50 -40 -30 -20 -10 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100

Diagram legend
(1) Operation T [°C] Temperature in °C
(2) Storage and transport RH [%] Relative humidity (RH) in percent and non-condensing

5AC901.CSSD-04 ≤ Rev. D0
RH [%]
100
95
90

80

70

60

50 (2) (1)
40

30

20

10
5
0 T [°C]
-80 -70 -60 -50 -40 -30 -20 -10 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100

Diagram legend
(1) Operation T [°C] Temperature in °C
(2) Storage and transport RH [%] Relative humidity (RH) in percent and non-condensing

5AC901.CSSD-04 ≤ Rev. C0
RH [%]
100
95
90

80

70

60

50 (2) (1)
40

30

20

10 8
5
0 T [°C]
-80 -70 -60 -50 -40 -30 -20 -10 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100

Diagram legend
(1) Operation T [°C] Temperature in °C
(2) Storage and transport RH [%] Relative humidity (RH) in percent and non-condensing

Panel PC 900 (Skylake) User's manual V 1.10 137

Technical data

4.2.9.4 5AC901.CSSD-05

4.2.9.4.1 General information

This 256 GB slide-in compact solid-state drive (SSD) is based on multi-level cell (MLC) technology and is SATA
3.0 compatible. The slide-in compact drive can be used in APC910 and PPC900 system units.
• 256 GB solid-state drive
• MLC flash memory
• S.M.A.R.T. support
• Slide-in compact
• Compatible with SATA 3.0

4.2.9.4.2 Order data

Order number Short description Figure

Drives
5AC901.CSSD-05 256 GB SSD MLC - Slide-in compact - Innodisk - SATA
Optional accessories
Drives
5MMSSD.0256-00 256 GB SSD MLC - Innodisk - SATA

Table 80: 5AC901.CSSD-05 - Order data

4.2.9.4.3 Technical data

Caution!
A sudden power failure can result in data loss! In very rare cases, the mass storage device may also
be damaged!
The preventive use of a UPS is therefore recommended.

Information:
The following specified characteristic data, features and limit values are only valid for this accessory
and may differ from those of the complete system. The data specified for the complete system applies
to the complete system in which this accessory is installed, for example.
Order number 5AC901.CSSD-05
Revision C0 E0
General information
Certifications
CE Yes
UL cULus E115267
Industrial control equipment
HazLoc cULus HazLoc E180196
Industrial control equipment
for hazardous locations
Class I, Division 2, Groups ABCD, T3C 1)
DNV GL Temperature: B (0 - 55°C)
Humidity: B (up to 100%)
Vibration: A (0.7 g)
EMC: B (bridge and open deck) 2)
EAC Product family certification
Solid-state drive
Capacity 256 GB
Data reliability Max. 1 unrecoverable error per 1015 bits read
MTBF Min. 1,500,000 h
S.M.A.R.T. support Yes

Table 81: 5AC901.CSSD-05, 5AC901.CSSD-05 - Technical data

138 Panel PC 900 (Skylake) User's manual V 1.10

 Technical data
Order number 5AC901.CSSD-05
Revision C0 E0
Interface SATA
Servicing None
Continuous reading Max. 510 MB/s
Continuous writing Max. 460 MB/s
IOPS 3)
4k read Max. 90,000 (random)
4k write Max. 35,000 (random)
Endurance
MLC flash memory Yes
Data volume
Theoretical 768 TBW 4)
Client workload 148 TBW 5) 200 TBW 5)
Compatibility SATA 3.0 compliant
ACS-2
SSD Enhanced SMART ATA feature set
Native Command Queuing (NCQ)
Operating conditions
Pollution degree per EN 61131-2 Pollution degree 2
Ambient conditions
Temperature
Operation -30 to 85°C -40 to 85°C
Storage -40 to 85°C
Transport -40 to 85°C
Relative humidity
Operation 5 to 90%, non-condensing
Storage 5 to 95%, non-condensing
Transport 5 to 95%, non-condensing
Vibration
Operation 10 to 2000 Hz: 20 g
Storage 10 to 2000 Hz: 20 g
Transport 10 to 2000 Hz: 20 g
Shock
Operation 1500 g, 0.5 ms
Storage 1500 g, 0.5 ms
Transport 1500 g, 0.5 ms
Mechanical properties
Installation Permanent 6)
Dimensions
Width 13 mm
Height 98 mm
Depth 105 mm
Weight 118 g
Vendor information
Manufacturer Toshiba
Manufacturer's product ID THNSNJ256WCST THNSNJ256WCSU

Table 81: 5AC901.CSSD-05, 5AC901.CSSD-05 - Technical data

1) Yes, but applies only if all components installed in the complete system have this certification and the complete system bears the corresponding mark.
2) Yes, but applies only if all components installed in the complete system have this certification and are listed on the associated DNV GL certificate for the
product family.
3) IOPS: Random read and write input/output operations per second
4) TBW = Terabytes written
5) Client workload per JEDEC JESD219 standard.
6) Slide-in compact installation.

Panel PC 900 (Skylake) User's manual V 1.10 139

Technical data

4.2.9.4.4 Temperature/Humidity diagram

5AC901.CSSD-05 ≥ Rev. E0
RH [%]
100
95 (2)
90

80

70

60

50 (1)
40

30

20

10
5
0 T [°C]
-80 -70 -60 -50 -40 -30 -20 -10 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100

Diagram legend
(1) Operation T [°C] Temperature in °C
(2) Storage and transport RH [%] Relative humidity (RH) in percent and non-condensing

5AC901.CSSD-05 ≤ Rev. D0
RH [%]
100
95
90

80

70

60

50 (2) (1)
40

30

20

10
5
0 T [°C]
-80 -70 -60 -50 -40 -30 -20 -10 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100

Diagram legend
(1) Operation T [°C] Temperature in °C
(2) Storage and transport RH [%] Relative humidity (RH) in percent and non-condensing

140 Panel PC 900 (Skylake) User's manual V 1.10

 Technical data

4.2.9.5 5AC901.CSSD-06

4.2.9.5.1 General information

This 512 GB slide-in compact solid-state drive (SSD) is based on multi-level cell (MLC) technology and is SATA
3.0 compatible. The slide-in compact drive can be used in APC910 and PPC900 system units.
• 512 GB solid-state drive
• MLC flash memory
• S.M.A.R.T. support
• Slide-in compact
• Compatible with SATA 3.0

4.2.9.5.2 Order data

Order number Short description Figure

Drives
5AC901.CSSD-06 512 GB SSD MLC - Slide-in compact - Innodisk - SATA
Optional accessories
Drives
5MMSSD.0512-00 512 GB SSD MLC - Innodisk - SATA

Figure 18: (symbolic image)

Table 82: 5AC901.CSSD-06 - Order data

4.2.9.5.3 Technical data

Caution!
A sudden power failure can result in data loss! In very rare cases, the mass storage device may also
be damaged!
The preventive use of a UPS is therefore recommended.

Information:
The following specified characteristic data, features and limit values are only valid for this accessory
and may differ from those of the complete system. The data specified for the complete system applies
to the complete system in which this accessory is installed, for example.
Order number 5AC901.CSSD-06
General information
Certifications
CE Yes
UL cULus E115267
Industrial control equipment
HazLoc cULus HazLoc E180196
Industrial control equipment
for hazardous locations
Class I, Division 2, Groups ABCD, T3C 1)
DNV GL Temperature: B (0 - 55°C)
Humidity: B (up to 100%)
Vibration: A (0.7 g)
EMC: B (bridge and open deck) 2)
EAC Product family certification
Solid-state drive
Capacity 512 GB
Data reliability Max. 1 unrecoverable error per 1015 bits read
MTBF Min. 1,500,000 h
S.M.A.R.T. support Yes
Interface SATA
Servicing None
Continuous reading Max. 510 MB/s
Continuous writing Max. 460 MB/s
IOPS 3)
4k read Max. 90,000 (random)
4k write Max. 35,000 (random)

Table 83: 5AC901.CSSD-06 - Technical data

Panel PC 900 (Skylake) User's manual V 1.10 141

Technical data
Order number 5AC901.CSSD-06
Endurance
MLC flash memory Yes
Data volume
Theoretical 1536 TBW 4)
Client workload 400 TBW 5)
Compatibility SATA 3.0 compliant
ACS-2
SSD Enhanced SMART ATA feature set
Native Command Queuing (NCQ)
Operating conditions
Pollution degree per EN 61131-2 Pollution degree 2
Ambient conditions
Temperature
Operation -40 to 85°C
Storage -40 to 85°C
Transport -40 to 85°C
Relative humidity
Operation 5 to 90%, non-condensing
Storage 5 to 95%, non-condensing
Transport 5 to 95%, non-condensing
Vibration
Operation 10 to 2000 Hz: 20 g
Storage 10 to 2000 Hz: 20 g
Transport 10 to 2000 Hz: 20 g
Shock
Operation 1500 g, 0.5 ms
Storage 1500 g, 0.5 ms
Transport 1500 g, 0.5 ms
Mechanical properties
Installation Permanent 6)
Dimensions
Width 13 mm
Height 98 mm
Depth 105 mm
Weight 118 g
Vendor information
Manufacturer Toshiba
Manufacturer's product ID THNSNJ512WCSU

Table 83: 5AC901.CSSD-06 - Technical data

1) Yes, but applies only if all components installed in the complete system have this certification and the complete system bears the corresponding mark.
2) Yes, but applies only if all components installed in the complete system have this certification and are listed on the associated DNV GL certificate for the
product family.
3) IOPS: Random read and write input/output operations per second
4) TBW = Terabytes written
5) Client Workload laut JEDEC JESD219 Standard.
6) Slide-in compact installation.

4.2.9.5.4 Temperature/Humidity diagram

5AC901.CSSD-06 ≤ Rev. C0
RH [%]
100
95
90

80

70

60

50 (2) (1)
40

30

20

10
5
0 T [°C]
-80 -70 -60 -50 -40 -30 -20 -10 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100

Diagram legend
(1) Operation T [°C] Temperature in °C
(2) Storage and transport RH [%] Relative humidity (RH) in percent and non-condensing

142 Panel PC 900 (Skylake) User's manual V 1.10

 Technical data

4.2.9.6 5AC901.CSSD-07

4.2.9.6.1 General information

This 1 TB slide-in compact solid-state drive (SSD) is based on multi-level cell (MLC) technology and SATA 3.0
compatible. The slide-in compact drive can be used in APC910 and PPC900 system units.
• 1 TB solid-state drive
• MLC flash memory
• S.M.A.R.T. support
• Slide-in compact
• Compatible with SATA 3.0

4.2.9.6.2 Order data

Order number Short description Figure

Drives
5AC901.CSSD-07 1 TB SSD MLC - Slide-in compact - Innodisk - SATA
Optional accessories
Drives
5MMSSD.1024-00 1 TB SSD MLC - Innodisk - SATA

Table 84: 5AC901.CSSD-07 - Order data

4.2.9.6.3 5AC901.CSSD-07 - Technical data

Order number 5AC901.CSSD-07

General information
Certifications
CE Yes
UL cULus E115267
Industrial control equipment
HazLoc cULus HazLoc E180196
Industrial control equipment
for hazardous locations
Class I, Division 2, Groups ABCD, T3C 1)
DNV GL Temperature: A (0 - 45°C)
Humidity: B (up to 100%)
Vibration: B (4 g)
EMC: B (bridge and open deck) 2)
EAC Product family certification
Solid-state drive
Capacity 1024 GB
Data reliability Max. 1 unrecoverable error per 1015 bits read
MTBF Min. 3,000,000 h (at 25°C)
S.M.A.R.T. support Yes
Interface SATA
Servicing None
Continuous reading Max. 520 MB/s
Continuous writing Max. 450 MB/s
IOPS 3)
4k read Max. 75,000 (random)
4k write Max. 78,000 (random)
Endurance
MLC flash memory Yes
Data volume
Theoretical 3072 TBW 4)
Client workload 1172 TBW 5)
Compatibility SATA 3.1 compliant
ACS-2
SSD Enhanced SMART ATA feature set
Native Command Queuing (NCQ)

Panel PC 900 (Skylake) User's manual V 1.10 143

Technical data
Order number 5AC901.CSSD-07
Operating conditions
Pollution degree per EN 61131-2 Pollution degree 2
Ambient conditions
Temperature
Operation -40 to 85°C
Storage -55 to 95°C
Transport -55 to 95°C
Relative humidity
Operation 10 to 95%, non-condensing
Storage 10 to 95%, non-condensing
Transport 10 to 95%, non-condensing
Vibration
Operation 10 to 2000 Hz: 20 g
Storage 10 to 2000 Hz: 20 g
Transport 10 to 2000 Hz: 20 g
Shock
Operation 1500 g, 0.5 ms
Storage 1500 g, 0.5 ms
Transport 1500 g, 0.5 ms
Mechanical properties
Installation Permanent 6)
Dimensions
Width 13 mm
Height 98 mm
Depth 105 mm
Weight Approx. 130 g
Vendor information
Manufacturer Innodisk
Manufacturer's product ID 2.5" SATA SSD 3MV2-P 1 TB
1) Yes, but applies only if all components installed in the complete system have this certification and the complete system bears the corresponding mark.
2) Yes, but applies only if all components installed in the complete system have this certification and are listed on the associated DNV GL certificate for the
product family.
3) IOPS: Random read and write input/output operations per second
4) TBW = Terabytes written
5) Client workload per JEDEC JESD219 standard.
6) Slide-in compact installation.

4.2.9.6.4 Temperature/Humidity diagram

5AC901.CSSD-07 ≤ Rev. C0
RH [%]
100
95
90

80

70

60

50 (2) (1)
40

30

20

10
5
0 T [°C]
-80 -70 -60 -50 -40 -30 -20 -10 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100

Diagram legend
(1) Operation T [°C] Temperature in °C
(2) Storage and transport RH [%] Relative humidity (RH) in percent and non-condensing

144 Panel PC 900 (Skylake) User's manual V 1.10

 Technical data

4.2.9.7 5MMSSD.0060-01

4.2.9.7.1 General information

This 60 GB solid-state drive (SSD) drive can be used as a replacement part or accessory. The SSD is based on
Multi Level Cell (MLC) technology.
• Replacement for 5AC801.SSDI-03 or 5AC901.CSSD-03 SSD drives
• Accessory for the APC510 (optional SSD for I/O board)

4.2.9.7.2 Order data

Order number Short description Figure

Drives
5MMSSD.0060-01 60 GB SSD MLC - Intel - SATA

Table 86: 5MMSSD.0060-01 - Order data

4.2.9.7.3 Technical data

Caution!
A sudden power failure can result in data loss! In very rare cases, the mass storage device may also
be damaged!
The preventive use of a UPS is therefore recommended.

Information:
The following specified characteristic data, features and limit values are only valid for this accessory
and may differ from those of the complete system. The data specified for the complete system applies
to the complete system in which this accessory is installed, for example.
Order number 5MMSSD.0060-01
Revision C0 D0 E0
General information
Certifications
CE Yes
UL cULus E115267
Industrial control equipment
HazLoc cULus HazLoc E180196
Industrial control equipment
for hazardous locations
Class I, Division 2, Groups ABCD1)
Solid-state drive
Capacity 60 GB
Data reliability Max. 1 unrecoverable error per 1015 bits read
MTBF Min. 1,500,000 h
S.M.A.R.T. support Yes
Interface SATA
Servicing None
Continuous reading Max. 510 MB/s
Continuous writing Max. 430 MB/s
IOPS 2)
4k read Max. 50,000 (random)
4k write Max. 25,000 (random)

Table 87: 5MMSSD.0060-01, 5MMSSD.0060-01, 5MMSSD.0060-01 - Technical data

Panel PC 900 (Skylake) User's manual V 1.10 145

Technical data
Order number 5MMSSD.0060-01
Revision C0 D0 E0
Endurance
MLC flash memory Yes
Data volume
Theoretical 192 TBW 3)
Client workload 35 TBW 4) 47 TBW 4)
Compatibility SATA 3.0 compliant
ACS-2
SSD Enhanced SMART ATA feature set
Native Command Queuing (NCQ)
Operating conditions
Pollution degree per EN 61131-2 Pollution degree 2
Ambient conditions
Temperature
Operation 0 to 70°C -30 to 85°C -40 to 85°C
Storage -40 to 85°C
Transport -40 to 85°C
Relative humidity
Operation 8 to 90%, non-condensing 5 to 90%, non-condensing
Storage 8 to 95%, non-condensing 5 to 95%, non-condensing
Transport 8 to 95%, non-condensing 5 to 95%, non-condensing
Vibration
Operation 10 to 2000 Hz: 20 g
Storage 10 to 2000 Hz: 20 g
Transport 10 to 2000 Hz: 20 g
Shock
Operation 1500 g, 0.5 ms
Storage 1500 g, 0.5 ms
Transport 1500 g, 0.5 ms
Elevation
Operation -300 to 12,192 m
Storage -300 to 12,192 m
Transport -300 to 12,192 m
Mechanical properties
Dimensions
Width 9.5 mm 7 mm
Height 69 mm
Depth 100 mm
Weight 78 g
Vendor information
Manufacturer Toshiba
Manufacturer's product ID THNSNH060GBST THNSNJ060WCST THNSNJ060WCSU

Table 87: 5MMSSD.0060-01, 5MMSSD.0060-01, 5MMSSD.0060-01 - Technical data

1) Yes, but applies only if all components installed in the complete system have this certification and the complete system bears the corresponding mark.
2) IOPS: Random read and write input/output operations per second
3) TBW = Terabytes written
4) Client workload per JEDEC JESD219 standard.

4.2.9.7.4 Temperature/Humidity diagram

5MMSSD.0060-01 ≤ Rev. C0
RH [%]
100
95
90

80

70

60

50 (2) (1)
40

30

20

10 8
5
0 T [°C]
-80 -70 -60 -50 -40 -30 -20 -10 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100

Diagram legend
(1) Operation T [°C] Temperature in °C
(2) Storage and transport RH [%] Relative humidity (RH) in percent and non-condensing

146 Panel PC 900 (Skylake) User's manual V 1.10

 Technical data

5MMSSD.0060-01 Rev. D0
RH [%]
100
95
90

80

70

60

50 (2) (1)
40

30

20

10
5
0 T [°C]
-80 -70 -60 -50 -40 -30 -20 -10 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100

Diagram legend
(1) Operation T [°C] Temperature in °C
(2) Storage and transport RH [%] Relative humidity (RH) in percent and non-condensing

5MMSSD.0060-01 ≥ Rev. E0
RH [%]
100
95 (2)
90

80

70

60

50 (1)
40

30

20

10
5
0 T [°C]
-80 -70 -60 -50 -40 -30 -20 -10 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100

Diagram legend
(1) Operation T [°C] Temperature in °C
(2) Storage and transport RH [%] Relative humidity (RH) in percent and non-condensing

Panel PC 900 (Skylake) User's manual V 1.10 147

Technical data

4.2.9.8 5MMSSD.0128-01

4.2.9.8.1 General information

This 128 GB solid-state drive (SSD) drive can be used as a replacement part or accessory. The SSD is based on
Multi Level Cell (MLC) technology.
• Replacement for 5AC801.SSDI-04 or 5AC901.CSSD-04 SSD drives
• Accessory for the APC510 (optional SSD for I/O board)

4.2.9.8.2 Order data

Order number Short description Figure

Drives
5MMSSD.0128-01 128 GB SSD MLC - Innodisk - SATA

Table 88: 5MMSSD.0128-01 - Order data

4.2.9.8.3 Technical data

Caution!
A sudden power failure can result in data loss! In very rare cases, the mass storage device may also
be damaged!
The preventive use of a UPS is therefore recommended.

Information:
The following specified characteristic data, features and limit values are only valid for this accessory
and may differ from those of the complete system. The data specified for the complete system applies
to the complete system in which this accessory is installed, for example.
Order number 5MMSSD.0128-01
Revision C0 D0 E0
General information
Certifications
CE Yes
UL cULus E115267
Industrial control equipment
HazLoc cULus HazLoc E180196
Industrial control equipment
for hazardous locations
Class I, Division 2, Groups ABCD1)
Solid-state drive
Capacity 128 GB
Data reliability Max. 1 unrecoverable error per 1015 bits read
MTBF Min. 1,500,000 h
S.M.A.R.T. support Yes
Interface SATA
Servicing None
Continuous reading Max. 510 MB/s
Continuous writing Max. 450 MB/s
IOPS 2)
4k read Max. 85,000 (random)
4k write Max. 35,000 (random)

Table 89: 5MMSSD.0128-01, 5MMSSD.0128-01, 5MMSSD.0128-01 - Technical data

148 Panel PC 900 (Skylake) User's manual V 1.10

 Technical data
Order number 5MMSSD.0128-01
Revision C0 D0 E0
Endurance
MLC flash memory Yes
Data volume
Theoretical 384 TBW 3)
Client workload 74 TBW 4) 100 TBW 4)
Compatibility SATA 3.0 compliant
ACS-2
SSD Enhanced SMART ATA feature set
Native Command Queuing (NCQ)
Operating conditions
Pollution degree per EN 61131-2 Pollution degree 2
Ambient conditions
Temperature
Operation 0 to 70°C -30 to 85°C -40 to 85°C
Storage -40 to 85°C
Transport -40 to 85°C
Relative humidity
Operation 8 to 90%, non-condensing 5 to 90%, non-condensing
Storage 8 to 95%, non-condensing 5 to 95%, non-condensing
Transport 8 to 95%, non-condensing 5 to 95%, non-condensing
Vibration
Operation 10 to 2000 Hz: 20 g
Storage 10 to 2000 Hz: 20 g
Transport 10 to 2000 Hz: 20 g
Shock
Operation 1500 g, 0.5 ms
Storage 1500 g, 0.5 ms
Transport 1500 g, 0.5 ms
Elevation
Operation -300 to 12,192 m
Storage -300 to 12,192 m
Transport -300 to 12,192 m
Mechanical properties
Dimensions
Width 9.5 mm 7 mm
Height 69 mm
Depth 100 mm
Weight 78 g
Vendor information
Manufacturer Toshiba
Manufacturer's product ID THNSNH128GBST THNSNJ128WCST THNSNJ128WCSU

Table 89: 5MMSSD.0128-01, 5MMSSD.0128-01, 5MMSSD.0128-01 - Technical data

1) Yes, but applies only if all components installed in the complete system have this certification and the complete system bears the corresponding mark.
2) IOPS: Random read and write input/output operations per second
3) TBW = Terabytes written
4) Client workload per JEDEC JESD219 standard.

4.2.9.8.4 Temperature/Humidity diagram

5MMSSD.0128-01 ≤ Rev. C0
RH [%]
100
95
90

80

70

60

50 (2) (1)
40

30

20

10 8
5
0 T [°C]
-80 -70 -60 -50 -40 -30 -20 -10 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100

Diagram legend
(1) Operation T [°C] Temperature in °C
(2) Storage and transport RH [%] Relative humidity (RH) in percent and non-condensing

Panel PC 900 (Skylake) User's manual V 1.10 149

Technical data

5MMSSD.0128-01 Rev. D0
RH [%]
100
95
90

80

70

60

50 (2) (1)
40

30

20

10
5
0 T [°C]
-80 -70 -60 -50 -40 -30 -20 -10 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100

Diagram legend
(1) Operation T [°C] Temperature in °C
(2) Storage and transport RH [%] Relative humidity (RH) in percent and non-condensing

5MMSSD.0128-01 ≥ Rev. E0
RH [%]
100
95 (2)
90

80

70

60

50 (1)
40

30

20

10
5
0 T [°C]
-80 -70 -60 -50 -40 -30 -20 -10 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100

Diagram legend
(1) Operation T [°C] Temperature in °C
(2) Storage and transport RH [%] Relative humidity (RH) in percent and non-condensing

150 Panel PC 900 (Skylake) User's manual V 1.10

 Technical data

4.2.9.9 5MMSSD.0256-00

4.2.9.9.1 General information

This 256 GB solid-state drive (SSD) drive can be used as a replacement part or accessory. The SSD is based on
Multi Level Cell (MLC) technology.
• Replacement for 5AC801.SSDI-05 or 5AC901.CSSD-05 SSD drives
• Accessory for the APC510 (optional SSD for I/O board)

4.2.9.9.2 Order data

Order number Short description Figure

Drives
5MMSSD.0256-00 256 GB SSD MLC - Innodisk - SATA

Table 90: 5MMSSD.0256-00 - Order data

4.2.9.9.3 Technical data

Caution!
A sudden power failure can result in data loss! In very rare cases, the mass storage device may also
be damaged!
The preventive use of a UPS is therefore recommended.

Information:
The following specified characteristic data, features and limit values are only valid for this accessory
and may differ from those of the complete system. The data specified for the complete system applies
to the complete system in which this accessory is installed, for example.
Order number 5MMSSD.0256-00
Revision C0 D0
General information
Certifications
CE Yes
UL cULus E115267
Industrial control equipment
HazLoc cULus HazLoc E180196
Industrial control equipment
for hazardous locations
Class I, Division 2, Groups ABCD1)
Solid-state drive
Capacity 256 GB
Data reliability Max. 1 unrecoverable error per 1015 bits read
MTBF Min. 1,500,000 h
S.M.A.R.T. support Yes
Interface SATA
Servicing None
Continuous reading Max. 510 MB/s
Continuous writing Max. 460 MB/s
IOPS 2)
4k read Max. 90,000 (random)
4k write Max. 35,000 (random)

Table 91: 5MMSSD.0256-00, 5MMSSD.0256-00 - Technical data

Panel PC 900 (Skylake) User's manual V 1.10 151

Technical data
Order number 5MMSSD.0256-00
Revision C0 D0
Endurance
MLC flash memory Yes
Data volume
Theoretical 768 TBW 3)
Client workload 148 TBW 4) 200 TBW 4)
Compatibility SATA 3.0 compliant
ACS-2
SSD Enhanced SMART ATA feature set
Native Command Queuing (NCQ)
Operating conditions
Pollution degree per EN 61131-2 Pollution degree 2
Ambient conditions
Temperature
Operation -30 to 85°C -40 to 85°C
Storage -40 to 85°C
Transport -40 to 85°C
Relative humidity
Operation 5 to 90%, non-condensing
Storage 5 to 95%, non-condensing
Transport 5 to 95%, non-condensing
Vibration
Operation 10 to 2000 Hz: 20 g
Storage 10 to 2000 Hz: 20 g
Transport 10 to 2000 Hz: 20 g
Shock
Operation 1500 g, 0.5 ms
Storage 1500 g, 0.5 ms
Transport 1500 g, 0.5 ms
Elevation
Operation -300 to 12,192 m
Storage -300 to 12,192 m
Transport -300 to 12,192 m
Mechanical properties
Dimensions
Width 7 mm
Height 69 mm
Depth 100 mm
Weight 78 g
Vendor information
Manufacturer Toshiba
Manufacturer's product ID THNSNJ256WCST THNSNJ256WCSU

Table 91: 5MMSSD.0256-00, 5MMSSD.0256-00 - Technical data

1) Yes, but applies only if all components installed in the complete system have this certification and the complete system bears the corresponding mark.
2) IOPS: Random read and write input/output operations per second
3) TBW = Terabytes written
4) Client workload per JEDEC JESD219 standard.

4.2.9.9.4 Temperature/Humidity diagram

5MMSSD.0256-00 ≤ Rev. C0
RH [%]
100
95
90

80

70

60

50 (2) (1)
40

30

20

10
5
0 T [°C]
-80 -70 -60 -50 -40 -30 -20 -10 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100

Diagram legend
(1) Operation T [°C] Temperature in °C
(2) Storage and transport RH [%] Relative humidity (RH) in percent and non-condensing

152 Panel PC 900 (Skylake) User's manual V 1.10

 Technical data

5MMSSD.0256-00 ≤ Rev. D0
RH [%]
100
95 (2)
90

80

70

60

50 (1)
40

30

20

10
5
0 T [°C]
-80 -70 -60 -50 -40 -30 -20 -10 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100

Diagram legend
(1) Operation T [°C] Temperature in °C
(2) Storage and transport RH [%] Relative humidity (RH) in percent and non-condensing

Panel PC 900 (Skylake) User's manual V 1.10 153

Technical data

4.2.9.10 5MMSSD.0512-00

4.2.9.10.1 General information

This 512 GB solid-state drive (SSD) drive can be used as a replacement part or accessory. The SSD is based on
Multi Level Cell (MLC) technology.
• Replacement for the SSD drive 5AC901.CSSD-06

4.2.9.10.2 Order data

Order number Short description Figure

Drives
5MMSSD.0512-00 512 GB SSD MLC - Innodisk - SATA

Table 92: 5MMSSD.0512-00 - Order data

4.2.9.10.3 Technical data up to Rev. C0

Order number 5MMSSD.0512-00

General information
Certifications
CE Yes
UL cULus E115267
Industrial control equipment
HazLoc cULus HazLoc E180196
Industrial control equipment
for hazardous locations
Class I, Division 2, Groups ABCD1)
Solid-state drive
Capacity 512 GB
Data reliability Max. 1 unrecoverable error per 1015 bits read
MTBF Min. 1,500,000 h
S.M.A.R.T. support Yes
Interface SATA
Servicing None
Continuous reading Max. 510 MB/s
Continuous writing Max. 460 MB/s
IOPS 2)
4k read Max. 90,000 (random)
4k write Max. 35,000 (random)
Endurance
MLC flash memory Yes
Data volume
Theoretical 1536 TBW 3)
Client workload 400 TBW 4)
Compatibility SATA 3.1 compliant
ACS-2
SSD Enhanced SMART ATA feature set
Native Command Queuing (NCQ)
Operating conditions
Pollution degree per EN 61131-2 Pollution degree 2
Ambient conditions
Temperature
Operation -40 to 85°C
Storage -40 to 85°C
Transport -40 to 85°C
Relative humidity
Operation 5 to 90%, non-condensing
Storage 5 to 95%, non-condensing
Transport 5 to 95%, non-condensing

154 Panel PC 900 (Skylake) User's manual V 1.10

 Technical data
Order number 5MMSSD.0512-00
Vibration
Operation 10 to 2000 Hz: 20 g
Storage 10 to 2000 Hz: 20 g
Transport 10 to 2000 Hz: 20 g
Shock
Operation 1500 g, 0.5 ms
Storage 1500 g, 0.5 ms
Transport 1500 g, 0.5 ms
Mechanical properties
Dimensions
Width 7 mm
Height 69 mm
Depth 100 mm
Weight 78 g
Vendor information
Manufacturer Toshiba
Manufacturer's product ID THNSNJ512WCSU
1) Yes, but applies only if all components installed in the complete system have this certification and the complete system bears the corresponding mark.
2) IOPS: Random read and write input/output operations per second
3) TBW = Terabytes written
4) Client workload per JEDEC JESD219 standard.

4.2.9.10.4 Temperature/Humidity diagram

5MMSSD.0512-00 ≤ Rev. C0
RH [%]
100
95
90

80

70

60

50 (2) (1)
40

30

20

10
5
0 T [°C]
-80 -70 -60 -50 -40 -30 -20 -10 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100

Diagram legend
(1) Operation T [°C] Temperature in °C
(2) Storage and transport RH [%] Relative humidity (RH) in percent and non-condensing

Panel PC 900 (Skylake) User's manual V 1.10 155

Technical data

4.2.9.11 5MMSSD.1024-00

4.2.9.11.1 General information

This 1 TB solid-state drive (SSD) drive can be used as a replacement part. The SSD is based on multi-level cell
(MLC) technology.
• Replacement drive for 5AC901.CSSD-C00 SSD drive

4.2.9.11.2 Order data

Order number Short description Figure

Drives
5MMSSD.1024-00 1 TB SSD MLC - Innodisk - SATA

Table 94: 5MMSSD.1024-00 - Order data

4.2.9.11.3 Technical data

Caution!
A sudden power failure can result in data loss! In very rare cases, the mass storage device may also
be damaged!
The preventive use of a UPS is therefore recommended.

Information:
The following specified characteristic data, features and limit values are only valid for this accessory
and may differ from those of the complete system. The data specified for the complete system applies
to the complete system in which this accessory is installed, for example.
Order number 5MMSSD.1024-00
General information
Certifications
CE Yes
UL cULus E115267
Industrial control equipment
HazLoc cULus HazLoc E180196
Industrial control equipment
for hazardous locations
Class I, Division 2, Groups ABCD1)
Solid-state drive
Capacity 1024 GB
Data reliability Max. 1 unrecoverable error per 1015 bits read
MTBF Min. 1,500,000 h
S.M.A.R.T. support Yes
Interface SATA
Servicing None
Continuous reading Max. 520 MB/s
Continuous writing Max. 460 MB/s
IOPS 2)
4k read Max. 75,000 (random)
4k write Max. 75,000 (random)
Endurance
MLC flash memory Yes

Table 95: 5MMSSD.1024-00 - Technical data

156 Panel PC 900 (Skylake) User's manual V 1.10

 Technical data
Order number 5MMSSD.1024-00
Data volume
Theoretical 3072 TBW 3)
Client workload 1172 TBW 4)
Compatibility SATA 3.0 compliant
ACS-2
SSD Enhanced SMART ATA feature set
Native Command Queuing (NCQ)
Ambient conditions
Temperature
Operation 0 to 70°C
Storage -40 to 85°C
Transport -40 to 85°C
Relative humidity
Operation 0 to 95%, non-condensing
Storage 0 to 95%, non-condensing
Transport 0 to 95%, non-condensing
Vibration
Operation 5 to 800 Hz: 5 g
Storage 5 to 800 Hz: 20 g
Transport 5 to 800 Hz: 20 g
Shock
Operation 1500 g, 0.5 ms
Storage 1500 g, 0.5 ms
Transport 1500 g, 0.5 ms
Elevation
Operation -300 to 12,192 m
Storage -300 to 12,192 m
Transport -300 to 12,192 m
Mechanical properties
Dimensions
Width 7 mm
Height 69 mm
Depth 100 mm
Weight 58 g
Vendor information
Manufacturer Transcend
Manufacturer's product ID TS1TSSD370S

Table 95: 5MMSSD.1024-00 - Technical data

1) Yes, but applies only if all components installed in the complete system have this certification and the complete system bears the corresponding mark.
2) IOPS: Random read and write input/output operations per second
3) TBW = Terabytes written
4) Client workload per JEDEC JESD219 standard.

4.2.9.11.4 Temperature/Humidity diagram

5MMSSD.1024-00 ≤ Rev. C0
RH [%]
100
95
90

80

70

60

50 (2) (1)
40

30

20

10
5
0 T [°C]
-80 -70 -60 -50 -40 -30 -20 -10 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100

Diagram legend
(1) Operation T [°C] Temperature in °C
(2) Storage and transport RH [%] Relative humidity (RH) in percent and non-condensing

Panel PC 900 (Skylake) User's manual V 1.10 157

Technical data

4.2.9.12 5AC901.CHDD-99

4.2.9.12.1 General information

The slide-in compact kit can be used as a replacement part for the slide-in compact drives (HDD/SSD). It consists
of a removal strip, plastic guide rails and the necessary screws.

Information:
If this slide-in compact kit is used with components not approved by B&R (HDD/SSD), B&R cannot
guarantee its fit, form and function. In addition, B&R cannot guarantee compliance with the specifica-
tions, standards and certifications applicable to this device.

4.2.9.12.2 Order data

Order number Short description Figure

Drives
5AC901.CHDD-99 Slide-in compact kit

Table 96: 5AC901.CHDD-99 - Order data

158 Panel PC 900 (Skylake) User's manual V 1.10

 Technical data

4.2.9.13 5AC901.CCFA-00

4.2.9.13.1 General information

This CFast adapter is a slide-in compact adapter that allows a CFast card to be inserted and operated on a B&R
industrial PC. The CFast adapter can be used in APC910 and PPC900 system units.
• CFast slot
• Slide-in compact

4.2.9.13.2 Order data

Order number Short description Figure

Drives
5AC901.CCFA-00 CFast adapter - For slide-in compact slot
Optional accessories
CFast cards
5CFAST.016G-00 CFast 16 GB SLC
5CFAST.032G-00 CFast 32 GB SLC
5CFAST.032G-10 CFast 32 GB MLC
5CFAST.064G-10 CFast 64 GB MLC
5CFAST.128G-10 CFast 128 GB MLC
5CFAST.2048-00 CFast 2 GB SLC
5CFAST.256G-10 CFast 256 GB MLC
5CFAST.4096-00 CFast 4 GB SLC
5CFAST.8192-00 CFast 8 GB SLC

Table 97: 5AC901.CCFA-00 - Order data

4.2.9.13.3 Technical data

Information:
The following specified characteristic data, features and limit values are only valid for this accessory
and may differ from those of the complete system. The data specified for the complete system applies
to the complete system in which this accessory is installed, for example.
Order number 5AC901.CCFA-00
General information
Certifications
CE Yes
UL cULus E115267
Industrial control equipment
HazLoc cULus HazLoc E180196
Industrial control equipment
for hazardous locations
Class I, Division 2, Groups ABCD, T3C 1)
EAC Product family certification
Interfaces
CFast slot
Quantity 1
Operating conditions
Pollution degree per EN 61131-2 Pollution degree 2
Ambient conditions
Temperature
Operation Depends on the CFast card being used
Storage Depends on the CFast card being used
Transport Depends on the CFast card being used
Relative humidity
Operation Depends on the CFast card being used
Storage Depends on the CFast card being used
Transport Depends on the CFast card being used

Table 98: 5AC901.CCFA-00 - Technical data

1) Yes, although applies only if all components installed within the complete system have this certification and the complete system itself carries the corresponding
mark.

Panel PC 900 (Skylake) User's manual V 1.10 159

Technical data

4.2.9.14 5AC901.SDVW-00

4.2.9.14.1 General information

The DVD-R/RW slide-in drive can be used in APC910 system units and PPC900 bus units with a slide-in drive slot.
• DVD-R/RW, DVD+R/RW drive
• Slide-in

4.2.9.14.2 Order data

Order number Short description Figure

Drives
5AC901.SDVW-00 DVD drive - DVD-R/RW|DVD+R/RW - Slide-in

Table 99: 5AC901.SDVW-00 - Order data

4.2.9.14.3 Technical data

Caution!
A sudden power failure can result in data loss! In very rare cases, the mass storage device may also
be damaged!
The preventive use of a UPS is therefore recommended.

Information:
The following specified characteristic data, features and limit values are only valid for this accessory
and may differ from those of the complete system. The data specified for the complete system applies
to the complete system in which this accessory is installed, for example.
Order number 5AC901.SDVW-00
General information
Certifications
CE Yes
UL cULus E115267
Industrial control equipment
HazLoc cULus HazLoc E180196
Industrial control equipment
for hazardous locations
Class I, Division 2, Groups ABCD, T3C 1)
DNV GL Temperature: B (0 - 55°C)
Humidity: B (up to 100%)
Vibration: A (0.7 g)
EMC: B (bridge and open deck) 2)
EAC Product family certification
CD/DVD drive
Data buffer capacity 2 MB
Data transfer rate Max. 33.3 MB/s
Speed Max. 5160 rpm ±1%
Noise level Approx. 45 dBA at a distance of 50 cm (full read access)
Compatible formats CD-DA, CD-ROM mode 1/ mode 2
CD-ROM XA mode 2 (form 1, form 2)
Photo CD (single-/multi-session), Enhanced CD, CD text
DVD-ROM, DVD-R, DVD-R (dual layer), DVD-RW, DVD-Video
DVD-RAM (4.7 GB, 2.6 GB)
DVD+R, DVD+R (dual layer), DVD+RW
Laser class Class 1 laser
Service life 60,000 POH (power-on hours)
Interface SATA
Startup time
CD Max. 14 seconds (from 0 rpm to read operation)
DVD Max. 15 seconds (from 0 rpm to read operation)

Table 100: 5AC901.SDVW-00 - Technical data

160 Panel PC 900 (Skylake) User's manual V 1.10

 Technical data
Order number 5AC901.SDVW-00
Access time
CD On average 140 ms (24x)
DVD On average 150 ms (8x)
Readable media
CD CD/CD-ROM (12 cm, 8 cm), CD-R, CD-RW
DVD DVD-ROM, DVD-R, DVD-R (dual layer), DVD-RW. DVD-
RAM, DVD+R, DVD+R (dual layer), DVD+RW, DVD-RAM
Writable media
CD CD-R, CD-RW
DVD DVD-R/RW, DVD-R (dual layer), DVD-RAM (4.7 GB), DVD+R/RW, DVD+R (dual layer)
Read speed
CD 24x
DVD 8x
Write speed
CD-R 24x, 16x, 10x and 4x
CD-RW 24x, 16x, 10x and 4x
DVD+R 8x, 4x and 2.4x
DVD+R (dual layer) 6x, 4x and 2.4x
DVD+RW 4x and 2x
DVD-R 8x, 4x and 2x
DVD-R (dual layer) 6x, 4x and 2x
DVD-RAM 3) 5x, 3x and 2x
DVD-RW 6x, 4x and 2x
Write methods
CD Disk at once, session at once, packet write, track at once
DVD Disk at once, incremental, overwrite, sequential, multi-session
Operating conditions
Pollution degree per EN 61131-2 Pollution degree 2
Ambient conditions
Temperature 4)
Operation 5 to 55°C 5)
Storage -20 to 60°C
Transport -40 to 65°C
Relative humidity
Operation 8 to 80%, non-condensing
Storage 5 to 95%, non-condensing
Transport 5 to 95%, non-condensing
Vibration
Operation 5 to 500 Hz: 0.2 g
Storage 5 to 500 Hz: 2 g
Transport 5 to 500 Hz: 2 g
Shock
Operation At max. 5 g and 11 ms duration
Storage At max. 60 g and 11 ms duration
At max. 200 g and 2 ms duration
Transport At max. 60 g and 11 ms duration
At max. 200 g and 2 ms duration
Mechanical properties
Dimensions
Width 22 mm
Height 172.5 mm
Depth 150 mm
Weight 400 g

Table 100: 5AC901.SDVW-00 - Technical data

1) Yes, but applies only if all components installed in the complete system have this certification and the complete system bears the corresponding mark.
2) Yes, but applies only if all components installed in the complete system have this certification and are listed on the associated DNV GL certificate for the
product family.
3) RAM drivers are not provided by the manufacturer. Support for the RAM function by burning software packages or drivers from third-party suppliers.
4) The temperature specifications correspond to a specification at 500 meters. The max. ambient temperature is typically derated 1°C per 1000 meters starting
at 500 m above sea level.
5) Surface temperature of drive.

Panel PC 900 (Skylake) User's manual V 1.10 161

Technical data

4.2.9.14.4 Temperature/Humidity diagram

RH [%]
100
95
90

80

70

60

50
(3) (2)
40
(1)
30

20

10
5
0 T [°C]
-80 -70 -60 -50 -40 -30 -20 -10 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100

Diagram legend
(1) Operation T [°C] Temperature in °C
(2) Storage
RH [%] Relative humidity (RH) in percent and non-condensing
(3) Transport

162 Panel PC 900 (Skylake) User's manual V 1.10

 Technical data

4.2.9.15 5AC901.SSCA-00

4.2.9.15.1 General information

The slide-in compact adapter is a slide-in adapter that allows a slide-in compact drive to be installed and operated
on a B&R industrial PC. The slide-in compact adapter can be used in APC910 system units and PPC900 bus units.
• Slide-in compact slot
• Slide-in

4.2.9.15.2 Order data

Order number Short description Figure

Drives
5AC901.SSCA-00 Slide-in compact adapter - For slide-in compact drives
Optional accessories
Drives
5AC901.CCFA-00 CFast adapter - For slide-in compact slot
5AC901.CHDD-01 500 GB hard disk - Slide-in compact - SATA
5AC901.CSSD-00 32 GB SSD SLC - Slide-in compact - SATA
5AC901.CSSD-03 60 GB SSD MLC - Slide-in compact - Innodisk - SATA
5AC901.CSSD-04 128 GB SSD MLC - Slide-in compact - Innodisk - SATA
5AC901.CSSD-05 256 GB SSD MLC - Slide-in compact - Innodisk - SATA
5AC901.CSSD-06 512 GB SSD MLC - Slide-in compact - Innodisk - SATA
5AC901.CSSD-07 1 TB SSD MLC - Slide-in compact - Innodisk - SATA
5AC901.CSSD-C02 60 GB SSD MLC - Slide-in compact - SATA - Customized -

Table 101: 5AC901.SSCA-00 - Order data

4.2.9.15.3 Technical data

Caution!
A sudden power failure can result in data loss! In very rare cases, the mass storage device may also
be damaged!
The preventive use of a UPS is therefore recommended.

Information:
The following specified characteristic data, features and limit values are only valid for this accessory
and may differ from those of the complete system. The data specified for the complete system applies
to the complete system in which this accessory is installed, for example.
Order number 5AC901.SSCA-00
General information
Certifications
CE Yes
UL cULus E115267
Industrial control equipment
HazLoc cULus HazLoc E180196
Industrial control equipment
for hazardous locations
Class I, Division 2, Groups ABCD, T3C 1)
DNV GL Temperature: B (0 - 55°C)
Humidity: B (up to 100%)
Vibration: A (0.7 g)
EMC: B (bridge and open deck) 2)
EAC Product family certification
Slots
Slide-in compact drives 1
Operating conditions
Pollution degree per EN 61131-2 Pollution degree 2
Ambient conditions
Temperature
Operation Depends on the slide-in compact drive being used
Storage Depends on the slide-in compact drive being used
Transport Depends on the slide-in compact drive being used

Table 102: 5AC901.SSCA-00 - Technical data

Panel PC 900 (Skylake) User's manual V 1.10 163

Technical data
Order number 5AC901.SSCA-00
Relative humidity
Operation Depends on the slide-in compact drive being used
Storage Depends on the slide-in compact drive being used
Transport Depends on the slide-in compact drive being used

Table 102: 5AC901.SSCA-00 - Technical data

1) Yes, although applies only if all components installed in the complete system have this certification and the complete system bears the corresponding mark.
2) Yes, although applies only if all components installed in the complete system have this certification and are listed on the associated DNV GL certificate for
the product family.

164 Panel PC 900 (Skylake) User's manual V 1.10

 Technical data

4.2.10 Interface options

4.2.10.1 5AC901.I232-00

4.2.10.1.1 General information

Interface option 5AC901.I232-00 is equipped with an RS232 interface.

• 1x RS232 interface
• Compatible with APC910/PPC900 and APC3100/PPC3100

4.2.10.1.2 Order data

Order number Short description Figure

Interface options
5AC901.I232-00 Interface card - 1x RS232 interface - For APC910/PPC900/
APC3100/PPC3100

4.2.10.1.3 Technical data

Information:
The following specified characteristic data, features and limit values are only valid for this accessory
and may differ from those of the complete system. The data specified for the complete system applies
to the complete system in which this accessory is installed, for example.
Order number 5AC901.I232-00
General information
B&R ID code 0xF400
Certifications
CE Yes
UL cULus E115267
Industrial control equipment
EAC Product family certification
Interfaces
COM
Type RS232, modem supported, not galvanically isolated
Variant DSUB, 9-pin, male
UART 16550-compatible, 16-byte FIFO buffer
Max. baud rate 115 kbit/s
Electrical properties
Power consumption 1W
Operating conditions
Pollution degree per EN 61131-2 Pollution degree 2
Ambient conditions
Temperature
Operation 0 to 60°C 1)
Storage -20 to 60°C
Transport -20 to 60°C
Relative humidity
Operation 5 to 90%, non-condensing
Storage 5 to 95%, non-condensing
Transport 5 to 95%, non-condensing
Mechanical properties
Weight Approx. 30 g
1) For detailed information, see the temperature tables in the user's manual.

Panel PC 900 (Skylake) User's manual V 1.10 165

Technical data

4.2.10.1.3.1 Pinout
Serial interface COM1)
RS232
Variant DSUB, 9-pin, male
Type RS232, modem supported
UART 16550-compatible,
16-byte FIFO buffer
Galvanic isolation No
Transfer rate Max. 115 kbit/s
Bus length Max. 15 m 1
Pin Pinout 6
1 DCD
9
2 RXD 5
3 TXD
4 DTR
5 GND
6 DSR
7 RTS
8 CTS
9 RI
1) The interfaces, etc. available on the device or module have been numbered for the purpose of clear differentiation. This numbering may deviate from the
numbering used by the respective operating system, however.

4.2.10.1.3.2 I/O address and IRQ

When operated in the PPC900:

Slot I/O address IRQ
IF option 1 (COM E) 2E8h - 2EFh 10
IF option 2 (COM F) 228h - 22Fh 7

4.2.10.1.3.3 Cable data

For more detailed information about the transfer rate, bus length or cable requirements for the respective inter-
faces/buses, see "Cable data" on page 337.

166 Panel PC 900 (Skylake) User's manual V 1.10

 Technical data

4.2.10.2 5AC901.I485-00

4.2.10.2.1 General information

Interface option 5AC901.I485-00 is equipped with an RS232/RS422/RS485 interface. The operating mode (RS232/
RS422/RS485) is selected automatically depending on the electrical connection.
• 1x RS232/RS422/RS485 interface
• Compatible with APC910/PPC900 and APC3100/PPC3100

4.2.10.2.2 Order data

Order number Short description Figure

Interface options
5AC901.I485-00 Interface card - 1x RS232/RS422/RS485 interface - For
APC910/PPC900/APC3100/PPC3100

4.2.10.2.3 Technical data

Information:
The following specified characteristic data, features and limit values are only valid for this accessory
and may differ from those of the complete system. The data specified for the complete system applies
to the complete system in which this accessory is installed, for example.
Order number 5AC901.I485-00
General information
B&R ID code 0xD84A
Certifications
CE Yes
UL cULus E115267
Industrial control equipment
HazLoc cULus HazLoc E180196
Industrial control equipment
for hazardous locations
Class I, Division 2, Groups ABCD, T4 1)
DNV GL Temperature: B (0 - 55°C)
Humidity: B (up to 100%)
Vibration: A (0.7 g)
EMC: B (bridge and open deck) 2)
EAC Product family certification
Interfaces
COM
Type RS232/RS422/RS485, galvanically isolated
Variant DSUB, 9-pin, male
UART 16550-compatible, 16-byte FIFO buffer
Max. baud rate 115 kbit/s
Terminating resistor
Type Can be switched on and off with slide switch
Default setting Off
Electrical properties
Power consumption 1W
Operating conditions
Pollution degree per EN 61131-2 Pollution degree 2
Ambient conditions
Temperature
Operation 0 to 55°C 3)
Storage -20 to 60°C
Transport -20 to 60°C

Panel PC 900 (Skylake) User's manual V 1.10 167

Technical data
Order number 5AC901.I485-00
Relative humidity
Operation 5 to 90%, non-condensing
Storage 5 to 95%, non-condensing
Transport 5 to 95%, non-condensing
Mechanical properties
Weight Approx. 34 g
1) Yes, but applies only if all components installed in the complete system have this certification and the complete system bears the corresponding mark.
2) Yes, but applies only if all components installed in the complete system have this certification and are listed on the associated DNV GL certificate for the
product family.
3) For detailed information, see the temperature tables in the user's manual.

4.2.10.2.3.1 Pinout
Serial interface COM
RS232 RS422/485
Variant DSUB, 9-pin, male
Type RS232, not modem supported
UART 16550-compatible, 16-byte FIFO buffer
Galvanic isolation Yes
Transfer rate Max. 115 kbit/s
Bus length Max. 15 m Max. 1200 m
Pin RS232 - Pinout RS422 - Pinout 1
6
1 NC.1) TXD\
2 RXD NC. 9
3 TXD NC. 5
4 NC. TXD
5 GND GND
6 NC. RXD\
7 RTS NC.
8 CTS NC.
9 NC. RXD
1) Not connected

4.2.10.2.3.2 I/O address and IRQ

When operated in the PPC900:

Slot I/O address IRQ
IF option 1 (COM E) 2E8h - 2EFh 10
IF option 2 (COM F) 228h - 22Fh 7

4.2.10.2.3.3 Cable data

For more detailed information about the transfer rate, bus length or cable requirements for the respective inter-
faces/buses, see "Cable data" on page 337.

168 Panel PC 900 (Skylake) User's manual V 1.10

 Technical data

4.2.10.2.3.4 Operation as RS485 interface

The pins of the RS422 default interface (1, 4, 6 and 9) must be used for operation. To do this, connect the pins
as shown.

9
RXD
DATA
4
TXD

6
RXD
DATA
1
TXD

Figure 19: RS232/RS422/RS485 interface - Operation in RS485 mode

The RTS line must be switched by the driver for each transmission or reception; switching back does not take place
automatically. This cannot be configured in Windows.
With long cable lengths, the voltage drop can result in greater potential differences between the bus devices, which
can hinder communication. This can be improved by running the ground wire with the others.
The cable ends of an RS485 bus should be terminated (at least for longer cable lengths or higher transfer rates).
Passive termination can normally be used by connecting the signal lines via a 120 Ω resistor at each of the two
bus ends; see "Terminating resistor" for the IF card.

4.2.10.2.3.5 Terminating resistor

A terminating resistor for the serial interface is already integrated in the IF option. This can be switched on or off
with a switch (1); it is necessary to open the system unit for this. A switched-on terminating resistor is indicated
by a yellow LED (2).

Panel PC 900 (Skylake) User's manual V 1.10 169

Technical data

4.2.10.3 5AC901.ICAN-00

4.2.10.3.1 General information

Interface option 5AC901.ICAN-00 is equipped with a CAN bus master interface.

• 1x CAN bus master interface
• Compatible with APC910/PPC900 and APC3100/PPC3100
Simultaneous operation of 2 interface options with a legacy CAN interface in slots IF option 1 and IF option 2 is
not possible.

4.2.10.3.2 Order data

Order number Short description Figure

Interface options
5AC901.ICAN-00 Interface card - 1x CAN interface - For APC910/PPC900/
APC3100/PPC3100

4.2.10.3.3 Technical data

Information:
The following specified characteristic data, features and limit values are only valid for this accessory
and may differ from those of the complete system. The data specified for the complete system applies
to the complete system in which this accessory is installed, for example.
Order number 5AC901.ICAN-00
General information
B&R ID code 0xD84B
Certifications
CE Yes
UL cULus E115267
Industrial control equipment
HazLoc cULus HazLoc E180196
Industrial control equipment
for hazardous locations
Class I, Division 2, Groups ABCD, T4 1)
DNV GL Temperature: B (0 - 55°C)
Humidity: B (up to 100%)
Vibration: A (0.7 g)
EMC: B (bridge and open deck) 2)
EAC Product family certification
Interfaces
CAN
Quantity 1
Controller Bosch CC770 (compatible with Intel 82527 CAN controller)
Variant DSUB, 9-pin, male, electrically isolated
Transfer rate Max. 1 Mbit/s
Terminating resistor
Type Can be switched on and off with slide switch
Default setting Off
Electrical properties
Power consumption 1W
Operating conditions
Pollution degree per EN 61131-2 Pollution degree 2
Ambient conditions
Temperature
Operation 0 to 60°C 3)
Storage -20 to 60°C
Transport -20 to 60°C

170 Panel PC 900 (Skylake) User's manual V 1.10

 Technical data
Order number 5AC901.ICAN-00
Relative humidity
Operation 5 to 90%, non-condensing
Storage 5 to 95%, non-condensing
Transport 5 to 95%, non-condensing
Mechanical properties
Weight Approx. 33 g
1) Yes, although applies only if all components installed in the complete system have this certification and the complete system bears the corresponding mark.
2) Yes, although applies only if all components installed in the complete system have this certification and are listed on the associated DNV GL certificate for
the product family.
3) For detailed information, see the temperature tables in the user's manual.

4.2.10.3.3.1 Pinout
CAN bus
Variant DSUB, 9-pin, male
Galvanic isolation Yes
Transfer rate Max. 1 Mbit/s
Bus length Max. 1000 meters
Pin Pinout
1 NC.1) 1
6
2 CAN LOW
3 GND
9
4 NC. 5
5 NC.
6 Reserved
7 CAN HIGH
8 NC.
9 NC.
1) Not connected

4.2.10.3.3.2 I/O address and IRQ

Resource Default setting Function
I/O address 384h (address register) Defines the register number to be accessed.
385h (data register) Access to the register defined in the address register.
IRQ IRQ10 Interrupt
1) Resource allocation is identical for the interface option 1 and 2 slots.

4.2.10.3.3.3 Cable data

For more detailed information about the transfer rate, bus length or cable requirements for the respective inter-
faces/buses, see "Cable data" on page 337.

4.2.10.3.3.4 CAN driver setting

The baud rate can be set either with predefined values or via the bit timing register. For additional information,
see Automation Help.
Bit timing register 1 Bit timing register 0 Baud rate
00h 14h 1000 kbit/s
80h or 00h 1Ch 500 kbit/s
81h or 01h 1Ch 250 kbit/s
83h or 03h 1Ch 125 kbit/s
84h or 04h 1Ch 100 kbit/s
89h or 09h 1Ch 50 kbit/s

4.2.10.3.3.5 Terminating resistor

A terminating resistor for the CAN interface is already integrated in the IF option. This can be switched on or off
with a switch (1); it is necessary to open the system unit for this. A switched-on terminating resistor is indicated
by a yellow LED (2).

Panel PC 900 (Skylake) User's manual V 1.10 171

Technical data

4.2.10.3.3.6 Drivers

Drivers for approved operating systems are available for download in the Downloads section of the B&R website
(www.br-automation.com) (if required and not already included in the operating system).
Approved operating systems:
• Windows 10
• Automation Runtime

172 Panel PC 900 (Skylake) User's manual V 1.10

 Technical data

4.2.10.4 5AC901.ICAN-01

4.2.10.4.1 General information

Interface option 5AC901.ICAN-01 is equipped with a CAN bus master interface.

• 1x CAN bus master interface (SJA1000)
• Compatible with APC910/PPC900 and APC3100/PPC3100
Simultaneous operation of 2 interface options with a legacy CAN interface in slots IF option 1 and IF option 2 is
not possible.

4.2.10.4.2 Order data

Order number Short description Figure

Interface options
5AC901.ICAN-01 Interface card - 1x CAN interface (SJA1000) - For APC910/
PPC900/APC3100/PPC3100

4.2.10.4.3 Technical data

Information:
The following specified characteristic data, features and limit values are only valid for this accessory
and may differ from those of the complete system. The data specified for the complete system applies
to the complete system in which this accessory is installed, for example.
Order number 5AC901.ICAN-01
General information
B&R ID code 0xD84C
Certifications
CE Yes
UL cULus E115267
Industrial control equipment
HazLoc cULus HazLoc E180196
Industrial control equipment
for hazardous locations
Class I, Division 2, Groups ABCD, T4 1)
EAC Product family certification
Interfaces
CAN
Quantity 1
Controller SJA1000
Variant DSUB, 9-pin, male, galvanically isolated
Transfer rate Max. 1 Mbit/s
Terminating resistor
Type Can be switched on and off with slide switch
Default setting Off
Electrical properties
Power consumption 0.5 W
Operating conditions
Pollution degree per EN 61131-2 Pollution degree 2
Ambient conditions
Temperature
Operation 0 to 60°C 2)
Storage -20 to 60°C
Transport -20 to 60°C
Relative humidity
Operation 5 to 90%, non-condensing
Storage 5 to 95%, non-condensing
Transport 5 to 95%, non-condensing
Mechanical properties
Weight Approx. 33 g
1) Yes, but applies only if all components installed in the complete system have this certification and the complete system bears the corresponding mark.
2) For detailed information, see the temperature tables in the user's manual.

Panel PC 900 (Skylake) User's manual V 1.10 173

Technical data

4.2.10.4.3.1 Pinout
CAN bus
Variant DSUB, 9-pin, male
Galvanic isolation Yes
Transfer rate Max. 1 Mbit/s
Bus length Max. 1000 meters
Pin Pinout
1 NC.1) 1
6
2 CAN LOW
3 GND
9
4 NC. 5
5 NC.
6 Reserved
7 CAN HIGH
8 NC.
9 NC.
1) Not connected

4.2.10.4.3.2 I/O address and IRQ

Resource Default setting Function
I/O address 384h (address register) Defines the register number to be accessed.
385h (data register) Access to the register defined in the address register.
IRQ IRQ10 Interrupt
1) Resource allocation is identical for the interface option 1 and 2 slots.

4.2.10.4.3.3 Cable data

For more detailed information about the transfer rate, bus length or cable requirements for the respective inter-
faces/buses, see "Cable data" on page 337.

4.2.10.4.3.4 CAN driver settings

The baud rate can be set either with predefined values or via the bit timing register. For additional information, see
the technical description of the B&R CAN driver.
Bit timing register 1 Bit timing register 0 Baud rate
00h 14h 1000 kbit/s
80h or 00h 1Ch 500 kbit/s
81h or 01h 1Ch 250 kbit/s
83h or 03h 1Ch 125 kbit/s
84h or 04h 1Ch 100 kbit/s
89h or 09h 1Ch 50 kbit/s

4.2.10.4.3.5 Terminating resistor

A terminating resistor for the CAN interface is already integrated in the IF option. This can be switched on or off
with a switch (1); it is necessary to open the system unit for this. A switched-on terminating resistor is indicated
by a yellow LED (2).

4.2.10.4.3.6 Drivers

Drivers for approved operating systems are available for download in the Downloads section of the B&R website
(www.br-automation.com) (if required and not already included in the operating system).
Approved operating systems:
• Windows 10
• B&R Linux

174 Panel PC 900 (Skylake) User's manual V 1.10

 Technical data

4.2.10.5 5AC901.ISRM-00

4.2.10.5.1 General information

Interface option 5AC901.ISRM-00 is equipped with 2 MB SRAM.

• 2 MB SRAM
• Compatible with APC910/PPC900 and APC3100/PPC3100
This interface option can only be operated in slot IF option 2.

4.2.10.5.2 Order data

Order number Short description Figure

Interface options
5AC901.ISRM-00 Interface card - 2 MB SRAM - For APC910/PPC900/APC3100/
PPC3100

4.2.10.5.3 Technical data

Information:
The following specified characteristic data, features and limit values are only valid for this accessory
and may differ from those of the complete system. The data specified for the complete system applies
to the complete system in which this accessory is installed, for example.
Order number 5AC901.ISRM-00
General information
B&R ID code 0xD850
Certifications
CE Yes
UL cULus E115267
Industrial control equipment
HazLoc cULus HazLoc E180196
Industrial control equipment
for hazardous locations
Class I, Division 2, Groups ABCD, T4 1)
EAC Product family certification
Controller
SRAM
Size 2 MB
Battery-backed Yes
Remanent variables in power failure mode 256 kB (for e.g. Automation Runtime, see Automation Help)
Electrical properties
Power consumption 2W
Operating conditions
Pollution degree per EN 61131-2 Pollution degree 2
Ambient conditions
Temperature
Operation 0 to 55°C 2)
Storage -20 to 60°C
Transport -20 to 60°C
Relative humidity
Operation 5 to 90%, non-condensing
Storage 5 to 95%, non-condensing
Transport 5 to 95%, non-condensing
Mechanical properties
Weight Approx. 20 g
1) Yes, but applies only if all components installed in the complete system have this certification and the complete system bears the corresponding mark.
2) For detailed information, see the temperature tables in the user's manual.

Panel PC 900 (Skylake) User's manual V 1.10 175

Technical data

4.2.10.5.3.1 Drivers
Drivers for approved operating systems are available for download in the Downloads section of the B&R website
(www.br-automation.com) (if required and not already included in the operating system).
Approved operating systems:
• Windows 10
• B&R Linux

176 Panel PC 900 (Skylake) User's manual V 1.10

 Technical data

4.2.10.6 5AC901.IPLK-00

4.2.10.6.1 General information

Interface option 5AC901.IPLK-00 is equipped with 1 POWERLINK interface and 2 MB SRAM.

• 1x POWERLINK interface managing or controlled node
• 2 MB SRAM
• Compatible with APC910/PPC900 and APC3100/PPC3100
This interface option can only be operated in slot IF option 2.

4.2.10.6.2 Order data

Order number Short description Figure

Interface options
5AC901.IPLK-00 Interface card - 1x POWERLINK interface - 2 MB SRAM - For
APC910/PPC900/APC3100/PPC3100

4.2.10.6.3 Technical data

Information:
The following specified characteristic data, features and limit values are only valid for this accessory
and may differ from those of the complete system. The data specified for the complete system applies
to the complete system in which this accessory is installed, for example.
Order number 5AC901.IPLK-00
General information
B&R ID code 0xE025
Diagnostics
Data transfer Yes, using status LED
Certifications
CE Yes
UL cULus E115267
Industrial control equipment
HazLoc cULus HazLoc E180196
Industrial control equipment
for hazardous locations
Class I, Division 2, Groups ABCD, T4 1)
DNV GL Temperature: B (0 - 55°C)
Humidity: B (up to 100%)
Vibration: A (0.7 g)
EMC: B (bridge and open deck) 2)
EAC Product family certification
Controller
SRAM
Size 2 MB
Battery-backed Yes
Remanent variables in power failure mode 256 kB
(e.g. for Automation Runtime, see Automation Help)
Interfaces
POWERLINK
Quantity 1
Type Type 4 3)
Variant Shielded RJ45
Transfer rate 100 Mbit/s
Transfer 100BASE-TX
Cable length Max. 100 m between two stations (segment length)
Electrical properties
Power consumption 1.5 W
Operating conditions
Pollution degree per EN 61131-2 Pollution degree 2
Ambient conditions
Temperature
Operation 0 to 55°C 4)
Storage -20 to 60°C
Transport -20 to 60°C

Panel PC 900 (Skylake) User's manual V 1.10 177

Technical data
Order number 5AC901.IPLK-00
Relative humidity
Operation 5 to 90%, non-condensing
Storage 5 to 95%, non-condensing
Transport 5 to 95%, non-condensing
Mechanical properties
Weight Approx. 35 g
1) Yes, although applies only if all components installed within the complete system have this certification and the complete system itself carries the corresponding
mark.
2) Yes, although applies only if all components installed in the complete system have this certification and are listed on the associated DNV GL certificate for
the product family.
3) More information is available in the Automation Studio help system (Communication - POWERLINK - General information - Hardware - IF / LS).
4) Detailed information can be found in the temperature tables in the user's manual.

4.2.10.6.3.1 Pinout
POWERLINK
Variant RJ45, female
Wiring S/STP (Cat 5e)
Cable length Max. 100 m (min. Cat 5e)
LED "Link" (a) On Active
Orange (light) Link (a connection to a POW- Blinking (data be-
ERLINK network exists) ing transferred)
(b) -
-
LED "Status/Error" (c) On Off
POWERLINK status see "LED "S/
Green/Red
E" (status/error LED)" on page 334

POWERLINK commissioning and operation

For a description of the operating modes, status and node numbers of the POWERLINK interface(s), see
"LED "S/E" (status/error LED)" on page 334.

4.2.10.6.3.2 Driver support and firmware update

The POWERLINK IF option is only supported by Automation Runtime / Automation Studio starting with the following
versions:
• AR upgrade AR H4.10
• Automation Studio V4.1.x.x

178 Panel PC 900 (Skylake) User's manual V 1.10

 Technical data

4.2.10.7 5AC901.IHDA-00

4.2.10.7.1 General information

Interface option 5AC901.IHDA-00 is equipped with an HDA sound chip with externally accessible MIC, Line IN
and Line OUT channels.
• 1x MIC
• 1x Line IN
• 1x Line OUT
• Compatible with APC910/PPC900 and APC3100/PPC3100
This interface option can only be operated in slot IF option 1.

4.2.10.7.2 Order data

Order number Short description Figure

Interface options
5AC901.IHDA-00 Interface card - 1x audio interface (1x MIC / 1x Line In / 1x OUT)
- For APC910/PPC900/APC3100/PPC3100

4.2.10.7.3 Technical data

Information:
The following specified characteristic data, features and limit values are only valid for this accessory
and may differ from those of the complete system. The data specified for the complete system applies
to the complete system in which this accessory is installed, for example.
Order number 5AC901.IHDA-00
General information
B&R ID code 0xD84E
Certifications
CE Yes
UL cULus E115267
Industrial control equipment
HazLoc cULus HazLoc E180196
Industrial control equipment
for hazardous locations
Class I, Division 2, Groups ABCD, T3C 1)
DNV GL Temperature: B (0 - 55°C)
Humidity: B (up to 100%)
Vibration: A (0.7 g)
EMC: B (bridge and open deck) 2)
EAC Product family certification
Interfaces
Audio
Type HDA sound
Controller Realtek ALC 662
Inputs Microphone, Line In
Outputs Line out
Electrical properties
Power consumption 0.4 W
Operating conditions
Pollution degree per EN 61131-2 Pollution degree 2
Ambient conditions
Temperature
Operation 0 to 55°C 3)
Storage -20 to 60°C
Transport -20 to 60°C

Panel PC 900 (Skylake) User's manual V 1.10 179

Technical data
Order number 5AC901.IHDA-00
Relative humidity
Operation 5 to 90%, non-condensing
Storage 5 to 95%, non-condensing
Transport 5 to 95%, non-condensing
Mechanical properties
Weight Approx. 21 g
1) Yes, but applies only if all components installed in the complete system have this certification and the complete system bears the corresponding mark.
2) Yes, but applies only if all components installed in the complete system have this certification and are listed on the associated DNV GL certificate for the
product family.
3) For detailed information, see the temperature tables in the user's manual.

4.2.10.7.3.1 Pinout

All interfaces are designed as 3.5-mm jack connections (female).

MIC, Line IN, Line OUT
Controller Realtek ALC 662
MIC Microphone input (mono)
Line IN Input (stereo)
Line OUT Output (stereo) for playback devices (e.g. amplifiers)

4.2.10.7.3.2 Drivers

A special driver is necessary to operate the audio controller. Drivers for approved operating systems are available
for download in the Downloads section of the B&R website (www.br-automation.com) (if required and not already
included in the operating system).

Information:
Necessary drivers must be downloaded from the B&R website, not from manufacturer websites.

180 Panel PC 900 (Skylake) User's manual V 1.10

 Technical data

4.2.10.8 5AC901.IRDY-00

4.2.10.8.1 General information

Ready relay 5AC901.IRDY-00 is switched as soon as the B&R industrial PC has started up and all internal supply
voltages are applied. It is possible to connect additional devices to the ready relay; they will also be switched on
when the B&R industrial PC starts up.
• 1 normally closed contact, 1 normally open contact
• Compatible with APC910/PPC900 and APC3100/PPC3100
Terminal block 0TB2104.8000 is not included in delivery and must be ordered separately.

4.2.10.8.2 Order data

Order number Short description Figure

Interface options
5AC901.IRDY-00 Interface card - Ready relay - For APC910/PPC900/APC3100/
PPC3100
Required accessories
Terminal blocks
0TB2104.8000 Connector 24 VDC - 4-pin female - Screw clamp terminal block
2.5 mm²

4.2.10.8.3 Technical data

Information:
The following specified characteristic data, features and limit values are only valid for this accessory
and may differ from those of the complete system. The data specified for the complete system applies
to the complete system in which this accessory is installed, for example.
Order number 5AC901.IRDY-00
General information
B&R ID code 0xD84F
Ready relay Normally open contact and normally closed contact, max. 30 VDC, max. 2 A
Certifications
CE Yes
UL cULus E115267
Industrial control equipment
EAC Product family certification
Electrical properties
Power consumption 0.2 W
Operating conditions
Pollution degree per EN 61131-2 Pollution degree 2
Ambient conditions
Temperature
Operation 0 to 60°C 1)
Storage -20 to 60°C
Transport -20 to 60°C
Relative humidity
Operation 5 to 90%, non-condensing
Storage 5 to 95%, non-condensing
Transport 5 to 95%, non-condensing
Mechanical properties
Weight Approx. 30 g
1) For detailed information, see the temperature tables in the user's manual.

4.2.10.8.3.1 Pinout
Ready relay
Pin Pinout Description Connector, 4-pin, male
1 NO Normally open contact 1 2 3 4
2 COM Changeover contact
3 NC Normally closed contact
4 - Not connected
NO NC

Panel PC 900 (Skylake) User's manual V 1.10 181

Technical data

4.2.10.9 5AC901.ISIO-00

4.2.10.9.1 General information

The ready relay function of IF option 5AC901.ISIO-00 can be controlled using the MTCX. Corresponding commands
must be issued by the MTCX in order to switch the ready relay.
In addition to the ready relay function, the reset and power button as well as the power LED of the APC910/PPC900
or APC3100/PPC3100 can be routed externally.
• Connections for the reset button and power buttons on the PC
• Connection for LED "Power" on the PC
• 1 normally closed contact, 1 normally open contact of the ready relay
• Control of the ready relay functions using MTCX commands
• Compatible with APC910/PPC900 and APC3100/PPC3100
Unlike IF option 5AC901.IRDY-00, ready relay 5AC901.ISIO-00 is not automatically switched on or off if the power
supply to the PC is switched on or off.
The maximum cable length for connecting the reset button, power button and LED "Power" is 2 m.

4.2.10.9.2 Order data

Order number Short description Figure

Interface options
5AC901.ISIO-00 Interface card - System I/O - For APC910/PPC900/APC3100/
PPC3100

4.2.10.9.3 Technical data

Information:
The following specified characteristic data, features and limit values are only valid for this accessory
and may differ from those of the complete system. The data specified for the complete system applies
to the complete system in which this accessory is installed, for example.
Order number 5AC901.ISIO-00
General information
B&R ID code 0xE674
Ready relay Normally open contact and normally closed contact, max. 30 VDC, max. 1 A
Certifications
CE Yes
UKCA Yes
UL cULus E115267
Industrial control equipment
DNV Temperature: B (0 - 55°C)
Humidity: B (up to 100%)
Vibration: A (0.7 g)
EMC: B (bridge and open deck) 1)
LR ENV3
ABS Yes
BV EC31B
Temperature: 5 - 55°C
Vibration: 0.7 g
EMC: Bridge and open deck
EAC Product family certification
Electrical properties
Power consumption 0.5 W
Operating conditions
Pollution degree per EN 61131-2 Pollution degree 2
Ambient conditions
Temperature
Operation 0 to 60°C 2)
Storage -20 to 60°C
Transport -20 to 60°C

182 Panel PC 900 (Skylake) User's manual V 1.10

 Technical data
Order number 5AC901.ISIO-00
Relative humidity
Operation 5 to 90%, non-condensing
Storage 5 to 95%, non-condensing
Transport 5 to 95%, non-condensing
Mechanical properties
Weight Approx. 30 g
1) Yes, but applies only if all components installed in the complete system have this certification and are listed on the associated DNV certificate for the product
family.
2) For detailed information, see the temperature tables in the user's manual.

4.2.10.9.3.1 Pinout
Ready relay
Cable length Max. 2 meters
Pin Pinout
1 Output LED ("Power") - Green
DSUB, 9-pin, female
2 Output LED ("Power") - Red
3 GND
9 5
4 Input - Power button
5 Input - Reset button
6 1
6 Relay, normally open contact
7 Relay, normally closed contact
8 GND
9 COM relay, changeover contact

4.2.10.9.3.2 Connection example

Information:
Series resistors for the LEDs are already installed on the interface option.
The LED outputs are dimensioned for a typical LED current of 3.5 mA.

GND
Green LED
Red LED
Power
Reset

5 1

9 6

COM NC NO

GND

Panel PC 900 (Skylake) User's manual V 1.10 183

Technical data

4.2.10.10 5AC901.IETH-00

4.2.10.10.1 General information

Interface option 5AC901.IETH-00 is equipped with a 10/100/1000BASE-T Ethernet interface.

• 1x Ethernet interface 10/100/1000BASE-T
• Compatible with APC910/PPC900 and APC3100/PPC3100
This interface option can only be operated in slot IF option 2.

4.2.10.10.2 Order data

Order number Short description Figure

Interface options
5AC901.IETH-00 Interface card - 1x ETH 10/100/1000 - For APC910/PPC900/
APC3100/PPC3100

4.2.10.10.3 Technical data

Information:
The following specified characteristic data, features and limit values are only valid for these individual
components and may differ from those of the complete system. The data specified for the complete
system applies to the complete system in which this individual component is used, for example.
Order number 5AC901.IETH-00
General information
B&R ID code EC3C
Diagnostics
Data transfer Yes, using status LED
Certifications
CE Yes
UL cULus E115267
Industrial control equipment
DNV GL Temperature: B (0 - 55°C)
Humidity: B (up to 100%)
Vibration: A (0.7 g)
EMC: B (bridge and open deck) 1)
EAC Product family certification
Interfaces
Ethernet
Quantity 1
Controller Intel I210
Variant Shielded RJ45
Transfer rate 10/100/1000 Mbit/s 2)
Cable length Max. 100 m between two stations (segment length)
Electrical properties
Power consumption 1W
Operating conditions
Pollution degree per EN 61131-2 Pollution degree 2
Ambient conditions
Temperature
Operation 0 to 55°C 3)
Storage -20 to 60°C
Transport -20 to 60°C
Relative humidity
Operation 5 to 90%, non-condensing
Storage 5 to 95%, non-condensing
Transport 5 to 95%, non-condensing
Mechanical properties
Weight Approx. 35 g
1) Yes, but applies only if all components installed in the complete system have this certification and are listed on the associated DNV GL certificate for the
product family.
2) Switching takes place automatically.
3) For detailed information, see the temperature tables in the user's manual.

184 Panel PC 900 (Skylake) User's manual V 1.10

 Technical data

4.2.10.10.3.1 Pinout
Ethernet interface (ETH1))
Variant RJ45, female
Controller Intel I210
Wiring S/STP (Cat 5e)
Transfer rate 10/100/1000 Mbit/s2)
Cable length Max. 100 m (min. Cat 5e)
LED "Speed" (a) On Off
Green 100 Mbit/s 10 Mbit/s3)
Orange (light) 1000 Mbit/s -
LED "Link" (b) On Active
Orange (light) Link (a connection to an Blinking (data be-
Ethernet network exists) ing transferred)
1) The interfaces, etc. available on the device or module have been numbered for the purpose of clear differentiation. This numbering may deviate from the
numbering used by the respective operating system, however.
2) Switching takes place automatically.
3) The 10 Mbit/s transfer rate / connection is only available if LED "Link" is active at the same time.

4.2.10.10.3.2 Driver support

A special driver is necessary to operate Intel Ethernet controller I210. Drivers for approved operating systems are
available for download in the Downloads section of the B&R website (www.br-automation.com) (if required and not
already included in the operating system).
Approved operating systems:
• Windows 10
• B&R Linux
Wake-on-LAN (WoL) and PXE boot are not supported.

Information:
Necessary drivers must be downloaded from the B&R website, not from manufacturer websites.

Panel PC 900 (Skylake) User's manual V 1.10 185

Technical data

4.2.11 Uninterruptible power supply (UPS)

With the optionally integrated UPS, the B&R industrial PC ensures that the PC system can complete write oper-
ations even after a power failure occurs. If the UPS detects a power failure, it switches to battery operation im-
mediately without interruption. All running programs are properly exited by the UPS software. The possibility of
inconsistent data is eliminated (only works if the UPS has already been configured and the driver is enabled).

Information:
• An external panel or monitor is not buffered by the UPS and will fail if a power failure occurs.
Because the charging circuit is integrated in the housing of the B&R industrial PC, installation has been reduced
to simply attaching the connection cable to the battery unit installed next to the PC.
Special emphasis was placed on simplified maintenance when designing the battery unit. Batteries are easily
accessible from the front and can be replaced in just a few moments when servicing.

4.2.11.1 Requirements

• A suitable system unit

• UPS IF option 5AC901.IUPS-00 or 5AC901.IUPS-01
• Battery unit 5AC901.BUPS-00 or 5AC901.BUPS-01
• UPS connection cable 5CAUPS.00xx-01
• B&R UPS configured in the ADI Control Center

Warning!
Battery unit 5AC901.BUPS-00 is only permitted to be operated with UPS IF option 5AC901.IUPS-00!
Battery unit 5AC901.BUPS-01 is only permitted to be operated with UPS IF option 5AC901.IUPS-01!

186 Panel PC 900 (Skylake) User's manual V 1.10

 Technical data

4.2.11.2 5AC901.IUPS-00

4.2.11.2.1 General information

UPS IF option 5AC901.IUPS-00 used together with battery unit 5AC901.BUPS-00 allows the B&R industrial PC to
be switched off properly without data loss during a power failure.
This interface option can only be operated in slot IF option 1.

Warning!
UPS IF option 5AC901.IUPS-00 is only permitted to be operated with battery unit 5AC901.BUPS-00!

Information:
If the system is in power saving mode (S5: soft-off or S4: hibernate/suspend-to-disk), then the internal
UPS interface option charges the connected battery unit. The system's internal power supplies are
active during this procedure. This allows various actions to be performed (e.g. opening the tray of the
built-in slide-in DVD drive).

4.2.11.2.2 Order data

Order number Short description Figure

Uninterruptible power supply
5AC901.IUPS-00 UPS - For 4.5 Ah battery
Required accessories
Uninterruptible power supply
5AC901.BUPS-00 Battery unit 4.5 Ah - For UPS 5AC901.IUPS-00
5CAUPS.0005-01 UPS cable - 0.5 m - For 5AC901.IUPS-xx
5CAUPS.0010-01 UPS cable - 1 m - For 5AC901.IUPS-xx
5CAUPS.0013-01 UPS cable - 1.3 m - For 5AC901.IUPS-xx
5CAUPS.0030-01 UPS cable - 3 m - For 5AC901.IUPS-xx

4.2.11.2.3 Technical data

Information:
The following specified characteristic data, features and limit values are only valid for this accessory
and may differ from those of the complete system. The data specified for the complete system applies
to the complete system in which this accessory is installed, for example.
Order number 5AC901.IUPS-00
General information
B&R ID code 0xD851
Certifications
CE Yes
UL cULus E115267
Industrial control equipment
HazLoc cULus HazLoc E180196
Industrial control equipment
for hazardous locations
Class I, Division 2, Groups ABCD, T4 1)
EAC Product family certification
Electrical properties
Power consumption Max. 30 W at 1 A
Deep discharge protection Yes
Short-circuit proof Yes 2)
Battery charging data
Charging current Typ. 1 A
Operating conditions
Pollution degree per EN 61131-2 Pollution degree 2
Ambient conditions
Temperature
Operation 0 to 55°C 3)
Storage -20 to 60°C
Transport -20 to 60°C

Panel PC 900 (Skylake) User's manual V 1.10 187

Technical data
Order number 5AC901.IUPS-00
Relative humidity
Operation 5 to 90%, non-condensing
Storage 5 to 95%, non-condensing
Transport 5 to 95%, non-condensing
Mechanical properties
Weight Approx. 28 g
1) Yes, but applies only if all components installed in the complete system have this certification and the complete system bears the corresponding mark.
2) The interface option is short-circuit proof. This value does not apply to the connected battery unit.
3) For detailed information, see the temperature tables in the user's manual.

4.2.11.2.3.1 Pinout
UPS interface
Variant 4-pin, male
Pin Pinout
1 Temperature sensor
2 Temperature sensor
3 -
4 +

4.2.11.2.4 Installation

This module is installed using the materials included in delivery. For additional information regarding installation,
see section "Installing the interface option" on page 216.

188 Panel PC 900 (Skylake) User's manual V 1.10

 Technical data

4.2.11.3 5AC901.IUPS-01

4.2.11.3.1 General information

UPS IF option 5AC901.IUPS-01 used together with battery unit 5AC901.BUPS-01 allows the B&R industrial PC to
be switched off properly without data loss during a power failure.
This interface option can only be operated in slot IF option 1.

Warning!
UPS IF option 5AC901.IUPS-01 is only permitted to be operated with battery unit 5AC901.BUPS-01!

Information:
If the system is in power saving mode (S5: soft-off or S4: hibernate/suspend-to-disk), then the internal
UPS interface option charges the connected battery unit. The system's internal power supplies are
active during this procedure. This allows various actions to be performed (e.g. opening the tray of the
built-in slide-in DVD drive).

4.2.11.3.2 Order data

Order number Short description Figure

Uninterruptible power supply
5AC901.IUPS-01 UPS - For 2.2 Ah battery
Required accessories
Uninterruptible power supply
5AC901.BUPS-01 Battery unit 2.2 Ah - For UPS 5AC901.IUPS-01
5CAUPS.0005-01 UPS cable - 0.5 m - For 5AC901.IUPS-xx
5CAUPS.0010-01 UPS cable - 1 m - For 5AC901.IUPS-xx
5CAUPS.0013-01 UPS cable - 1.3 m - For 5AC901.IUPS-xx
5CAUPS.0030-01 UPS cable - 3 m - For 5AC901.IUPS-xx

4.2.11.3.3 Technical data

Information:
The following specified characteristic data, features and limit values are only valid for this accessory
and may differ from those of the complete system. The data specified for the complete system applies
to the complete system in which this accessory is installed, for example.
Order number 5AC901.IUPS-01
General information
B&R ID code 0xDF84
Certifications
CE Yes
UL cULus E115267
Industrial control equipment
HazLoc cULus HazLoc E180196
Industrial control equipment
for hazardous locations
Class I, Division 2, Groups ABCD, T4 1)
EAC Product family certification
Electrical properties
Power consumption Max. 25 W at 0.9 A
Deep discharge protection Yes
Short-circuit proof Yes 2)
Battery charging data
Charging current Typ. 0.88 A
Operating conditions
Pollution degree per EN 61131-2 Pollution degree 2
Ambient conditions
Temperature
Operation 0 to 55°C 3)
Storage -20 to 60°C
Transport -20 to 60°C

Panel PC 900 (Skylake) User's manual V 1.10 189

Technical data
Order number 5AC901.IUPS-01
Relative humidity
Operation 5 to 90%, non-condensing
Storage 5 to 95%, non-condensing
Transport 5 to 95%, non-condensing
Mechanical properties
Weight Approx. 28 g
1) Yes, although applies only if all components installed within the complete system have this certification and the complete system itself carries the corresponding
mark.
2) The interface option provides protection against short circuits. This does not apply to the connected battery unit.
3) Detailed information can be found in the temperature tables in the user's manual.

4.2.11.3.3.1 Pinout
UPS interface
Variant 4-pin, male
Pin Pinout
1 Temperature sensor
2 Temperature sensor
3 -
4 +

4.2.11.3.4 Installation

This module is installed using the materials included in delivery. For additional information regarding installation,
see section "Installing the interface option" on page 216.

190 Panel PC 900 (Skylake) User's manual V 1.10

 Technical data

4.2.11.4 5AC901.BUPS-00

4.2.11.4.1 General information

• Battery unit for UPS IF option 5AC901.IUPS-00

• Single-cell rechargeable battery
• 2 Hawker Cyclon 12 V, 4.5 Ah rechargeable batteries connected in series
• Rated voltage 24 V
• Capacity 4.5 Ah
The battery unit is subject to wear and should be replaced regularly (after the specified service life at the latest).

Warning!
Battery unit 5AC901.BUPS-00 is only permitted to be operated with UPS IF option 5AC901.IUPS-00!

Information:
If the max. specified temperature limits of the battery unit are overshot or undershot, the temperature
alarm of the battery unit is set. Battery backing is no longer provided if the temperature alarm for the
battery unit is active. The battery is also no longer charged since this can result in damage to the
battery. This temperature alarm is defined with a hysteresis of 5°C, i.e. the temperature alarm is only
cleared again if the minimum temperature limit is again overshot by this hysteresis or the maximum
temperature limit is again undershot by this hysteresis. The temperature or temperature alarm of the
battery unit is not only monitored and checked at runtime, but also when the system is powered on;
it can be evaluated using the B&R ADI library.

4.2.11.4.2 Order data

Order number Short description Figure

Uninterruptible power supply
5AC901.BUPS-00 Battery unit 4.5 Ah - For UPS 5AC901.IUPS-00
Required accessories
Uninterruptible power supply
5CAUPS.0005-01 UPS cable - 0.5 m - For 5AC901.IUPS-xx
5CAUPS.0010-01 UPS cable - 1 m - For 5AC901.IUPS-xx
5CAUPS.0013-01 UPS cable - 1.3 m - For 5AC901.IUPS-xx
5CAUPS.0030-01 UPS cable - 3 m - For 5AC901.IUPS-xx

4.2.11.4.3 Technical data

Information:
The following specified characteristic data, features and limit values are only valid for this accessory
and may differ from those of the complete system. The data specified for the complete system applies
to the complete system in which this accessory is installed, for example.
Order number 5AC901.BUPS-00
General information
B&R ID code 0xD82E
Battery
Type Hawker Cyclon 12 V, 4.5 Ah, two rechargeable batteries connected in series
Service life Up to 15 years at 20°C / 10 years at 25°C 1)
Variant Single cell
Temperature sensor NTC resistance
Service interval during storage Charge 1 time every 6 months
Charge duration when battery low Typ. 7 hours
Certifications
CE Yes
UL cULus E115267
Industrial control equipment
HazLoc cULus HazLoc E180196
Industrial control equipment
for hazardous locations
Class I, Division 2, Groups ABCD, T4 2)
EAC Product family certification
Electrical properties
Nominal voltage 24 V
Capacity 4.5 Ah

Panel PC 900 (Skylake) User's manual V 1.10 191

Technical data
Order number 5AC901.BUPS-00
Fuse Yes
Battery charging data
Charging current 3) Typ. 1 A
Operating conditions
Pollution degree per EN 61131-2 Pollution degree 2
Ambient conditions
Temperature
Operation -30 to 60°C 4)
Storage -65 to 80°C
Transport -65 to 80°C
Relative humidity
Operation 5 to 95%, non-condensing
Storage 5 to 95%, non-condensing
Transport 5 to 95%, non-condensing
Elevation
Operation Max. 3000 m
Mechanical properties
Dimensions
Width 223.2 mm
Height 78.2 mm
Depth 145 mm
Weight Approx. 4600 g
1) Depends on the charging and discharging cycles (up to 80% battery capacity).
2) Yes, but applies only if all components installed in the complete system have this certification and the complete system bears the corresponding mark.
3) Maximum charging current.
4) Battery backing is no longer provided if the temperature undershoots the minimum temperature or overshoots the maximum temperature. The battery is also
no longer charged since this can result in damage to the battery.

4.2.11.4.4 Service life

The following diagram shows the relationship between ambient temperature and service life.
15

14

13

12

11
Years until 80% of battery capacity

10

7
50% reduction in service life expectancy if temperature increased by 8°C
6

1
33°C
0
20 25 35 45 55 65 75 85
Ambient temperature [°C]

192 Panel PC 900 (Skylake) User's manual V 1.10

 Technical data

4.2.11.4.5 5AC901.BUPS-00 - Dimensions

4.2.11.4.6 5AC901.BUPS-00 - Drilling template

4.2.11.4.7 Installation

4.2.11.4.8 Precautions for handling and use

Spills and leaks:

Further leakage must be prevented. Smaller spills must be bonded with dry sand, dirt and vermiculite. The use of
flammable materials is not permitted. If possible, neutralize acids with sodium bicarbonate, chalk, etc. Acid-resistant
clothing, shoes, gloves as well as acid-resistant face protection must be worn. The disposal of unneutralized acid
in the sewage system is prohibited!

Waste disposal:
Used batteries and rechargeable batteries must be disposed of in an environmentally friendly recycling process.
Neutralized mud must be stored in closed containers and stored / disposed of in accordance with applicable reg-
ulations. After neutralization and inspection, larger spills diluted with water must be disposed of in accordance with
applicable regulations.

Panel PC 900 (Skylake) User's manual V 1.10 193

Technical data

Handling and storage:

• Store in cool, dry and well-ventilated rooms with impermeable surfaces and appropriate containment con-
ditions in case of leakage.
• Protect from adverse weather conditions and separate from incompatible materials during storage and
transport.
• A sufficient supply of water must be located nearby.
• Prevent damage to containers in which batteries and rechargeable batteries are stored and transported.
• Keep away from fire, sparks and heat.

194 Panel PC 900 (Skylake) User's manual V 1.10

 Technical data

4.2.11.5 5AC901.BUPS-01

4.2.11.5.1 General information

• Battery unit for UPS IF option 5AC901.IUPS-01

• Maintenance-free lead acid rechargeable battery
• 2x 12 V, 2.2 Ah rechargeable batteries connected in series
• Rated voltage 24 V
• Capacity 2.2 Ah
The battery unit is subject to wear and should be replaced regularly (after the specified service life at the latest).

Warning!
Battery unit 5AC901.BUPS-01 is only permitted to be operated with UPS IF option 5AC901.IUPS-01!

Information:
If the max. specified temperature limits of the battery unit are overshot or undershot, the temperature
alarm of the battery unit is set. Battery backing is no longer provided if the temperature alarm for the
battery unit is active. The battery is also no longer charged since this can result in damage to the
battery. This temperature alarm is defined with a hysteresis of 5°C, i.e. the temperature alarm is only
cleared again if the minimum temperature limit is again overshot by this hysteresis or the maximum
temperature limit is again undershot by this hysteresis. The temperature or temperature alarm of the
battery unit is not only monitored and checked at runtime, but also when the system is powered on;
it can be evaluated using the B&R ADI library.

4.2.11.5.2 Order data

Order number Short description Figure

Uninterruptible power supply
5AC901.BUPS-01 Battery unit 2.2 Ah - For UPS 5AC901.IUPS-01
Required accessories
Uninterruptible power supply
5CAUPS.0005-01 UPS cable - 0.5 m - For 5AC901.IUPS-xx
5CAUPS.0010-01 UPS cable - 1 m - For 5AC901.IUPS-xx
5CAUPS.0013-01 UPS cable - 1.3 m - For 5AC901.IUPS-xx
5CAUPS.0030-01 UPS cable - 3 m - For 5AC901.IUPS-xx

4.2.11.5.3 Technical data

Information:
The following specified characteristic data, features and limit values are only valid for this accessory
and may differ from those of the complete system. The data specified for the complete system applies
to the complete system in which this accessory is installed, for example.
Order number 5AC901.BUPS-01
General information
B&R ID code 0xDF83
Battery
Type 12 V, 2.2 Ah, two rechargeable batteries connected in series
Service life Up to 5 years at 20°C 1)
Variant Maintenance-free lead acid battery
Temperature sensor NTC resistance
Service interval during storage Charge 1 time every 6 months
Charge duration when battery low Typ. 5 hours
Certifications
CE Yes
UL cULus E115267
Industrial control equipment
HazLoc cULus HazLoc E180196
Industrial control equipment
for hazardous locations
Class I, Division 2, Groups ABCD, T4 2)
EAC Product family certification
Electrical properties
Nominal voltage 24 V

Panel PC 900 (Skylake) User's manual V 1.10 195

Technical data
Order number 5AC901.BUPS-01
Capacity 2.2 Ah
Fuse Yes
Battery charging data
Charging current 3) Typ. 0.88 A
Operating conditions
Pollution degree per EN 61131-2 Pollution degree 2
Ambient conditions
Temperature
Operation 0 to 40°C 4)
Storage -15 to 40°C
Transport -15 to 40°C
Relative humidity
Operation 25 to 85%, non-condensing
Storage 25 to 85%, non-condensing
Transport 25 to 85%, non-condensing
Elevation
Operation Max. 3000 m
Mechanical properties
Dimensions
Width 188 mm
Height 78 mm
Depth 115 mm
Weight Approx. 2550 g
1) Depends on the charging and discharging cycles.
2) Yes, but applies only if all components installed in the complete system have this certification and the complete system bears the corresponding mark.
3) Maximum charging current.
4) Battery backing is no longer provided if the temperature undershoots the minimum temperature or overshoots the maximum temperature. The battery is also
no longer charged since this can result in damage to the battery.

4.2.11.5.4 Service life

The following diagram shows the relationship between ambient temperature and service life.
15

10

3
Service life [years]

0.5

0.1
10 20 30 40 50 60 70
Ambient temperature [°C]

196 Panel PC 900 (Skylake) User's manual V 1.10

 Technical data

4.2.11.5.5 5AC901.BUPS-01 - Dimensions

78
76 21.6

5.5

ø11
188

140
181.5

20
100
115

4.2.11.5.6 5AC901.BUPS-01 - Drilling template

181.5
5.5
140

ø 11

20

0 7.5 107.5 115

4.2.11.5.7 Installation

4.2.11.5.8 Precautions for handling and use

Spills and leaks:

Further leakage must be prevented. Smaller spills must be bonded with dry sand, dirt and vermiculite. The use of
flammable materials is not permitted. If possible, neutralize acids with sodium bicarbonate, chalk, etc. Acid-resistant
clothing, shoes, gloves as well as acid-resistant face protection must be worn. The disposal of unneutralized acid
in the sewage system is prohibited!

Waste disposal:
Used batteries and rechargeable batteries must be disposed of in an environmentally friendly recycling process.
Neutralized mud must be stored in closed containers and stored / disposed of in accordance with applicable reg-
ulations. After neutralization and inspection, larger spills diluted with water must be disposed of in accordance with
applicable regulations.

Panel PC 900 (Skylake) User's manual V 1.10 197

Technical data

Handling and storage:

• Store in cool, dry and well-ventilated rooms with impermeable surfaces and appropriate containment con-
ditions in case of leakage.
• Protect from adverse weather conditions and separate from incompatible materials during storage and
transport.
• A sufficient supply of water must be located nearby.
• Prevent damage to containers in which batteries and rechargeable batteries are stored and transported.
• Keep away from fire, sparks and heat.

198 Panel PC 900 (Skylake) User's manual V 1.10

 Technical data

4.2.11.6 5CAUPS.xxxx-01

4.2.11.6.1 General information

The UPS connection cable establishes the connection between the UPS interface option and battery unit.

4.2.11.6.2 Order data

Order number Short description Figure

Uninterruptible power supply
5CAUPS.0005-01 UPS cable - 0.5 m - For 5AC901.IUPS-xx
5CAUPS.0010-01 UPS cable - 1 m - For 5AC901.IUPS-xx
5CAUPS.0013-01 UPS cable - 1.3 m - For 5AC901.IUPS-xx
5CAUPS.0030-01 UPS cable - 3 m - For 5AC901.IUPS-xx

4.2.11.6.3 Technical data

Information:
The following specified characteristic data, features and limit values are only valid for this accessory
and may differ from those of the complete system. The data specified for the complete system applies
to the complete system in which this accessory is installed, for example.
Order number 5CAUPS.0005-01 5CAUPS.0010-01 5CAUPS.0013-01 5CAUPS.0030-01
General information
Certifications
CE Yes
UKCA Yes
UL cULus E115267
Industrial control equipment
HazLoc cULus HazLoc E180196
Industrial control equipment
for hazardous locations
Class I, Division 2, Groups ABCD, T4 1)
Cable construction
Wire cross section 2x 0.5 mm2 (20 AWG)
2x 2.5 mm2 (13 AWG)
Conductor resistance At 0.5 mm2 max. 39 Ω/km
At 2.5 mm2 max. 7.98 Ω/km 2)
Outer jacket
Material Thermoplastic PVC-based material
Color Window gray (similar to RAL 7040)
Connector
Type 4-pin screw clamp terminal block 3)
Electrical properties
Operating voltage Max. 30 VDC
Peak operating voltage Typ. 30 VDC
Test voltage
Wire - Wire 1500 V
Current-carrying capacity 10 A at 20°C
Operating conditions
Pollution degree per EN 61131-2 Pollution degree 2
Ambient conditions
Temperature
Moving -5 to 70°C
Static -30 to 70°C
Mechanical properties
Dimensions
Length 0.5 m 1m 1.3 m 3m
Diameter 7 mm
Bend radius
Moving 10x wire diameter 10x line diameter 10x wire diameter
Fixed installation 5x wire diameter 5x line diameter 5x wire diameter
Weight Approx. 55 g Approx. 100 g Approx. 130 g Approx. 250 g
1) Yes, but applies only if all components installed in the complete system have this certification and the complete system bears the corresponding mark.
2) At an ambient temperature of 20°C.
3) Tightening torque: Min. 0.4 Nm, max. 0.5 Nm

Panel PC 900 (Skylake) User's manual V 1.10 199

Technical data

Information:
The maximum length of the UPS connection cable depends on the following:
• Power output
• Voltage drop
• Wire cross section
• Sensor line

4.2.11.6.4 Installation

200 Panel PC 900 (Skylake) User's manual V 1.10

 Technical data

4.2.12 Power supply

4.2.12.1 5AC902.PS00-00

4.2.12.1.1 General information

This AC power supply for the Panel PC can optionally be expanded to allow operation with 100~240 VAC.

4.2.12.1.2 Order data

Order number Short description Figure

Power supply unit
5AC902.PS00-00 PPC900 power supply 85-264 VAC
Required accessories
Terminal blocks
0TB3103.8000 Connector 230 VAC - 3-pin female - Screw clamp terminal block
4 mm² - Protected against vibration by the screw flange

Table 133: 5AC902.PS00-00 - Order data

4.2.12.1.3 Technical data

Order number 5AC902.PS00-00

General information
Power button Yes
Certifications
CE Yes
UL cULus E115267
Industrial control equipment
HazLoc cULus HazLoc E180196
Industrial control equipment
for hazardous locations
Class I, Division 2, Groups ABCD, T3C 1)
EAC Yes
Input
Nominal input voltage 100 to 240 VAC
Frequency 45 to 65 Hz
Inrush current <20 A (on cold restart, 100% load and 100 VAC)
Power failure bypass >10 ms (100 VAC and 230 VAC)
Internal fuse Yes
Output
Nominal voltage 24 VDC ±10% 2)
Output current
0 to 55°C 5.5 A 3)
Electrical properties
Overvoltage category per EN 61131-2 II
Mechanical properties
Housing
Material Steel sheet
Coating Anthracite
Dimensions
Width 73.5 mm
Height 225.5 mm
Depth 53.5 mm
Weight 580 g

Table 134: 5AC902.PS00-00 - Technical data

1) Yes, but applies only if all components installed in the complete system have this certification and the complete system bears the corresponding mark.
2) IEC 61010-2-201 requirements must be observed; see section "+24 VDC power supply" in the user's manual.
3) At an ambient temperature of 0 to 55°C and nominal voltage.

4.2.12.1.4 Installation

For information about installing this power supply, please refer to the section "Installing or replacing the AC power
supply" on page 212.

Panel PC 900 (Skylake) User's manual V 1.10 201

Installation and wiring

5 Installation and wiring

5.1 Installation and wiring

5.1.1 Basic information

A damaged device has unpredictable properties and states. The unintentional installation or startup
of a damaged device must be prevented. The damaged device must be marked as such and made
inaccessible, or it must be returned for repairs immediately.

Unpacking
The following activities must be performed before unpacking the device:
• Check the packaging for visible transport damage.
• If transport damage is noticeable, document this immediately and submit a complaint. If possible, have the
damage confirmed by the carrier/delivery service.
• Check the contents of the shipment for completeness and damage.
• If the contents of the packaging are incomplete, damaged or do not correspond to the order, the responsible
sales office or B&R Headquarters must be informed immediately.
• The information in section "Protection against electrostatic discharge" on page 11 must be observed for
unpacked devices and components.
• Keep the original packaging for further transport.

Power supply
The following information is generally applicable and should be observed before performing any work on the device:
• The entire power supply must be disconnected before removing any covers or components from the device
and installing or removing any accessories, hardware or cables.
• Remove the power cable from the device and from the power supply.
• All covers and components, accessories, hardware and cables must be installed or secured before the
device is connected to the power supply and switched on.

Caution!
Energy regeneration is not permitted and can cause damage or the device to become defective. Built-
in or connected peripheral devices (e.g. USB hubs) are not permitted to introduce any voltage into
the device.

Installation
Before installation
The following activities and limitations must be observed before installing the device.
• Allow sufficient space for installation, operation and maintenance of the device.
• The device must be installed on a flat, clean and burr-free surface.
• The wall or control cabinet plate must be able to support four times the total weight of the device. If neces-
sary, bracing must be attached to reinforce the mounting surface.

Caution!
If the load-bearing capacity of the mounting surface is insufficient, or if the fastening material
is inadequate or incorrect, the device may fall and become damaged.

• To avoid overheating, the device is not permitted to be placed near other heat sources.
Information about the device's environment
• Observe the notes and regulations regarding the power supply and functional ground.
• Observer the specified bend radius when connecting cables.
202 Panel PC 900 (Skylake) User's manual V 1.10
 Installation and wiring

• Ventilation openings are not permitted to be covered or blocked.

• The device is only permitted to be operated in closed rooms and not permitted to be exposed to direct
sunlight.
• The climatic and ambient conditions must be taken into account – see "Environmental properties" on page
24.
General installation instructions
• When installing the device, the permissible mounting orientations must be observed – .
• When connecting installed or connected peripherals, follow the instructions in the peripheral device's doc-
umentation.

Transport and storage

When transporting at low temperatures or in the event of large temperature fluctuations, the collection of moisture
in or on the device is not permitted. Moisture can cause short circuits in electrical circuits and damage the device.
If a device is transported or stored without packaging, all environmental influences such as shocks, vibrations,
pressure and moisture have an unprotected effect on the device. Damaged packaging indicates that the device
has been severely affected by environmental influences and may have been damaged.
This can result in malfunctions of the device, machine or system.

Use of third-party products

If third-party devices or components are used, the relevant manufacturer's documentation must be observed. If lim-
itations or interactions by or with third-party products are possible, this must be taken into account in the application.

5.1.2 Connecting to the power grid

Danger!
• The entire power supply must be disconnected and electrostatic discharge must take place on
the housing or ground connection before removing any covers or components from the device
and installing or removing any accessories, hardware or cables.
• Remove the power cable from the device and from the power supply.
• All covers and components, accessories, hardware and cables must be installed or secured
before the device is connected to the power supply and switched on.

5.1.2.1 Installing the DC power cable

Danger!
The entire power supply to the B&R industrial PC or B&R Automation Panel must be interrupted. Before
connecting the DC power cable, it must be checked whether it has been disconnected from the voltage
source (e.g. power supply unit).

5.1.2.1.1 Wiring

Caution!
The pinout of the power supply interface must be observed!
The DC power cable must be implemented with a wire cross section of 0.75 mm2 to 1.5 mm2 and wire end sleeves.
Conductors of the power cable Terminal connection symbol
+24 VDC +
GND
0 VDC -

Installing screw clamp terminal block 0TB103.9

Secure the conductors with wire end sleeves ① in the terminal contacts ③ as shown in the figure below and tighten
the screw clamp terminals ④ with a screwdriver (max. tightening torque 0.4 Nm). It is important to pay attention
to the label on the spring clamp terminal ②.

Panel PC 900 (Skylake) User's manual V 1.10 203

Installation and wiring
(1) (2)

+
24 VDC

0 VDC

-
(3)
(4)

Installing cage clamp terminal block 0TB103.91

Insert a screwdriver into the cage clamp terminals ③ and secure the conductors with wire end sleeves ① in the
terminal contacts ➁ as shown in the figure below. Close the terminal contact by removing the screwdriver. It is
important to pay attention to the label on the spring clamp terminal ④.
(1) (2)

24 VDC

0 VDC

(3) (4)

5.1.2.2 Connecting the power supply to a B&R device

Danger!
The entire power supply to the B&R device must be interrupted. Before connecting the power cable, it
must be checked whether it has been disconnected from the voltage source (e.g. power supply unit).
1. Carry out electrostatic discharge on the housing or at the ground connection.
2. Connect the power supply connector to the B&R device and tighten the mounting screws (max. tightening
torque 0.5 Nm).

5.1.2.3 Grounding concept

Functional ground is a low impedance current path between circuits and ground. It is used for equipotential bonding
and thus for improving immunity to interference.

Notice!
Functional grounding does not meet the requirements of protective ground!
Suitable measures for electrical safety in the event of operation and faults must be provided separately.
The device is equipped with the following functional ground connections:
• Functional ground connection of the power supply
• Ground connection

The functional ground on the B&R device is marked with the following symbol:

The following points must be observed to ensure that electrical interference is safely diverted:

204 Panel PC 900 (Skylake) User's manual V 1.10

 Installation and wiring

• Connect the device to the central grounding point (e.g. the control cabinet or the system) using the shortest
possible low-resistance path.
• Cable design with at least 2.5 mm² per connection. If a cable with wire end sleeve is used at terminal block
0TB103.9 or 0TB103.91, a cable with a maximum of 1.5 mm² per connection is possible.
• Observe the shielding concept of the conductors. All data cables connected to the device must be shielded.

Legend
1 2 Power supply connection +24 VDC pin 2 3 Central grounding point
Ground connection
a At least 1.5 mm² b At least 2.5 mm² -

5.1.2.4 Connecting cables

When connecting or installing cables, the bend radius

specification must be observed. For this specification,
see the technical data of the respective cable.
The maximum tightening torque of the locating screws is 2
0.5 Nm.

1) Bend radius
2) Locating screws

Panel PC 900 (Skylake) User's manual V 1.10 205

Installation and wiring

5.1.3 Installing a Panel PC with an AP9x3 panel

The with AP9x3 panel is installed in the installation cutout using retaining clips. The number of retaining clips
depends on the panel.
The device must be installed on a flat, clean and burr-free surface since tightening screws on an uneven area can
result in damage to the display or the ingress of dust and water.
Required tools: The following AP9x3 panels are installed with retaining
• 2.5 mm hex screwdriver clips:
• 5AP923.1215-00 • 5AP933.156B-00
• 5AP923.1505-00 • 5AP933.185B-00
• 5AP923.1906-00 • 5AP933.215C-00
• 5AP933.240C-00

Notice!
All the included retaining clips and clamping blocks must be used during installation. Failure to do
so can result in damage to property due to loss of leak tightness between the device and housing
(pollution) or mechanical stress.

Procedure
1. Check whether the supplied mounting screws (1) are screwed into the retaining clips (2). If this is not the
case, then the mounting screws must be screwed into the retaining clips with a 2.5 mm hex screwdriver (A).
The mounting screws are only permitted to be screwed in to the point where they do not project beyond the
retaining clip (B).
A B

(1)
(2)

2. Insert the device into the prepared installation cutout (see ).

3. Install the retaining clips on the device. To do this, insert all retaining clips into the recesses (marked with
orange circles) on the device.
4. Secure the retaining clips by alternately tightening the mounting screws with a 2.5 mm hex screwdriver (max.
tightening torque 1 Nm).
Thickness of the wall or control cabinet Minimum Maximum
W See

206 Panel PC 900 (Skylake) User's manual V 1.10

 Installation and wiring

5.1.4 Installing the Automation Panel 1000 with retaining clips

The with AP1000 panel is installed in the installation cutout using retaining clips. The number of retaining clips
depends on the panel.
The device must be installed on a flat, clean and burr-free surface since tightening screws on an uneven area can
result in damage to the display or the ingress of dust and water.
Required tools: The following AP1000 panels are installed with retain-
• 2.5 mm hex screwdriver ing clips:
• 5AP11xx.0573-000 • 5AP11x0.0702-000
• 5AP11x0.101x-000 • 5AP1120.1043-000
• 5AP11x0.121E-0x0 • 5AP11x0.156x-00x
• 5AP1130.185C-000 • 5AP1180.1043-000

Notice!
All the included retaining clips and clamping blocks must be used during installation. Failure to do
so can result in damage to property due to loss of leak tightness between the device and housing
(pollution) or mechanical stress.

Procedure
1. Check whether the supplied mounting screws (1) are screwed into the retaining clips (2). If this is not the
case, then the mounting screws must be screwed into the retaining clips with a 2.5 mm hex screwdriver (A).
The mounting screws are only permitted to be screwed in to the point where they do not project beyond the
retaining clip (B).
A B

(1)
(2)

2. Insert the device into the prepared installation cutout (see ).

3. Install the retaining clips on the device. To do this, insert all retaining clips into the recesses (marked with
orange circles) on the device.
4. Secure the retaining clips by alternately tightening the mounting screws with a 2.5 mm hex screwdriver (max.
tightening torque 1 Nm).
Thickness of the wall or control cabinet Minimum Maximum
W See

Panel PC 900 (Skylake) User's manual V 1.10 207

Installation and wiring

5.1.5 Installing the Automation Panel 1000 with clamping blocks

The with AP1000 panel is installed in the installation cutout using clamping blocks. The number of clamping blocks
depends on the panel.
The device must be installed on a flat, clean and burr-free surface since tightening screws on an uneven area can
result in damage to the display or the ingress of dust and water.
Required tools: The following AP1000 panels are installed with clamp-
• 3.0 mm hex screwdriver ing blocks:
• 5AP118x.1043-000
• 5AP1120.1214-000
• 5AP1120.1505-000
• 5AP118x.1505-000
• 5AP1120.1906-000

Notice!
All the included retaining clips and clamping blocks must be used during installation. Failure to do
so can result in damage to property due to loss of leak tightness between the device and housing
(pollution) or mechanical stress.

Procedure
1. Insert the device into the prepared installation cutout (see ).
2. Secure the clamping blocks by alternately tightening the mounting screws with a 3 mm hex screwdriver (max.
tightening torque 0.5 Nm). The mounting screws push the clamping lever downwards, which in turn secures
the device to the wall or control cabinet panel.
Thickness of the wall or control cabinet Minimum Maximum
W See

208 Panel PC 900 (Skylake) User's manual V 1.10

 Installation and wiring

5.1.6 Installation information for separate shipments

Information:
If the Panel PC 900 is not delivered as a complete system but as separate shipments, or if individual
components are retrofitted, these components must be enabled in BIOS. To do this, launch BIOS during
system startup, load the BIOS default values and save the settings. For additional information, see
Save & Exit. This is required for the following individual components:
• CPU board and system unit
• Interface option
• Fan kit
• Bus unit

Panel PC 900 (Skylake) User's manual V 1.10 209

Installation and wiring

5.1.7 Installing accessories

5.1.7.1 Replacing the CPU board and system unit

1. Disconnect the power supply to the B&R Industrial PC (disconnect the power cable). Isolate the system from
all potential sources of electrical power!
2. Touch the housing or ground connection in order to discharge any electrostatic charge from your body.

Information:
If a bus unit is mounted on the Panel PC, it must be removed first.

3. Remove the Panel PC from the control cabinet by following the installation steps in reverse order.
4. Place the Panel PC on a clean, flat surface.
5. Remove the 4 Torx screws (T20) and 2 Torx screws (T10) shown in the following image.

6. Remove the system unit with the installed CPU board.

7. A different system unit with a preinstalled CPU board can now be installed on the display unit. Installation
takes place in reverse order. The max. tightening torque is 0.5 Nm for the T10 Torx screws and 1.2 Nm for
the T20 Torx screws.
It is very important that the system unit is installed correctly. The connector for the display interface must be
carefully connected to the female connector on the display unit.

210 Panel PC 900 (Skylake) User's manual V 1.10

 Installation and wiring

8. If the Panel PC 900 is converted to an Automation Panel, then the mounting plate must also be removed. To
do so, remove the 5 Torx screws (T20) indicated below.

9. Remove the mounting plate from the display unit.

10.The mounting plate is installed by following these instructions in reverse; the max. tightening torque is 1.2 Nm.
It is very important that the mounting plate is installed correctly.

Panel PC 900 (Skylake) User's manual V 1.10 211

Installation and wiring

5.1.7.2 Installing or replacing the AC power supply

1. The on/off switch must be set to position "0" (off). Disconnect the power supply to the B&R Industrial PC
(disconnect the power cable). Isolate the system from all potential sources of electrical power!
2. Touch the housing or ground connection in order to discharge any electrostatic charge from your body.
3. Remove the Panel PC from the control cabinet by following the installation steps in reverse order.
4. Place the Panel PC on a clean, flat surface.
5. Remove the Torx screws (T20) indicated in the following image.

6. The AC power supply can now be removed parallel to the Panel PC in the direction indicated by the arrows
in the image below. Exercise caution to prevent damage to the power supply connector.

7. If the AC power supply is being installed for the first time (i.e. not a replacement), then both mounting plates
must be installed first. To do so, guide the mounting plates into each of the three slots at a slight angle. These
mounting plates are included with the AC power supply.

212 Panel PC 900 (Skylake) User's manual V 1.10

 Installation and wiring

8. To install an AC power supply on the Panel PC, it must be aligned parallel to the Panel PC. Plug the power
supply connector into the female connector on the Panel PC.
9. Fasten the AC power supply with the 4 Torx screws (T20) (max. tightening torque 1.2 Nm). It is important that
it is aligned parallel to the housing. The power supply connector must click into place in the female connector
on the Panel PC. There must not be any pressure or mechanical stress on the connector.

10.The Panel PC can now be installed back in the control cabinet.

Panel PC 900 (Skylake) User's manual V 1.10 213

Installation and wiring

5.1.7.3 Replacing main memory

Information:
The Panel PC has 2 slots for main memory modules. Only the following B&R main memory modules
are permitted:
1. Disconnect the power supply to the B&R Industrial PC (disconnect the power cable). Isolate the system from
all potential sources of electrical power!
2. Discharge any electrostatic charge on the ground connection.
3. Remove the Panel PC from the control cabinet by following the installation steps in reverse order.
4. Place the Panel PC on a clean, flat surface.
5. Remove the Torx screws (T10) indicated in the following image.

6. Tilt the cover plate forward and remove it by sliding it upward.

Information:
The lower main memory module can only be replaced after the top one has been removed.

7. The main memory modules can now be replaced. This is done by carefully pressing the fastening clamps
outward and pull out the main memory module.
8. If inserting a new main memory module, align the notch on the connector side of the memory module with the
notch above the slot. The main memory module can then be carefully pressed into the slot until the fastening
clamps are engaged.

214 Panel PC 900 (Skylake) User's manual V 1.10

 Installation and wiring

Caution!
If using only one main memory module, it must be installed in RAM slot 2.

RAM slot 2

RAM slot 1

9. The cover plate can now be replaced by following these steps in reverse order. The maximum tightening
torque of the Torx screws (T10) is 0.5 Nm.
10.The Panel PC can now be installed back in the control cabinet.

Panel PC 900 (Skylake) User's manual V 1.10 215

Installation and wiring

5.1.7.4 Installing the interface option

1. Disconnect the power supply to the B&R Industrial PC (disconnect the power cable). Isolate the system from
all potential sources of electrical power!
2. Touch the housing or ground connection in order to discharge any electrostatic charge from your body.

Information:
If a bus unit is mounted on the Panel PC, it must be removed first.

3. Remove the Torx screws (T10) indicated by ➀ in the following image. The Torx screws indicated by ➁ only
need to be removed if an IF option is already mounted.

4. Lift the cover plate up and away to remove it.

216 Panel PC 900 (Skylake) User's manual V 1.10

 Installation and wiring

5. Remove the cover plate by sliding it upwards and also remove the installed IF option.

6. Insert the interface option in the slot and fasten it to the Panel PC (max. tightening torque 0.5 Nm) with 2
Torx screws (T10).

7. Replace the cover plate.

Panel PC 900 (Skylake) User's manual V 1.10 217

Installation and wiring

8. Secure the cover plate to the B&R Industrial PC using the same Torx screws (T10) from before. The Torx
screws indicated by ➁ only need to be tightened if an IF option is mounted (max. tightening torque 0.5 Nm).

9. Once installed successfully, the interface option must be enabled in BIOS. To do this, launch BIOS during
system startup, load the BIOS default values and save the settings. For additional information, see Save &
Exit.

218 Panel PC 900 (Skylake) User's manual V 1.10

 Installation and wiring

5.1.7.5 Installing or replacing a slide-in compact drive

Information:
The slide-in compact drive can only be replaced without removing the PPC from the control cabinet
if the wall is less than 5.5 mm thick. Steps 3, 4 and 11 are only necessary if the Panel PC is removed
from the cabinet.
1. Disconnect the power supply to the B&R Industrial PC (disconnect the power cable). Isolate the system from
all potential sources of electrical power!
2. Touch the housing or ground connection in order to discharge any electrostatic charge from your body.
3. Place the Panel PC on a clean, flat surface.
4. Remove the Torx screws (T10) indicated in the following image.

5. Tilt the cover plate forward and remove it by sliding it upward.

6. Free the plastic removal strip fastened to the side of the slide-in compact drive.

7. Pull firmly on the removal strip to remove the slide-in compact drive.

8. When inserting a slide-in compact drive, be sure to align it with the guide rails. Tuck the removal strip back
between the drive and the frame (as it was before it was pulled out).
9. The cover plate can now be replaced by following these steps in reverse order.
10.The Panel PC can now be installed back in the control cabinet.

Panel PC 900 (Skylake) User's manual V 1.10 219

Installation and wiring

5.1.7.6 Replacing the fan kit

1. Disconnect the power supply to the B&R Industrial PC (disconnect the power cable). Isolate the system from
all potential sources of electrical power!
2. Touch the housing or ground connection in order to discharge any electrostatic charge from your body.
3. Press in the indicated latching mechanisms (➀) while removing the fan kit at the same time (➁).

4. A new fan kit can now be installed. Align the fan kit parallel to the Panel PC and press it in until it latches.
Make sure the fan kit is inserted so that the connections match up.
5. If a fan kit is being installed for the first time (i.e. fan kit previously not used in device), then it still needs to be
programmed. To do so, follow the instructions in the "Programming fan kit data" section.
If a fan kit has been removed from the device and is not being replaced, then its data must be deleted. To do
so, follow the instructions in the "Deleting fan kit data" section.

Information:
If a fan kit has been replaced, then an incorrect serial number will be displayed. To display the
correct serial number, the fan kit data must be deleted and reprogrammed.

6. After the fan kit has been programmed, the BIOS default values must be loaded and the settings saved. For
additional information, see Save & Exit.

Programming fan kit data

Information:
If a fan kit is being installed for the first time (i.e. fan kit previously not used in device), then it must still
be programmed. The file needed to program the fan kit (called "fn" in the example below) is available
from the B&R headquarters upon request.
1. Boot the B&R Industrial PC and type the following on the command line:
mtxcsvc i fanfset - Checks whether the fan kit has already been programmed
2. If the fan kit has not yet been programmed, this can be done by typing in the following:
mtxcsvc u fanfset "fn" - The path of the file and filename must be specified in place of "fn".

Deleting fan kit data

Information:
If a fan kit has been removed from the device and is not being replaced, then its data must be deleted.
1. Boot the B&R Industrial PC and type the following on the command line:
mtxcsvc i fanfset - Checks whether the fan kit has already been programmed
2. Since a fan kit was already installed, its data must be deleted. This is done by typing the following on the
command line:
mtxcsvc d fanfset - Deletes the data for the previously installed fan kit

220 Panel PC 900 (Skylake) User's manual V 1.10

 Installation and wiring

5.1.7.7 Replacing the fan filter

1. Disconnect the power supply to the B&R Industrial PC (disconnect the power cable). Isolate the system from
all potential sources of electrical power!
2. Touch the housing or ground connection in order to discharge any electrostatic charge from your body.
3. Press down the indicated latching mechanism (➀) while pulling out the filter cover (➁) at the same time.

Filter cover

4. Insert the new filter cover into the fan kit by following these instructions in the reverse order.

Panel PC 900 (Skylake) User's manual V 1.10 221

Installation and wiring

5.1.7.8 Installing the bus unit

Information:
Since the 5AC902.BX02-02 bus unit is supported beginning with firmware version V1.14, a firmware
upgrade must be carried out before installation. See "Firmware upgrade" on page 291.
1. Disconnect the power supply to the B&R Industrial PC (disconnect the power cable). Isolate the system from
all potential sources of electrical power!
2. Touch the housing or ground connection in order to discharge any electrostatic charge from your body.
3. Remove the Panel PC from the control cabinet by following the installation steps in reverse order.
4. Place the Panel PC on a clean, flat surface.
5. Remove the 2 or 4 Torx screws (T10). Slide the cover plate forward to remove it.

6. Install the bus unit on the system unit using the 4 Torx screws (T20) included in delivery (tightening torque
approx. 1.2 Nm).

222 Panel PC 900 (Skylake) User's manual V 1.10

 Installation and wiring

7. Install the side cover on the bus expansion using the 4 indicated Torx screws (T10) (2 already removed, 2
included in delivery); the tightening torque is approx. 0.5 Nm.

8. The Panel PC can now be installed back in the control cabinet.

Panel PC 900 (Skylake) User's manual V 1.10 223

Installation and wiring

5.1.7.9 Installing PCI/PCIe cards

1. Disconnect the power supply to the B&R Industrial PC (disconnect the power cable). Isolate the system from
all potential sources of electrical power!
2. Touch the housing or ground connection in order to discharge any electrostatic charge from your body.
3. Remove the Panel PC from the control cabinet by following the installation steps in reverse order.
4. Place the Panel PC on a clean, flat surface.
5. Remove the Torx screws (T10) indicated in the following image. Slide the cover plate forward to remove it.

6. Remove the PCI slot cover from the bus unit. This is done by first removing the indicated Torx screws (T10)
and then removing the cover.

224 Panel PC 900 (Skylake) User's manual V 1.10

 Installation and wiring

7. Install the PCI or PCIe card in the bus unit. Be sure to insert the PCI or PCIe card in the black guide rail at
the top of the bus unit. Fasten the PCI or PCIe card using the indicated Torx screws (T10) removed earlier
(max. tightening torque 0.5 Nm).
A description and pinout of the bus units can be found in section "Bus units" on page 125.

PCI/PCIe guide rail for slot 1

PCI/PCIe guide rail for slot 2

PCI/PCIe slot 2
PCI/PCIe slot 1

8. Install the side cover on the bus unit using the 4 indicated Torx screws (T10); the max. tightening torque is
0.5 Nm.

Panel PC 900 (Skylake) User's manual V 1.10 225

Installation and wiring

5.1.7.10 Installing a slide-in drive

1. Disconnect the power supply to the B&R Industrial PC (disconnect the power cable). Isolate the system from
all potential sources of electrical power!
2. Touch the housing or ground connection in order to discharge any electrostatic charge from your body.
3. Remove the Panel PC from the control cabinet by following the installation steps in reverse order.
4. Place the Panel PC on a clean, flat surface.
5. Remove the Torx screws (T10) indicated in the following image. Slide the cover plate forward to remove it.

6. Remove the slide-in slot cover from the side cover. This is done by pressing in the 6 indicated snap arms
and removing the slot cover.

226 Panel PC 900 (Skylake) User's manual V 1.10

 Installation and wiring

7. Install the slide-in drive in the bus unit. Be sure to insert the slide-in drive in the black guide rails at the top
and bottom of the bus unit.

Slide-in drive guide rails

Slot for slide-in drive

8. Install the side cover on the bus unit using the 4 indicated Torx screws (T10); the max. tightening torque is
0.5 Nm.
The slide-in slot cover must be installed in order to operate the 5AC901.SSCA-00 slide-in compact adapter.

9. The Panel PC can now be installed back in the control cabinet.

Panel PC 900 (Skylake) User's manual V 1.10 227

Installation and wiring

5.1.7.11 Installing and connecting the UPS battery unit

Warning!
Opening the UPS battery unit is not permitted!
1. Disconnect the power supply cable to the B&R industrial PC.
2. Install the battery unit. For the drilling template, see the technical data for the respective UPS battery unit.
The spacing between the battery unit and B&R industrial PC must be selected so that they can be connected
together with the UPS cable; note the cable length.
4 M5 screws, 4 flat washers and 1 screw locking washer are needed for installation (min. tightening torque 1.3
Nm, screw-in depth per applicable DIN regulations and the application). These are not included in delivery.
3. Connect the UPS cable to the battery. To do so, connect the red and black wires to the power supply (orange
screw clamp terminal).
Connect the white and brown wires to the temperature sensor (green screw clamp terminal).

Legend
a UPS cable b Heat shrink tubing
c Cable clamp d Temperature sensor connection
e Battery unit connection
Temperature sensor screw clamp terminal (green)
1 Brown 2 White
Power supply screw clamp terminal (orange)
+ Red - Black

4. Tighten the connected wires to the screw clamp terminals with a screwdriver (max. tightening torque 0.4 Nm).
5. Loosen both nuts (M3) on the cable clamp and feed the UPS cable through.
6. Fasten the UPS cable using the cable clamp. Alternately tighten the previously removed nuts onto the cable
clamp (max. tightening torque 0.35 Nm).
7. Connect the 4-pin screw clamp terminal block to the UPS IF option and tighten the two screws with a screw-
driver (max. tightening torque 0.4 Nm).

228 Panel PC 900 (Skylake) User's manual V 1.10

 Commissioning

6 Commissioning

6.1 Switching on the device for the first time

6.1.1 General information before switching on the device

Checklist
Before the device is started up for the first time, the following points must be checked:
• Have the installation instructions been observed as described in "Installation and wiring" on page 202?
• Have the permissible ambient conditions and environmental conditions for the device been taken into ac-
count?
• Is the power supply connected correctly and have the values been checked?
• Is the ground cable correctly connected to the ground connection?
• Before installing additional hardware, the device must have been started up.

Caution!
Before the device is started up, it must be gradually adapted to room temperature! Exposure to direct
heat radiation is not permitted.
When transporting at low temperatures or in the event of large temperature fluctuations, the collection
of moisture in or on the device is not permitted.
Moisture can cause short circuits in electrical circuits and damage the device.

Requirements
The following criteria must be met before switching on the device for the first time:
• The functional ground connections are as short as possible and connected to the central grounding point
using the largest possible wire cross section.
• All connection cables are connected correctly.
• A USB keyboard and USB mouse are connected (optional).

6.1.2 Switching on the device

Procedure
1. Connect the power supply and switch it on (e.g. power supply unit).
2. The device is operating and boots; LED Power lights up.

Panel PC 900 (Skylake) User's manual V 1.10 229

Commissioning

6.2 Touch screen calibration

B&R touch screen devices are equipped with a B&R touch controller that supports hardware calibration. These
devices come already pre-calibrated from the factory. This feature offers great advantages especially for replace-
ment parts since recalibration is usually no longer required when replacing a device (identical model/type). B&R
still recommends recalibration for best results and to optimally adapt the touch screen to the needs of the user.

6.2.1 Single-touch (analog resistive)

6.2.1.1 Windows 10 IoT Enterprise 2019 LTSC

After starting Windows 10 IoT Enterprise 2019 LTSC on a Panel PC for the first time, the appropriate touch screen
driver is installed automatically.
On all other devices, the touch screen driver must be subsequently installed to operate the touch screen. The
appropriate driver is available for download in the Downloads section of the B&R website (www.br-automation.com).

6.2.2 Multi-touch (projected capacitive - PCT)

6.2.2.1 Windows 10 IoT Enterprise 2019 LTSC

Microsoft multi-touch drivers are installed on the device during installation of Windows 10 IoT Enterprise 2019
LTSC. After successful installation of Windows 10 IoT Enterprise 2019 LTSC, the device is immediately ready for
operation.

6.3 Display brightness control

1. Open the ADI Control Center in the Control Panel.
2. Select tab "Display".
3. Select a panel from the list. Only the local display (PP Link) and con-
nected panels are displayed in the list.
4. Set the desired brightness using the slider (the figure is symbolic).

Information:
The changed settings are displayed online but only applied by the
system (and used after the next restart) if the ADI Control Center
is exited with OK.
The configured brightness is independent of the value configured
in BIOS Setup, i.e. the value set in BIOS is used until Windows
boots. The value set in BIOS is only applied the first time the ADI
Control Center is launched.

230 Panel PC 900 (Skylake) User's manual V 1.10

 Commissioning

6.4 Configuring a SATA RAID volume with the internal RAID controller
Depending on the chipset of the internal RAID controller, either the legacy or the UEFI BIOS boot can be used.

6.4.1 Legacy BIOS boot

The following software description applies to the internal RAID controller on the QM77/QM170/HM170/CM236
chipset. The HM76 chipset does not provide RAID support.

Information:
B&R recommends using only drives of the same type in a SATA RAID volume (hard disk with hard disk
in a set, SSD with SSD in a set; CFast with CFast in a set).

Caution!
The maximum number of possible write cycles must be taken into account when setting up a RAID
volume with SSDs or CFast cards (with MLC technology).
In order to create a SATA RAID volume and to access setting "Configuration utility", setting SATA mode selection
must be set to RAID in BIOS menu "Advanced - SATA configuration".
The "Configuration utility" in BIOS must be started for the configuration. After POST, press <Ctrl+I> to open the
RAID BIOS.

Figure 20: Configuration Utility - Boot (example)

Figure 21: Configuration Utility - Overview (example)

Panel PC 900 (Skylake) User's manual V 1.10 231

Commissioning

The following keys can be used after entering BIOS Setup:

Key Function
Cursor ↑ Moves to the previous item.
Cursor ↓ Go to next object.
Enter Selects an item or opens a submenu.
ESC Returns to the previous menu.
Ctrl+E Saves any changed settings and exits setup.

Table 135: BIOS-relevant keys in the RAID Configuration Utility

6.4.1.1 Create RAID volume

Figure 22: Configuration Utility - Create RAID volume (example)

Setting Explanation Configuration options Effect
Name Option for entering the RAID name. Name with up to 16 characters Assigns a name to the RAID volume.
RAID level Option for setting the RAID level. RAID0 (Stripes) Creates RAID0.
RAID1 (Mirror) Creates RAID1.
Recovery Creates recovery RAID.
Disks1) Specifies the installed hard disks as either mas- Master, Recovery Defines the hard disks as master or recovery.
ter or recovery.
Strip size2) Option for configuring the size of data blocks. 4 kB, 8 kB, 16 kB, 32 Configures the size of the data block.
kB, 64 kB, 128 kB
Capacity Option for configuring the RAID capacity. Configures the memory size of the RAID vol-
ume.
Sync1) Option for configuring RAID synchronization. N/A -
Continuous Automatically synchronizes the RAID volume.
On request Manually synchronizes the RAID volume.
Create volume Creates the RAID volume. - Creates the RAID volume.

Table 136: Configuration Utility - Create RAID volume

1) This setting is only possible if RAID level is set to Recovery.
2) This setting is only possible if RAID level is set to RAID0(Stripe).

232 Panel PC 900 (Skylake) User's manual V 1.10

 Commissioning

6.4.1.2 Delete RAID volume

Menu option "Delete RAID volume" can be used to format the RAID drive, making it non-RAID. The drive to be
deleted is selected and then deleted by pressing <DEL>.

Information:
This option deletes all data on the drive, including the operating system.

Figure 23: Configuration Utility - Delete RAID volume (example)

6.4.1.3 Reset disks to non-RAID

An existing RAID volume can be deleted using option "Reset disks to non-RAID". The RAID to be deleted is selected
and then deleted by pressing <SPACE> (<ENTER> to confirm).

Information:
Deleting a RAID volume also deletes all of the data on the drive.

Figure 24: Configuration Utility - Reset disks to non-RAID (example)

Panel PC 900 (Skylake) User's manual V 1.10 233

Commissioning

6.4.1.4 Recovery volume options

Menu option "Recovery volume options" can be used to enable/disable recovery disk and master disk.

Figure 25: Configuration Utility - Recovery volume options (example)

234 Panel PC 900 (Skylake) User's manual V 1.10

 Commissioning

6.4.2 UEFI BIOS boot

The following software description only applies to the internal RAID controller on the TS17 CPU modules.

Information:
B&R recommends using only drives of the same type in a SATA RAID volume (hard disk with hard disk
in a set, SSD with SSD in a set; CFast with CFast in a set).

Caution!
The maximum number of possible write cycles must be taken into account when setting up a RAID
volume with SSDs or CFast cards (with MLC technology).
To create, configure or maintain a SATA RAID volume in UEFI mode, the BIOS settings indicated in the following
figure must be set:

Figure 26: Creating the RAID configuration

Figure 27: Setting UEFI mode

Panel PC 900 (Skylake) User's manual V 1.10 235

Commissioning

After the BIOS has been configured for RAID in UEFI mode, menu "Intel(R) Rapid Storage Technology" is visible.

Figure 28: Selecting option "Intel(R) Rapid Storage Technology"

6.4.2.1 RAID volume information

Figure 29: Calling the information

236 Panel PC 900 (Skylake) User's manual V 1.10

 Commissioning

Figure 30: Selecting option "Delete"

6.4.2.2 Create RAID volume

Creating a RAID group is done via menu "Create RAID volume". At least two of the available drives must be
selected for this.

Information:
Executing this option will delete all data on the selected drives, including the operating system.

Figure 31: Creating a new RAID volume

Panel PC 900 (Skylake) User's manual V 1.10 237

Commissioning

Figure 32: Configuration of the new RAID volume

Setting Explanation Configuration options Effect
Name Option for entering the RAID name. Name with up to 16 characters Assigns a name to the RAID volume.
RAID level Option for setting the RAID level. RAID0 (Stripes) Creates RAID0.
RAID1 (Mirror) Creates RAID1.
Recovery Creates recovery RAID.
Disks1) Specifies the installed hard disks as either mas- Master, Recovery Defines the hard disks as master or recovery.
ter or recovery.
Strip size2) Option for configuring the size of data blocks. 4 kB, 8 kB, 16 kB, 32 Configures the size of the data block.
kB, 64 kB, 128 kB
Capacity Option for configuring the RAID capacity. Configures the memory size of the RAID vol-
ume.
Sync1) Option for configuring RAID synchronization. N/A -
Continuous Automatically synchronizes the RAID volume.
On request Manually synchronizes the RAID volume.
Create volume Creates the RAID volume. - Creates the RAID volume.

Table 137: Configuration Utility - Create RAID volume

1) This setting is only possible if RAID level is set to Recovery.
2) This setting is only possible if RAID level is set to RAID0(Stripe).

6.4.2.3 Delete RAID volume

The RAID drive can be formatted via menu "Delete". The drive to be deleted is selected and then deleted by
pressing <DEL>.

Information:
This option deletes all data on the drive, including the operating system.

238 Panel PC 900 (Skylake) User's manual V 1.10

 Commissioning

Figure 33: Selecting option "Delete"

Figure 34: Confirm

6.4.2.4 Reset disks to non-RAID

An existing RAID volume can be deleted using menu "Reset to non-RAID". The RAID to be deleted is selected and
then deleted by pressing <SPACE> (<ENTER> to confirm).

Information:
Deleting a RAID volume also deletes all of the data on the drive.

Panel PC 900 (Skylake) User's manual V 1.10 239

Commissioning

Figure 35: Selecting option "Reset"

240 Panel PC 900 (Skylake) User's manual V 1.10

 Commissioning

6.5 Known problems/issues

• When using a PCI or PCIe RAID controller, we recommend disabling ASPM or power management for the
respective PCI or PCIe slot.
• If problems occur with the ETH1 and ETH2 interface (connection aborted, slow data transfer, etc.), one
possible solution is to disable the EEE feature (Energy Efficient Ethernet) in the driver.
• Under certain circumstances6), Windows may not recognize a connected PCIe card. In such cases, it is
recommended to make the following change in the BIOS:
In menu Advanced / PCI Express graphics (PEG) port, set setting PCI Express graphics (PEG) port to
Enabled.

6) TS77 chipsets with MTCX 1.20 or 1.24 and BIOS 1.24, 1.27 or 1.30, for example

Panel PC 900 (Skylake) User's manual V 1.10 241

Software

7 Software

7.1 BIOS options

7.1.1 General information

BIOS is the abbreviation for "Basic Input and Output System". It is the basic standardized connection between user
and system (hardware). The BIOS system used in this B&R industrial PC was developed by American Megatrends,
Inc.
The BIOS Setup Utility allows to modify basic system configuration settings. These settings are stored in the CMOS
and EEPROM (as backup).
CMOS data is nonvolatile and remains stored on the B&R industrial PC for a certain amount of time even when
the power is switched off (no 24 VDC power supply).

7.1.2 BIOS Setup and start procedure

BIOS is enabled immediately after switching on the power supply of the B&R industrial PC or pressing the power
button. A check takes place as to whether the setup data from the EEPROM is "OK". If "OK", the data is transferred
to the CMOS. If "not OK", the CMOS data is checked for validity. If the CMOS data is also invalid, an error message
is output and the boot procedure can be resumed without problems by pressing the <F1> key. To prevent an error
message from appearing on each restart, launch the BIOS Setup utility by pressing <F2> and save the settings
again.
BIOS reads the system configuration information, checks the system and configures it through the power-on self-
test (POST).
When these "preparations" are completed, BIOS searches the system for an operating system in the available
data storage devices (hard disk drive, floppy disk drive, etc.). BIOS starts the operating system and transfers to
it control over system operations.
To enter BIOS Setup, key "Del" must be pressed after the USB controller has been initialized as soon as the
following message appears on the monitor (during POST): "Press DEL to run setup".

242 Panel PC 900 (Skylake) User's manual V 1.10

 Software

7.1.2.1 BIOS Setup buttons

The following keys are enabled during POST:

Information:
The key signals of the USB keyboard are only accepted after initializing the USB controller.
Keys Function
Del, F2 Access to the BIOS Setup menu.
F12 It is possible to boot from the network with F12.
F11 Opens the boot menu. This lists all bootable devices that are connected to the system. Selecting a device with cursor ↑,
cursor ↓ and then pressing <ENTER> will boot from that device.

<Pause> The POST can be stopped with the <Pause> button. After pressing any other key, the POST continues to run.

Table 138: BIOS-relevant keys during POST

The following keys can be used after entering BIOS Setup:

Key Function
F1 General help.
Cursor ↑ Go to previous object.
Cursor ↓ Go to next object.
Cursor ← Go to previous object.
Cursor → Go to next object.
+- Changes the setting of the selected function.
Enter Switches to the selected menu.
Page ↑ Changes to the previous page.
Page ↓ Changes to the next page.
Home Jumps to the first BIOS menu option or object.
End Jumps to the last BIOS menu option or object.
F2 / F3 Changes the colors of BIOS Setup.
F7 Resets the changes.
F9 Loads and sets CMOS default values for all BIOS settings.
F10 Saves and closes.
ESC Exits the submenu.

Table 139: BIOS-relevant keys in the BIOS menu

Panel PC 900 (Skylake) User's manual V 1.10 243

Software

7.1.3 BIOS TS17

Information:
The following figures, BIOS menu options and descriptions refer to BIOS version 2.10. It is therefore
possible that these figures or BIOS descriptions do not correspond to the installed BIOS version. In
addition, the BIOS menu options depend on the system configuration.

Information:
BIOS default settings are bold and italicized in the tables.
BIOS menu options and descriptions that are not highlighted either depend on the system configura-
tion or are only displayed depending on other BIOS settings.

Information:
The set BIOS default values are optimized for the respective system and adapted to the system config-
uration. Every change to the BIOS default values must be checked by the user. Faulty or invalid BIOS
settings can result in malfunctions of the system.

244 Panel PC 900 (Skylake) User's manual V 1.10

 Software

7.1.3.1 Main

The BIOS Setup main menu appears immediately after key "Del" is pressed during system startup.

7.1.3.1.1 Platform information

Path: Main > Platform Information

Panel PC 900 (Skylake) User's manual V 1.10 245

Software

7.1.3.2 Advanced

7.1.3.2.1 CPU configuration

Information:
The settings shown may vary depending on the CPU board being used.
Path: Advanced > CPU configuration

246 Panel PC 900 (Skylake) User's manual V 1.10

 Software

7.1.3.2.1.1 Processor information

Information:
The settings shown may vary depending on the CPU board being used.
Path: Advanced > CPU configuration > Processor information

7.1.3.2.1.2 Power management control

Path: Advanced > CPU configuration > Power management control

Panel PC 900 (Skylake) User's manual V 1.10 247

Software

7.1.3.2.2 Thermal configuration

Path: Advanced > Thermal configuration

7.1.3.2.2.1 CPU thermal configuration

Path: Advanced > Thermal configuration > CPU thermal configuration

248 Panel PC 900 (Skylake) User's manual V 1.10

 Software

7.1.3.2.2.2 Platform thermal configuration

Path: Advanced > Thermal configuration > Platform thermal configuration

7.1.3.2.3 IGD display configuration

Path: Advanced > IGD display configuration

Panel PC 900 (Skylake) User's manual V 1.10 249

Software

7.1.3.2.3.1 Display interface signal integrity settings

Information:
The following BIOS settings are system-optimized. Changes to these settings should only be made by
system experts who are aware of the effects of the modification.
Path: Advanced > IGD display configuration > Display interface signal integrity settings

250 Panel PC 900 (Skylake) User's manual V 1.10

 Software

7.1.3.2.4 OEM features

Path: Advanced > OEM features

Function of "Realtime environment" and "Hypervisor environment" settings:

This function is supported in Automation Studio 4.7 and later. Starting with this version, it is possible to configure
hypervisor operation with or without hyperthreading for the GPOS (if the CPU used supports this).
Option Realtime environment (RTE) Hypervisor environment (HV) Description
a) Disabled Disabled The default settings are used.
b) Enabled Disabled The system has full RTE support. Hyperthreading is disabled.
c) Enabled Enabled The system has full RTE and AS support. Hyperthreading is disabled.
d) Disabled Enabled The system has RTE and AS support. Hyperthreading is enabled.

If the complete system has been preconfigured for real-time and/or hypervisor operation, these parameters are
system specifications and grayed out. Changes in BIOS Setup are then ineffective since they are overwritten by
the system specifications during booting. In this case, configuration changes must be made with in the EFI shell
with tool "mtcxsvc.efi", which is part of the firmware upgrades for PPC900 systems (see "Firmware upgrade" on
page 291).

Panel PC 900 (Skylake) User's manual V 1.10 251

Software

7.1.3.2.4.2 Super I/O configuration

Path: Advanced > OEM features > Super I/O configuration

7.1.3.2.4.3 CPU board features

Path: Advanced > OEM features > CPU board features

252 Panel PC 900 (Skylake) User's manual V 1.10

 Software

Temperature values
Path: Advanced > OEM features > CPU board features > Temperature values

7.1.3.2.4.4 System board features

Path: Advanced > OEM features > System board features

Panel PC 900 (Skylake) User's manual V 1.10 253

Software

Statistical values
Path: Advanced > OEM features > System board features > Statistical values

Temperature values

Path: Advanced > OEM features > System board features > Temperature values

254 Panel PC 900 (Skylake) User's manual V 1.10

 Software

Voltage values
Path: Advanced > OEM features > System board features > Voltage values

7.1.3.2.4.5 Memory module features

Path: Advanced > OEM features > Memory module features

Panel PC 900 (Skylake) User's manual V 1.10 255

Software

7.1.3.2.4.6 Display board features

Path: Advanced > OEM features > Display link module features

Statistical values

Path: Advanced > OEM features > Display link module features > Statistical values

256 Panel PC 900 (Skylake) User's manual V 1.10

 Software

Temperature values
Path: Advanced > OEM features > Display link module features > Temperature values

Panel #15

Path: Advanced > OEM features > Display board features > Panel #15

Panel PC 900 (Skylake) User's manual V 1.10 257

Software

7.1.3.2.4.7 Bus unit features

Path: Advanced > OEM features > Bus unit features

Statistical values

Path: Advanced > OEM features > Bus unit features > Statistical values

258 Panel PC 900 (Skylake) User's manual V 1.10

 Software

7.1.3.2.4.8 IF option 1 features

Path: Advanced > OEM features > IF option 1 features

Statistical values

Path: Advanced > OEM features > IF option 1 features > Statistical values

Panel PC 900 (Skylake) User's manual V 1.10 259

Software

7.1.3.2.4.9 IF option 2 features

Path: Advanced > OEM features > IF option 2 features

Statistical values

Path: Advanced > OEM features > IF option 2 features > Statistical values

260 Panel PC 900 (Skylake) User's manual V 1.10

 Software

7.1.3.2.4.10 Fan unit features

Path: Advanced > OEM features > Fan unit features

Statistical values

Path: Advanced > OEM features > Fan unit features > Statistical values

Panel PC 900 (Skylake) User's manual V 1.10 261

Software

RPM values
Path: Advanced > OEM features > Fan unit features > RPM values

7.1.3.2.4.11 Fan unit bus features

Path: Advanced > OEM features > Fan unit bus features

262 Panel PC 900 (Skylake) User's manual V 1.10

 Software

Statistical values
Path: Advanced > OEM features > Fan unit bus features > Statistical values

RPM values

Path: Advanced > OEM features > Fan unit bus features > RPM values

Panel PC 900 (Skylake) User's manual V 1.10 263

Software

7.1.3.2.4.12 Slide-in 1 features

Path: Advanced > OEM features > Slide-in 1 features

Temperature values

Path: Advanced > OEM features > Slide-in 1 features > Temperature values

264 Panel PC 900 (Skylake) User's manual V 1.10

 Software

7.1.3.2.4.13 Panel control features

Path: Advanced > OEM features > Panel control features

Panel #x

Path: Advanced > OEM features > Panel control features > Panel #X

Panel PC 900 (Skylake) User's manual V 1.10 265

Software

7.1.3.2.5 Network stack configuration

Path: Advanced > Network stack configuration

7.1.3.2.6 Trusted computing

Path: Advanced > Trusted computing

266 Panel PC 900 (Skylake) User's manual V 1.10

 Software

7.1.3.2.7 RTC wake settings

Path: Advanced > RTC wake settings

7.1.3.2.8 ACPI settings

Path: Advanced > ACPI settings

Panel PC 900 (Skylake) User's manual V 1.10 267

Software

7.1.3.2.9 SMART settings

Path: Advanced > SMART settings

7.1.3.2.10 Serial port console redirection

Path: Advanced > Serial port console redirection

268 Panel PC 900 (Skylake) User's manual V 1.10

 Software

7.1.3.2.10.1 Console redirection settings

Path: Advanced > Serial port console redirection > Console redirection settings

7.1.3.2.11 PCI configuration

Path: Advanced > PCI configuration

Panel PC 900 (Skylake) User's manual V 1.10 269

Software

7.1.3.2.11.1 PCIe device register setting

Path: Advanced > PCI configuration > PCIe device register setting

7.1.3.2.11.2 Gen2 device register setting

Path: Advanced > PCI configuration > Gen2 device register setting

270 Panel PC 900 (Skylake) User's manual V 1.10

 Software

7.1.3.2.11.3 Advanced - PCI - PCIe setting

Path: Advanced > PCI Configuration > PCI hot-plug settings

7.1.3.2.12 USB configuration

Path: Advanced > USB configuration

Panel PC 900 (Skylake) User's manual V 1.10 271

Software

7.1.3.2.13 CSM configuration

Path: Advanced > CSM configuration

7.1.3.2.14 NVMe configuration

Path: Advanced > NVMe configuration

272 Panel PC 900 (Skylake) User's manual V 1.10

 Software

7.1.3.3 Chipset

7.1.3.3.1 Processor (integrated components)

Path: Chipset > Processor (integrated components)

Panel PC 900 (Skylake) User's manual V 1.10 273

Software

7.1.3.3.1.1 Memory configuration

Information:
The following BIOS settings are system-optimized. Changes to these settings should only be made by
system experts who are aware of the effects of the modification.
Path: Chipset > Processor (integrated components) > Memory configuration

274 Panel PC 900 (Skylake) User's manual V 1.10

 Software

7.1.3.3.1.2 Graphics configuration

Path: Chipset > Processor (integrated components) > Graphics configuration

External Gfx card primary display configuration

Path: Chipset > Processor (integrated components) > Graphics configuration > External Gfx card primary display
configuration

Panel PC 900 (Skylake) User's manual V 1.10 275

Software

7.1.3.3.1.3 DMI configuration

Path: Chipset > Processor (integrated components) > DMI configuration

7.1.3.3.1.4 PEG port configuration

Path: Chipset > Processor (integrated components) > PEG port configuration

276 Panel PC 900 (Skylake) User's manual V 1.10

 Software

7.1.3.3.1.5 Miscellaneous SA configuration

Path: Chipset > Processor (integrated components) > Miscellaneous SA configuration

7.1.3.3.2 PCH-IO configuration

Path: Chipset > PCH-IO configuration

Panel PC 900 (Skylake) User's manual V 1.10 277

Software

7.1.3.3.2.1 PCI Express configuration

Path: Chipset > PCH-IO configuration > PCIe configuration

PCI Express Gen3 eq lanes

Information:
The following BIOS settings are system-optimized. Changes to these settings should only be made by
system experts who are aware of the effects of the modification.

278 Panel PC 900 (Skylake) User's manual V 1.10

 Software

Path: Chipset > PCH-IO configuration > PCIe configuration > PCIe Gen3 eq lanes

PCI Express ports

Path: Chipset > PCH-IO configuration > PCIe configuration > PCIe ports [2-4]

Panel PC 900 (Skylake) User's manual V 1.10 279

Software

7.1.3.3.2.2 SATA configuration

Path: Chipset > PCH-IO configuration > SATA configuration

The following default settings must be observed:

BIOS setting Explanation Configuration options Effect
SATA mode selection Option for configuring supported serial AHCI The AHCI setting enables the inter-
ATA connections. nal memory driver for SATA functions,
which increases the storage perfor-
mance for random read-write access by
allowing the drive itself to determine the
sequence of commands.
RAID RAID 0, 1, 5, 10 or Intel® Matrix Stor-
age technology can be configured here
with the serial ATA hard drive.

280 Panel PC 900 (Skylake) User's manual V 1.10

 Software

Software feature mask configuration

Path: Chipset > PCH-IO configuration > SATA configuration > Software feature mask configuration

7.1.3.3.2.3 USB configuration

Path: Chipset > USB configuration

Panel PC 900 (Skylake) User's manual V 1.10 281

Software

7.1.3.3.2.4 Audio
Path: Chipset > PCH-IO configuration > HD audio configuration

HD audio advanced configuration

Path: Chipset > PCH-IO configuration > HD audio configuration > Advanced configuration

282 Panel PC 900 (Skylake) User's manual V 1.10

 Software

7.1.3.3.2.5 Miscellaneous PCH configuration

Path: Chipset > PCH-IO configuration > Miscellaneous PCH configuration

Panel PC 900 (Skylake) User's manual V 1.10 283

Software

7.1.3.4 Security

7.1.3.4.1 Secure Boot

Path: Security > Secure boot

284 Panel PC 900 (Skylake) User's manual V 1.10

 Software

7.1.3.4.1.1 Key manager

Path: Security > Secure boot > Key management

Panel PC 900 (Skylake) User's manual V 1.10 285

Software

7.1.3.5 Boot

286 Panel PC 900 (Skylake) User's manual V 1.10

 Software

7.1.3.6 Save & Exit

Panel PC 900 (Skylake) User's manual V 1.10 287

Software

7.1.3.7 Allocation of resources

7.1.3.7.1 RAM address assignment

RAM address Address in hexadecimal Resource

(TOM - xxxx) - TOM1) N.A. ACPI reclaim, PCI memory range, video
1024 kB - (TOM - xxxx) 100000 - N.A. Extended memory
869 kB - 1024 kB 0E0000h - 0FFFFFh Runtime BIOS
768 kB - 896 kB 0C0000h - 0DFFFFh Expansion area
640 kB - 768 kB 0A0000h - 0BFFFFh Video memory and BIOS
639 kB - 640 kB 09FC00h - 09FFFFh Extended BIOS data
0 - 639 kB 000000h - 09FC00h Conventional memory

Table 140: RAM address assignment

1) TOM = Top of memory: Max. installed DRAM.

7.1.3.7.2 I/O address assignments

I/O address Resource

0000h - 00FFh Motherboard resources
0228h - 022Fh COM F (IF option 2)
02E8h - 02EFh COM E (IF option 1)
02F8h - 02FFh COM B (COM2)
0384h - 0385h CAN controller
03B0h - 03DFh Video system
03E8h - 03EFh COM C (onboard SDL)
03F8h - 03FFh COM A (COM1)
0400h - 047Fh Motherboard resources
0500h - 057Fh Motherboard resources
0CF8h - 0CFBh PCI config address register
0CFCh - 0CFFh PCI config data register
0D00h - FFFFh PCI / PCI Express bus
4000h - 40FFh MTCX (SDL4 update).
4100h - 41FFh MTCX
FF00h - FF07h IDE bus master register

Table 141: I/O address assignments

7.1.3.7.3 Interrupt assignments in PIC mode

IRQ 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 NONE
System timer ●
Keyboard ●
IRQ cascade ●
COM B (COM2) ● ○ ○ ○ ○
COM A (COM1) ○ ● ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
ACPI1) ●
Real-time clock ●
Co-processor (FPU) ●
COM C (onboard SDL) ○ ● ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
COM E (IF option 1 /
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ● ○ ○
I/O board 1)
B&R
COM F (IF option 2 /
○ ○ ○ ○ ● ○ ○ ○
I/O board 2)
CAN ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ● ○ ○

Table 142: IRQ interrupt assignments in PIC mode

1) Advanced Configuration and Power Interface.

● ... Default setting

○ ... Optional setting

7.1.3.7.4 Interrupt assignments in APIC mode

A total of 23 IRQs are available in APIC (Advanced Programmable Interrupt Controller) mode. Enabling this option
is only effective if done before the Windows operating system is installed.
IRQ 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 NONE
System timer ●
Keyboard ●
IRQ cascade ●
COM B (COM2) ● ○ ○ ○ ○

Table 143: IRQ interrupt assignments in APIC mode

288 Panel PC 900 (Skylake) User's manual V 1.10

 Software
IRQ 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 NONE
COM A (COM1) ○ ● ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
ACPI1) ●
Real-time clock ●
Co-processor (FPU) ●
COM C (onboard SDL) ○ ● ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
COM E (IF option 1) ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ● ○ ○
B&R COM F (IF option 2) ○ ○ ○ ○ ● ○ ○ ○
CAN ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ● ○ ○
POWERLINK (IF option 2) ●
PIRQ A2) ●
PIRQ B3) ●
PIRQ C4) ●
PIRQ D5) ●
PIRQ E6) ●
PIRQ F7) ●
PIRQ G8) ●
PIRQ H9) ●

Table 143: IRQ interrupt assignments in APIC mode

1) Advanced Configuration and Power Interface.
2) PIRQ A: For PCIe; PEG 0/1/2, PCI Express root port 0, VGA controller, PCI Express root port 4 (ETH2), GMM (Gaussian mixture model).
3) PIRQ B: For PCIe; PCI Express root port 1, PCI Express root port 5.
4) PIRQ C: For PCIe; PCI Express root port 2, SRAM, POWERLINK
5) PIRQ D: For PCIe; PCI Express root port 3, PCIe to PCI bridge.
6) PIRQ E: For PCIe; onboard Gigabit LAN controller (ETH1).
7) PIRQ F: For PCIe, serial ATA controller
8) PIRQ G: For PCIe; Intel High Definition Audio controller, SMBus controller.
9) PIRQ H: For PCIe, XHCI host controller, thermal subsystem

● ... Default setting

○ ... Optional setting
CPU board PCI bus PCIe bus
B3:D1* B3:D0* B2:D* B2:D*

PIRQ A PEG 0/1/2 PCIe 0/x1 VGA PCIe 4 / I210 PIRQ A

APIC IRQ 16 B0:D1:F0/F1/F2 B0:D28:F0 B0:D2:F0/F1 B0:D28:F4 / B4:D0:F0 APIC IRQ 16

PIRQ B PCIe 1/x1 PCIe 5 PIRQ B

APIC IRQ 17 B0:D28:F1 B0:D28:F5 APIC IRQ 17

PIRQ C PCIe 2 / IF option 2 PIRQ C

APIC IRQ 18 B0:D28:F2 APIC IRQ 18

PIRQ D PCIe 3 / Bridge PIRQ D

APIC IRQ 19 B0:D28:F3 APIC IRQ 19

PCI 2 PCI 1 PCIe 1 PCIe 2

PEG1 PEG2
PCIex4/x8 PCIex4
PIRQ E 82579 (ETH1)
APIC IRQ 20 B0:D25:F0 *The bus number can change depending
on the bus unit used.
PIRQ F USB EHCI-2 SATA 1 SATA 2
APIC IRQ 21 B0:D26:F0 B0:D31:F2 B0:D31:F5
**The PCIe slots are limited to Gen1
PIRQ G HDA SM bus
in BIOS by default. The PCIe Gen can be
APIC IRQ 22 B0:D27:F0 B0:D31:F3 configured in BIOS, however.

PIRQ H USB EHCI-1 XHCI

APIC IRQ 23 B0:D29:F0 B0:D2:F0

PPC900 bus unit slot assignments

Slot 2 Slot 1
PCI 2 5AC902.BX01-00

PCIe 1 5AC902.BX01-01

PCI 1 PCI 2 5AC902.BX02-00

PCI 2 PCIe 1 5AC902.BX02-01

PCIe 2 PCIe 1 5AC902.BX02-02

Figure 36: PCI and PCIe routing with enabled QM170/HM170 CPU board

Panel PC 900 (Skylake) User's manual V 1.10 289

Software

7.2 Upgrade information

Warning!
The BIOS and firmware on B&R devices must always be kept up to date. New versions can be down-
loaded from the B&R website (www.br-automation.com).

7.2.1 BIOS upgrade

An upgrade may be necessary for the following reason, for example:

• To update the functions implemented in BIOS Setup or to add newly implemented functions or components
(for information about changes, see the readme file of the BIOS upgrade).

7.2.1.1 Basic information

Information:
During a BIOS upgrade, individually saved BIOS settings are deleted.
It is helpful to determine the different software versions before starting the upgrade.

7.2.1.1.1 Which BIOS version and firmware are already installed?

This information is listed on the following BIOS Setup page.

• Select "OEM features" from BIOS main menu "Advanced".

7.2.1.2 Procedure in the EFI shell

Caution!
The PC is not permitted to be switched off or reset while performing an upgrade!
1. Download the ZIP file from the B&R website (www.br-automation.com).
2. Unzip the ZIP file and copy the files to a USB flash drive formatted in FAT16 or FAT32. Alternatively, a CFast
card can also be used.
3. Reboot the PC and select UEFI: Built-in EFI shell as boot device (open the BBS boot menu via [F11]).
4. After booting the EFI shell, startup.nsh is executed and the BIOS upgrade is started.
5. After a successful upgrade, the system must be rebooted.
6. Reboot and press key [Del] to enter BIOS Setup and load the setup defaults; then select Save changes
and exit.

290 Panel PC 900 (Skylake) User's manual V 1.10

 Software

7.2.2 Firmware upgrade

Caution!
Do not switch off or reset the system during an upgrade under any circumstances!.
A current firmware upgrade can be downloaded directly from the Downloads section of the B&R website (www.br-
automation.com).

7.2.2.1 Procedure in Windows (ADI Control Center)

1. Download the ZIP file from the B&R website (www.br-automation.com).

2. Open the ADI Control Center in the Control Panel.
3. Open tab Versions.
4. Enter the name of the firmware file or select a file under "Filename".
5. Execute file with Open.
6. After a successful upgrade, the system must be switched off and on again for the upgrade to take effect.
✓ The upgrade is installed and in effect.
The transfer can be canceled by clicking on Cancel in dialog box "Download". This is disabled while writing to
flash memory.
Erasing the data in flash memory can take several seconds depending on the memory module used. During this
time, the progress indicator is not updated.

Information:
For more detailed information about saving and updating the firmware, see the ADI driver user's man-
ual. This is available for download at www.br-automation.com.

7.2.2.2 Procedure in the EFI shell

Information:
Separate update packages are available for the firmware of the PC family and Automation Panels.
1. Download the ZIP file from the B&R website (www.br-automation.com).
2. Unzip the ZIP file and copy the files to a USB flash drive formatted in FAT16 or FAT32. Alternatively, a CFast
card can also be used.
3. Reboot the PC and select UEFI: Built-In EFI shell as boot device (open the BBS boot menu with [F11]).
4. After booting the EFI shell, startup.nsh is executed and the MTCX is started.
5. After a successful upgrade, a the system must be switched off and on again.

Information:
The power supply to the PC or Automation Panel must be switched off and on again for the new
firmware to take effect and the updated version to be displayed.

Panel PC 900 (Skylake) User's manual V 1.10 291

Software

7.3 Operating systems

7.3.1 Windows 10 IoT Enterprise 2019 LTSC

7.3.1.1 General information

Windows 10 IoT Enterprise 2019 LTSC is a special version of Windows 10 Enterprise for industrial use (Long-Term
Servicing Channel) that provides a high level of protection for applications through additional lockdown functions.

Information:
For detailed information, see the user's manual of the operating system. This is available for download
on the B&R website (www.br-automation.com).

7.3.1.2 Order data

Order number Short description Figure

Windows 10 IoT Enterprise 2019 LTSC
5SWW10.1064-MUL Windows 10 IoT Enterprise 2019 LTSC - 64-bit - Value - Mul-
tilingual - PPC900 chipset QM170/HM170 (UEFI boot) - CPU
Celeron/Core i3/Core i5 - License - Only available with a new
device
5SWW10.1164-MUL Windows 10 IoT Enterprise 2019 LTSC - 64-bit - High End - Mul-
tilingual - PPC900 chipset QM170 (UEFI boot) - CPU Core i7 -
License - Only available with a new device

7.3.1.3 Overview

Order number 5SWW10.1064-MUL 5SWW10.1164-MUL

Operating system
Target systems
Industrial PC PPC900 Skylake
Processor Celeron, Core i3, Core i5, Core i7 Core i5, Core i7
Chipset HM170, QM170 QM170
License class Value High End
Architecture 64-bit (UEFI boot)
Language Multilingual
Minimum size of RAM 2 GB 1)
Minimum size of data storage medium 20 GB 2)
1) The specified memory size is a minimum requirement according to Microsoft. B&R recommends using 4 GB RAM or more for 64-bit operating systems.
2) The specified minimum size of the data storage medium does not take into account the memory requirements of additional language packages.

7.3.1.4 Features

Windows 10 IoT Enterprise 2019 LTSC supports the following Microsoft features:
Features Windows 10 IoT Enterprise 2019 LTSC
Range of functions in Windows 10 Enterprise ✓
Internet Explorer 11 (including Enterprise Mode) ✓
Windows Touch ✓
Multilingual support With language packs (default: English)
Page file Configurable (default: disabled by UWF)
Hibernate file Configurable (default: disabled)
System restore
SuperFetch
Configurable (default: disabled by UWF)
File indexing service
Fast boot
Defragmentation service ✓ (disabled when enabling the UWF)
Additional lockdown features (excerpt)
Assigned access Configurable
AppLocker Configurable
Shell Launcher Configurable
Unified Write Filter ✓
Keyboard Filter Configurable

The following are some differences from standard Windows 10 Enterprise:

• Windows 10 IoT Enterprise 2019 LTSC does not include Cortana, the Microsoft Edge browser or the Mi-
crosoft Store.
• The LTSC version is based on build 17763 of Windows 10 and does not receive any feature updates.
• The version installed by B&R contains optimized settings for operation in an industrial environment.

292 Panel PC 900 (Skylake) User's manual V 1.10

 Software

These are described in detail in the Windows 10 IoT Enterprise 2019 LTSC working guide. This contains infor-
mation about installing languages, enabling lockdown and other features.

Information:
These settings, as well as all features not included in the LTSC version, result in different behavior
compared to a standard Windows 10 Enterprise installation.

7.3.1.5 Installation

B&R installs and activates Windows 10 IoT Enterprise 2019 LTSC on a suitable data storage medium. After the
system has been switched on for the first time, it runs through the out-of-box experience (OOBE), which allows the
user to make various settings (e.g. language, region, keyboard, computer name, username).
The operating system is now only installed in UEFI mode.
The data storage medium containing the Windows partition is formatted as a GUID Partition Table (GPT) file system
in UEFI mode. For other drives, it is possible to use either the GPT or Master Boot Record (MBR) file format. A
GPT drive can have up to 128 partitions.

Notice!
It is important to note that when installing in UEFI mode, the GPT file system must be supported by
the software being used when backing up and restoring the installation.

7.3.1.6 Drivers

The operating system contains all drivers necessary for operation. If an older driver version is installed, the latest
version can be downloaded and installed from the B&R website (www.br-automation.com). It is important to ensure
that "Unified Write Filter (UWF)" is disabled.

Information:
Necessary drivers must be downloaded from the B&R website, not from manufacturer websites.

Panel PC 900 (Skylake) User's manual V 1.10 293

Software

7.3.1.7 Activation

Windows 10 IoT Enterprise 2019 LTSC must be activated like its predecessor version. This takes place at B&R.
The activation status can be checked in the Control Panel:

The activation carried out by B&R is supported by special B&R extensions in the operating system and is not lost
when the hardware is changed (e.g. replacement of components in the event of repair) or when the system is
reinstalled (Microsoft reserves the right to make technical changes without notice).

7.3.1.8 Supported display resolutions

Windows requires SVGA resolution (800 x 600) or higher per Microsoft requirements to activate full operation of
the Windows interface (e.g. with system dialog boxes). A lower resolution can be selected for applications.

294 Panel PC 900 (Skylake) User's manual V 1.10

 Software

7.3.2 B&R Linux 10 (GNU/Linux)

7.3.2.1 General information

B&R supports Linux in the form of modified images based on Debian GNU / Linux 10 (codename "buster").
With B&R Linux, B&R offers a variant of Debian optimized for B&R industrial PCs that already includes all B&R-
specific modifications and offers the broadest possible basis for various applications.
Reasons for Debian:
• High stability
• Large package selection
• Wide distribution of Debian and various derivatives (e.g. Ubuntu, Linux Mint)
For additional information, see the Debian website (https://www.debian.org/).

Information:
For detailed information, see the user's manual of the operating system. This is available for download
on the B&R website (www.br-automation.com).

7.3.2.2 Order data

Order number Short description Figure

B&R Linux 10
5SWLIN.0864-MUL B&R Linux 10 - 64-bit - Multilingual - PPC900 chipset QM170/
HM170 (UEFI boot) - Installation - Only available with a new
device
Optional accessories
CFast cards
5CFAST.016G-00 CFast 16 GB SLC
5CFAST.032G-00 CFast 32 GB SLC
5CFAST.032G-10 CFast 32 GB MLC
5CFAST.064G-10 CFast 64 GB MLC
5CFAST.128G-10 CFast 128 GB MLC
5CFAST.256G-10 CFast 256 GB MLC
5CFAST.8192-00 CFast 8 GB SLC

7.3.2.3 Overview

Order number 5SWLIN.0864-MUL

Operating system
Target systems
Industrial PC PPC900
Chipset Skylake
Architecture 64-bit (UEFI boot)
Language Multilingual
Minimum size of RAM 2 GB
Minimum size of data storage medium 8 GB

Table 147: 5SWLIN.0864-MUL - Technical data

7.3.2.4 Features

B&R Linux 10 contains a selection of predefined software package groups. Additional packages can be installed
later with an existing Internet connection.
Appropriate modifications have been made and certain features provided using custom packages in order to use
Debian on B&R Automation Panels and Panel PCs. Most of these packages are already included in B&R Linux
and/or available for download on the B&R website (www.br-automation.com).

7.3.2.5 Installation

B&R Linux 10 is preinstalled at B&R on the desired data storage medium (e.g. CFast card).

7.3.2.6 Drivers

The operating system contains all drivers necessary for operation.

The current version of B&R-specific drivers can be downloaded and installed from the B&R website
(www.br-automation.com).

Panel PC 900 (Skylake) User's manual V 1.10 295

Software

7.4 Automation software

7.4.1 Licensing

B&R Automation Runtime software components (e.g. Automation Runtime, B&R Hypervisor, mapp Technology)
require a license.
It is possible to choose between the following licensing types:

Technology Guarding (TG)

Technology Guarding is license protection used for individual software components. The Technology Guard (hard-
ware dongle) serves as the license container; this is connected to an available USB interface on the target system.

Information:
Licensing via TG is required for Automation Studio V4.1 or later and Automation Runtime V4.08 or
later. No TG is necessary in earlier versions.

Terms and conditions (TC)

No Technology Guard is necessary; licensing takes place via a license agreement. Licenses are supplied with the
sales receipt. The user is responsible for complying with the license conditions. B&R is protected by the terms
of the EULA.

Information:
Licensing via TC is possible for Automation Studio V4.9 or later as well as Automation Runtime V4.90
or later.

For detailed information about licensing, see Automation Help (Automation software / Licensing).

7.4.2 Order data

Hardware-based licensing (Technology Guard)

Order number Short description Figure
Technology Guard
0TG1000.01 Technology Guard (MSD)
0TG1000.02 Technology Guard (HID)
0TGF016.01 Technology Guard (MSD) with integrated flash drive, 16 GB
(MLC)
1TG4601.06-5 Automation Runtime Embedded, TG license
1TG4601.06-T Automation Runtime Embedded Terminal TG license
1TG4700.00 B&R Hypervisor

Contract-based licensing (terms and conditions)

Order number Short description Figure
Runtime
1TC4601.06-5 License for Automation Runtime Embedded (TC). One license
per target system is required.
Hypervisor
1TC4700.00 License for B&R Hypervisor (TC). One license per target system
is required.

7.4.3.1 Support

The following table provides an overview of which Automation Runtime software components are supported by
the device.
Target system B&R Hypervisor ARemb ARemb Terminal (TG only)
PPC900SL Yes Yes No

296 Panel PC 900 (Skylake) User's manual V 1.10

 Software

7.4.4 Automation Runtime

7.4.4.1 General information

The real-time operating system Automation Runtime is an integral part of Automation Studio. This real-time oper-
ating system forms the software core for running applications on a target system.
• Guarantees the highest possible performance of the hardware being used
• Runs on all B&R target systems
• Makes the application hardware-independent
• Easy portability of applications between B&R target systems
• Guaranteed determinism through cyclic system
• Configurable jitter tolerance in all task classes
• Support for all relevant programming languages, such as IEC 61131-3 languages and C
• Rich function library per IEC 61131-3 as well as the extended B&R automation library
• Integrated in Automation NET. Access to all networks and bus systems via function calls or by configuration
in Automation Studio
B&R Automation Runtime is fully embedded in the corresponding target system (hardware on which Automation
Runtime is installed). It thus enables application programs to access I/O systems (also via the fieldbus) and other
devices such as interfaces and networks.

7.4.4.2 Minimum versions

7.4.4.2.1 Automation Runtime Embedded (ARemb) with QM170/HM170 CPU boards

System requirements
The following software versions (or higher) are required to operate Automation Runtime Embedded on a Panel
PC 900:
• ARemb upgrade AR A4.90
• Automation Studio V4.9
• Technology Guard

Information:
In order to use Automation Runtime Embedded (ARemb), BIOS setting Advanced - OEM features -
Realtime environment must be set to Enabled and Boot - Boot option sorting method must be set to
UEFI before legacy.
For other important information regarding operation of Automation Runtime, see see "Information
about Automation Runtime operation" on page 297.

Information:
For detailed information, see Automation Help or the B&R website (www.br-automation.com).

7.4.4.3 Information about Automation Runtime operation

Information:
The specified thermal design power (TDP) of the CPU may be exceeded if the graphics load and CPU
utilization are high at the same time. In real-time applications, this can result in increased jitter and/
or higher cycle times.
If the TDP is exceeded, internal protection mechanisms of the CPU begin limiting the load to the limit of the TDP.
This means that either the CPU frequency or the graphic frequency (GPU) will be reduced/controlled. In real-time
applications, this can result in increased jitter and/or higher cycle times.
This behavior can be influenced by settings in BIOS. Option CPU flex ratio override must be set to Enabled in BIOS
under Advanced - CPU configuration. This displays option CPU flex ratio settings. The maximum CPU frequency
can be set with this option. The number of cores used can be set using option Active processor cores.

Panel PC 900 (Skylake) User's manual V 1.10 297

Software

In addition, the maximum frequency of the GPU (Gfx) can be limited in BIOS under Advanced - Graphics config-
uration using option Max. GPU frequency. Limiting the CPU and/or GPU frequency reduces power consumption
and prevents the TDP from being exceeded.
The optimal settings for real-time operation depend on several factors:
1) CPU variant being used:
° If CPU C-G3900E is used, no further action (BIOS settings) are necessary. For pure ARemb oper-
ation, the limiting of active processor cores can be set to 1 in BIOS; this is otherwise recommended.
° If CPU i3-6100E, i5-6440EQ or i7-6820EQ is used, see item 2. ARemb or B&R Hypervisor mode.
2) ARemb or B&R Hypervisor mode:
° For pure ARemb operation, the active processor cores must be limited to 1 (see item 4 "Typical
use cases for ARemb").
° For B&R Hypervisor mode, see item 3. Requirements of the respective application.
3) Requirements of the respective application:
° If CPU performance is a priority, then it is recommended to limit the GPU to a minimum. Depending
on the CPU variant used, it may also be necessary to limit the CPU frequency somewhat (see item
5 "Typical use cases for B&R Hypervisor").
° If GPU performance is a priority, then it is recommended to limit the CPU (minimum CPU frequen-
cy = 800 MHz). Depending on the CPU variant used, it may also be necessary to limit the GPU
frequency somewhat (see item 5 "Typical use cases for B&R Hypervisor").
° If average performance of the CPU and GPU is desired, it is recommended to limit the CPU and
GPU to an average value (see item 5 "Typical use cases for B&R Hypervisor").
4) Typical use cases for ARemb:
° Limit active processor cores to 1.
5) Typical use cases for B&R Hypervisor:
° High CPU performance:
• i3-6100E with 2600 MHz CPU and 500 MHz GPU frequency.
• i5-6440EQ with 2400 MHz CPU and 500 MHz GPU frequency.
• i7-6820EQ with 2500 MHz CPU and 500 MHz GPU frequency.
° High GPU performance:
• i3-6100E with 2000 MHz CPU and maximum GPU frequency.
• i5-6440EQ with 1900 MHz CPU and maximum GPU frequency.
• i7-6820EQ with 2100 MHz CPU and maximum GPU frequency.
° Mid-level CPU and GPU performance:
• i3-6100E with 2300 MHz CPU and 800 MHz GPU frequency.
• i5-6440EQ with 2200 MHz CPU and 800 MHz GPU frequency.
• i7-6820EQ with 2300 MHz CPU and 800 MHz GPU frequency.

298 Panel PC 900 (Skylake) User's manual V 1.10

 Software

7.4.5 B&R Hypervisor

B&R Hypervisor allows multiple operating systems to operate simultaneously on a single device. The operating
systems can communicate with each other via a virtual network.
Intelligent distribution of CPU resources
B&R Hypervisor allows Windows or Linux to run simul-
taneously with Automation Runtime. This makes it pos-
sible to combine a controller and HMI PC in one de-
vice. With B&R Hypervisor, an industrial PC can also
be used as an edge controller. This serves as a con-
troller and simultaneously transmits pre-processed data
to higher-level systems in the cloud via OPC UA.

Virtual network
The hypervisor provides a virtual network connection that allows applications to exchange data between operating
systems. Similar to an ordinary Ethernet interface, standard network protocols are used. In place of a cable, there
is a reserved memory area that is not allocated to either operating system.

Maximum flexibility
The user configures the hypervisor and allocates hardware resources in the B&R Automation Studio software
development environment. The system configurations are determined individually. This makes the assignment of
resources to the respective operating system flexible. Whereas previous simultaneous solutions were tailored to a
specific Windows version, B&R Hypervisor is completely independent of the version of the operating systems used.

System requirements
The following minimum software versions are required to operate B&R Hypervisor on the Panel PC 900:
• ARemb upgrade AR A4.90
• Automation Studio V4.9

Information:
The following settings must be made in BIOS to operate B&R Hypervisor:
• Advanced - OEM features - Realtime environment set to Enabled
• Advanced - OEM features - Hypervisor environment set to Enabled
• Boot - Boot option sorting method set to "UEFI before legacy"

For additional important information regarding operation of Automation Runtime, see Information
about Automation Runtime operation.

Information:
For detailed information, see Automation Help or the B&R website (www.br-automation.com).

Panel PC 900 (Skylake) User's manual V 1.10 299

Software

7.4.6 mapp Technology

mapp is revolutionizing the creation of software for industrial machinery and equipment. mapp components – mapps
for short – are as easy to use as smartphone apps. Rather than write lines and lines of code to build a user man-
agement system, alarm system or motion control sequence from the ground up, developers of machine software
simply configure the ready-made mapps with a few clicks of the mouse. Complex algorithms are easy to master.
Programmers can focus entirely on the machine process.

Information:
For detailed information, see Automation Help or the B&R website (www.br-automation.com).

300 Panel PC 900 (Skylake) User's manual V 1.10

 Software

7.5 Automation Device Interface (ADI)

The Automation Device Interface (ADI) enables access to specific functions of B&R devices.

7.5.1 ADI driver

7.5.1.1 Installation

The ADI driver is included in B&R Windows operating systems.

The ADI driver (also includes the ADI Control Center) and user documentation can be downloaded at no cost from
the Downloads section of the B&R website (www.br-automation.com). If a more recent version is available, it can
be installed later.

Information:
The Write filter must be disabled during installation.

7.5.1.2 ADI Control Center

The settings of B&R devices can be read out and changed in Windows
using the ADI Control Center in the Control Panel. The figure shown is a
symbolic image; the representation may vary depending on the device.

Information:
The displayed temperature and voltage values (e.g. CPU temper-
ature, core voltage, battery voltage) represent uncalibrated infor-
mation values. No conclusions about possible alarms or hardware
malfunctions can be drawn from this. The hardware components
used have automatic diagnostic functions in the event of error.

7.5.1.2.1 Functions

The ADI Control Center offers the following functions, for example:
• Changing display-specific parameters
• Reading out device-specific keys
• Updating the key configuration
• Testing keys or device-specific LEDs of a membrane keypad
• Reading out or calibrating control devices (e.g. key switch, handwheel, joystick, potentiometer)
• Reading out temperatures, fan speeds, switch positions and statistical data
• Reading out operating hours (power-on hours)
• Reading user settings and factory settings
• Reading out software versions
• Updating and backing up BIOS and firmware
• Creating reports for the current system (support)
• Setting the SDL equalizer value for the SDL cable adjustment
• Changing the user serial ID
For a detailed description, see the user documentation for the ADI driver.

Information:
The functions available in the ADI Control Center depend on the device family.

Panel PC 900 (Skylake) User's manual V 1.10 301

Software

7.5.2 ADI Development Kit

This software allows ADI functions to be accessed from Windows applications created with Microsoft Visual Studio,
for example:

Features:
• Header files and import libraries
• Help files
• Example projects
• ADI DLL: For testing applications if no ADI driver is installed.
The appropriate ADI driver must be installed for the device. The ADI driver is already included in B&R images of
embedded operating systems.
For a detailed description of how to use ADI functions, see Automation Help.
The ADI Development Kit can be downloaded at no cost from the Downloads section of the B&R website
(www.br-automation.com).

302 Panel PC 900 (Skylake) User's manual V 1.10

 Software

7.5.3 ADI .NET SDK

This software allows ADI functions to be accessed from .NET applications created with Microsoft Visual Studio.

Features:
• ADI .NET class library
• Help files (in English)
• Sample projects and code snippets
• ADI DLL: For testing applications if no ADI driver is installed.
The appropriate ADI driver must be installed for the device. The ADI driver is already included in B&R images of
embedded operating systems.
For a detailed description of how to use ADI functions, see Automation Help.
The ADI .NET SDK can be downloaded at no cost from the Downloads section of the B&R website
(www.br-automation.com).

Panel PC 900 (Skylake) User's manual V 1.10 303

Software

7.5.4 ADI OPC UA Server

This document contains technical information about B&R Automation Device Interface OPC UA Server (B&R ADI
OPC UA Server).
The descriptions and figures refer to B&R ADI OPC UA Server V2.0.0 and later.
ADI OPC UA Server provides the functions and information of the Automation Device Interface (ADI) as OPC UA
variables. OPC UA stands for Open Platform Communications Unified Architecture and is an international standard
for secure, reliable, manufacturer- and platform-independent information exchange in industrial communication.
OPC UA is based on the client-server principle and, in the case of ADI OPC UA Server, enables temperatures and
device information to be read from B&R devices, for example.
Additional information is available on the OPC Foundation (www.opcfoundation.org) website, for example.
The ADI OPC UA Server and user documentation can be downloaded at no cost from the Downloads section of
the B&R website (www.br-automation.com).

304 Panel PC 900 (Skylake) User's manual V 1.10

 Software

7.6 Key Editor

A frequently occurring requirement for panels is adapting function keys and LEDs to the application software. With
the Key Editor, individual adaptation to the application is possible quickly and easily.

Features:
• Configuration of normal keys like on a keyboard (A, B, C, etc.)
• Keyboard shortcuts (CTRL+C, SHIFT+DEL, etc.) on one key
• Special key functions (change brightness, etc.)
• Assignment of LED functions (HDD access, power, etc.)
• 4 assignments possible per key (using layers)
• Configuration of the panel lock time when connecting several Automation Panel devices to Automation
PCs and Panel PCs
For detailed instructions about configuring keys and LEDs and installing the key configuration on the target system,
see the help documentation for the Key Editor. The Key Editor and help documentation can be downloaded at no
cost from the Downloads section of the B&R website (www.br-automation.com).

Panel PC 900 (Skylake) User's manual V 1.10 305

Software

7.7 KCF Editor

The KCF Editor can be used as a simple alternative to the Key Editor. It can
also be used to adapt function keys and LEDs to the application software. In
contrast to the Key Editor, operation does not take place using a graphical
representation of the device, but via a simple Windows dialog box. The KCF
Editor can therefore also be used for devices that are not yet supported in
the Key Editor. The KCF Editor is a "portable" application and can be started
directly from a USB flash drive without installation on the target device, for
example.
An installed ADI driver is required for the full range of functions.

Features:
• Configuration of normal keys like on a keyboard (A, B, C, etc.)
• Special key functions (change brightness, etc.)
• Assignment of LED functions (HDD access, power, etc.)
• 4 assignments possible per key (using layers)
• Configuration of the panel lock time when connecting several Automation Panel devices to B&R PCs.
• Export and import of the configuration (via INI files)
• Save configuration as report (text file)
If the KCF Editor is running on the target device and the ADI driver is installed, the following additional features
are available:
• Panel and key detection
• LED test
• Download/Upload the configuration
For detailed instructions about configuring keys and LEDs and installing the key configuration on the target system,
see the user documentation for the KCF editor. The KCF editor and user documentation can be downloaded at no
cost from the Downloads section of the B&R website (www.br-automation.com).

306 Panel PC 900 (Skylake) User's manual V 1.10

 Maintenance

8 Maintenance

The following chapter describes the maintenance work that can be carried out by a qualified and trained end user.

Information:
Only components approved by B&R are permitted to be used for maintenance work.

8.1 General instructions for the temperature test procedure

The purpose of these instructions is to explain the general procedure for application-specific temperature tests with
B&R industrial PCs or Power Panels. These instructions are only guidelines, however.

8.1.1 Procedure

In order to obtain meaningful results, the test conditions should correspond to conditions in the field. This means
that during the temperature tests, for example, the target application should be running and the PC should be
installed in the control cabinet housing that will be used later.
In addition, a temperature sensor should be installed for the device being tested in order to continuously monitor
the ambient temperature. To obtain correct values, it must be installed at a distance of approx. 5 to 10 cm from the
B&R industrial PC near the air inlet (not near the air outlet).
Every B&R industrial PC or Power Panel is equipped with internal temperature sensors. Depending on the device
family, these are installed in different positions. The number and temperature limits vary depending on the device
family.
A minimum test time of 8 hours is recommended for to optimally determine and assess the temperature situation.

8.1.2 Evaluating temperatures in Windows operating systems

8.1.2.1 Evaluating with the B&R Control Center

The ADI Control Center can be used to evaluate temperatures. The temperatures can be viewed in tab Temper-
atures. The ADI Control Center can be downloaded from the B&R website (www.br-automation.com) at no cost
and uses the ADI (Automation Device Interface).

Panel PC 900 (Skylake) User's manual V 1.10 307

Maintenance

If historical recording of the data is necessary, a separate application can be created.

Information:
To create a separate application, downloads such as the ADI .NET SDK are available from the B&R
website (www.br-automation.com).

8.1.2.2 Evaluating with the BurnInTest tool from Passmark

If a separate application is not created or used for temperature evaluation, B&R recommends using the BurnInTest
software tool from PassMark.
The BurnInTest software tool is available in standard and professional versions. In addition to the software package,
various loopback adapters (serial, parallel, USB, etc.) and test CDs or DVDs are also available. Depending on the
expansion level of the software and available loopback adapters, a correspondingly high system and peripheral
load can be generated.

Information:
Loopback adapters are also available from PassMark. For additional information, see www.pass-
mark.com.
The following screenshots are based on Passmark BurnInTest Pro V6 and a 2-slot PPC910 with DVD.

Figure 37: Setting for Passmark BurnInTest Pro V6 and a 2-slot PPC900 with DVD

308 Panel PC 900 (Skylake) User's manual V 1.10

 Maintenance

Figure 38: Test overview of a 2-slot PPC900 with DVD

The respective test properties may need to be fine-tuned depending on the availability of a loopback plug and DVDs.
If no USB loopback adapters are available, USB flash drives can also be used. These must be available in Windows
as formatted drives. Option USB must be deselected under Test selection and duty cycles, and Test this device
must then be selected in the Disk settings (Configuration / Test Preferences / Disk).

Serial loopback adapters can be easily created by connecting some pins as shown.

8.1.3 Evaluating the measurement results

The recorded maximum temperature value of each individual sensor is not permitted to exceed the temperature
limit specified in the user's manuals.
If the temperature tests cannot be carried out in a climate chamber, they can be carried out in an office environment,
for example. It is necessary to record the ambient temperature, however. Based on experience gained at B&R,
the measured temperature values can be extrapolated linearly to the ambient temperature for passive systems
(systems without a fan kit). In order to also be able to extrapolate the temperature values for systems with a fan
kit, the fans must be running. The speed, etc. must also be taken into account.
If the temperature tests are carried out in a controlled climate chamber with a fan, the devices to be tested are cooled
by this fan and thus the measurement results are distorted. With passive devices, the measurement results are
therefore unusable. In order to be able to carry out temperature tests in climate chambers with fans without distorting
the measurement results, however, the fan of the climate chamber must be switched off and a correspondingly
long lead time (several hours) must be observed.

Panel PC 900 (Skylake) User's manual V 1.10 309

Maintenance

8.2 Changing the battery

Warning!
The battery is only permitted to be replaced with a CR2477N battery. The use of any other battery may
present a risk of fire or explosion.
The battery can explode if handled improperly. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of the battery
in fire.
The lithium battery ensures the retention of the internal real-time clock (RTC) and CMOS data.
The following lithium replacement batteries are available: 4A0006.00-000 (1 pc.) and 0AC201.91 (4 pcs.).
Note the following when changing the battery:
• The product design allows the battery to be changed when the PLC is in a voltage-free state as well as
when the B&R device is switched on. In some countries, changing under operating voltage is not permitted,
however; local regulations must be observed!
• The battery is only permitted to be changed by qualified personnel.
• When changing the battery in a voltage-free state, any BIOS settings made are retained (stored in volt-
age-safe EEPROM). The date and time must be set again since this data is lost during the change.

8.2.1 Procedure
• Disconnect the power supply to the B&R Industrial PC (disconnect the power cable). Isolate the system
from all potential sources of electrical power!
• Touch the housing or ground connection in order to discharge any electrostatic charge from your body.
• Pull the battery holder out of the Panel PC (➀) and remove the battery (➁).

Figure 39: Pull out battery holder and remove battery

1. The battery is not permitted to be held by its edges. Insulated tweezers may also be used to insert the battery.

Figure 40: Battery handling

2. Insert the new battery with the correct polarity.

• Insert the battery holder into the Panel PC.
• Reconnect the power supply to the B&R Industrial PC (plug in the power cable).
• Check the date and time in BIOS and correct them if necessary.

Warning!
Lithium batteries are hazardous waste! Used batteries must be disposed of in accordance with local
regulations.

310 Panel PC 900 (Skylake) User's manual V 1.10

 Maintenance

8.3 Exchanging a CFast card

Caution!
Power must be turned off before exchanging CFast cards.
The CFast card can be exchanged quickly and easily using the ejector (see image).

Figure 41: Exchanging a CFast card

Panel PC 900 (Skylake) User's manual V 1.10 311

Maintenance

8.4 Cleaning

Danger!
In order to prevent unintentional operation (by touching the touch screen or keys), the device is only
permitted to be cleaned when the power is switched off.
• Use a cloth moistened with dishwashing detergent, screen cleaner or alcohol (ethanol) to clean the device.
• The cleaning agent is not permitted to be applied directly to the device.
Abrasive cleaners, aggressive solvents and chemicals, compressed air or steam cleaners are not permitted
to be used.
• When cleaning, areas with adhesive labels and product information should be left out to avoid damage.

Information:
Displays with a touch screen should be cleaned at regular intervals.

8.5 User tips for increasing the service life of the display
8.5.1 Backlight

The service life of the backlight is specified by its "half-brightness time". An operating time of 50,000 hours would
mean that the display brightness would still be 50% after this time.

8.5.1.1 Measures to maintain backlight service life

• The display brightness can be set to the lowest level that is comfortable for the user's eyes.
• Bright images should be avoided as far as possible.
• A 50% reduction in brightness can increase the half-brightness time by about 50%.

8.5.2 Image persistence

Image persistence refers to the "burning in" of a static image on a display after being displayed for a long time. It
does not only occur with static images, however. Image persistence is also referred to in the technical literature as
screen burn-in, image retention, memory effect, memory sticking or ghost image.
There are 2 different types:
• Area type: This type can be seen in a dark gray image. The effect disappears if the display is switched
off for a long time.
• Line type: This can result in permanent damage.

8.5.2.1 What causes image persistence?

• Static images
• No screensaver
• Sharp transitions in contrast (e.g. black/white)
• High ambient temperatures
• Operation outside of specifications

8.5.2.2 How can image persistence be reduced?

• Switch continuously between static and dynamic images.

• Prevent excessive differences in brightness between foreground and background elements.
• Use colors with similar brightness.
• Use complementary colors for subsequent images.
• Use screensavers.

312 Panel PC 900 (Skylake) User's manual V 1.10

 Maintenance

8.6 Pixel errors

Information:
Displays can contain faulty pixels (pixel errors) due to the manufacturing process. They are not
grounds for initiating a complaint or warranty claim.

Panel PC 900 (Skylake) User's manual V 1.10 313

Accessories

9 Accessories

The following accessories have undergone functional testing by B&R in connection with the device used and can
be operated with this device. Possible limitations regarding operation with individual components other than the
complete system must be taken into account, however. All individual specifications of the components must be
observed when operating the complete system.
All components listed in this manual have undergone intensive system and compatibility testing and been approved
accordingly. B&R cannot assume any functional warranty for accessories that have not been approved.

9.1 Terminal block power supply

9.1.1 0TB103.9x

9.1.1.1 General information

1-row 3-pin terminal block 0TB103 is used for the power supply.

9.1.1.2 Order data

Order number Short description Figure

Accessories
0TB103.9 Connector 24 VDC - 3-pin, female - Screw clamp terminal block
3.31 mm²
0TB103.91 Connector 24 VDC - 3-pin, female - Cage clamp terminal block
3.31 mm²

9.1.1.3 Technical data

Information:
The following specified characteristic data, features and limit values are only valid for this accessory
and may differ from those of the complete system. The data specified for the complete system applies
to the complete system in which this accessory is installed, for example.
Order number 0TB103.9 0TB103.91
General information
Certifications
CE Yes
UL cULus E115267
Industrial control equipment
HazLoc cULus HazLoc E180196
Industrial control equipment
for hazardous locations
Class I, Division 2, Groups ABCD, T4 1)
DNV Temperature: B (0 - 55°C)
Humidity: B (up to 100%)
Vibration: A (0.7 g)
EMC: B (bridge and open deck) 2)
LR ENV3
KR Yes
ABS Yes
BV EC31B
Temperature: 5 - 55°C
Vibration: 0.7 g
EMC: Bridge and open deck
EAC Yes
Terminal block
Note Protected against vibration by the screw flange
Nominal data per UL
Number of pins 3 (female)
Type of terminal block Screw clamp terminal block variant Cage clamp terminal block variant 3)
Cable type Only copper wires (no aluminum wires!)
Pitch 5.08 mm

314 Panel PC 900 (Skylake) User's manual V 1.10

 Accessories
Order number 0TB103.9 0TB103.91
Connection cross section
AWG wire 26 to 14 AWG 26 to 12 AWG
Wire end sleeves with plastic covering 0.20 to 1.50 mm²
Solid wires 0.20 to 2.50 mm²
Fine-stranded wires 0.20 to 1.50 mm² 0.20 to 2.50 mm²
With wire end sleeves 0.20 to 1.50 mm²
Tightening torque 0.4 Nm -
Electrical properties
Nominal voltage 300 V
Nominal current 4) 10 A / contact
Contact resistance ≤5 mΩ
Operating conditions
Pollution degree per EN 61131-2 Pollution degree 2
1) Yes, but applies only if all components installed in the complete system have this certification and the complete system bears the corresponding mark.
2) Yes, but applies only if all components installed in the complete system have this certification and are listed on the associated DNV certificate for the product
family.
3) The cage clamp terminal block cannot be used side by side.
4) The respective limit data of the I/O modules must be taken into account!

9.1.2 0TB3103.8000

9.1.2.1 General information

This single row 3-pin terminal block is used to connect the voltage supply.

9.1.2.2 Order data

Order number Short description Figure

Terminal blocks
0TB3103.8000 Connector 230 VAC - 3-pin female - Screw clamp terminal block
4 mm² - Protected against vibration by the screw flange

Table 152: 0TB3103.8000 - Order data

9.1.2.3 Technical data

Order number 0TB3103.8000

General information
Certifications
CE Yes
UL cULus E115267
Industrial control equipment
HazLoc cULus HazLoc E180196
Industrial control equipment
for hazardous locations
Class I, Division 2, Groups ABCD1)
EAC Yes
Terminal block
Note Protected against vibration by the screw flange
Number of pins 3 (male)
Type of terminal block Screw clamps
Pitch 7.62 mm
Connection cross section
AWG wire 24 to 10 AWG
Wire end sleeves with plastic covering 0.25 to 4 mm²
Flexible 0.2 to 4 mm²
Inflexible 0.2 to 4 mm²

Table 153: 0TB3103.8000 - Technical data

Panel PC 900 (Skylake) User's manual V 1.10 315

Accessories
Order number 0TB3103.8000
Tightening torque 0.5 to 0.6 Nm
Electrical properties
Nominal voltage 400 V
Nominal current 20 A

Table 153: 0TB3103.8000 - Technical data

1) Yes, although applies only if all components installed within the complete system have this certification and the complete system itself carries the corresponding
mark.

316 Panel PC 900 (Skylake) User's manual V 1.10

 Accessories

9.2 Terminal block ready relay

9.2.1 0TB2104.8000

9.2.1.1 General information

This 1-row, 4-pin TB2104 terminal block is used for ready relay 5AC901.IRDY-00.

9.2.1.2 Order data

Order number Short description Figure

Terminal blocks
0TB2104.8000 Connector 24 VDC - 4-pin female - Screw clamp terminal block
2.5 mm²

9.2.1.3 Technical data

Information:
The following specified characteristic data, features and limit values are only valid for this accessory
and may differ from those of the complete system. The data specified for the complete system applies
to the complete system in which this accessory is installed, for example.
Order number 0TB2104.8000
General information
Certifications
CE Yes
UL cULus E115267
Industrial control equipment
EAC Yes
Terminal block
Note Nominal data per UL
Number of pins 4 (female)
Type of terminal block Screw clamp terminal block variant
Cable type Only copper wires (no aluminum wires!)
Pitch 5.08 mm
Connection cross section
AWG wire 26 to 14 AWG
Wire end sleeves with plastic covering 0.2 to 1.5 mm²
Solid wires 0.2 to 2.5 mm²
Fine-stranded wires 0.2 to 1.5 mm²
With wire end sleeves 0.2 to 1.5 mm²
Electrical properties
Nominal voltage 300 V
Nominal current 1) 10 A
Operating conditions
Pollution degree per EN 61131-2 Pollution degree 2
1) The respective limit data of the IF option must be taken into account!

Panel PC 900 (Skylake) User's manual V 1.10 317

Accessories

9.3 Replacement CMOS batteries

9.3.1 0AC201.91 / 4A0006.00-000

9.3.1.1 General information

The lithium battery is needed to retain BIOS CMOS data and to back up the real-time clock (RTC).
The battery is subject to wear and must be replaced if the battery capacity is insufficient (state "Bad").

9.3.1.2 Order data

Order number Short description Figure

Batteries
0AC201.91 Lithium batteries 4 pcs., 3 V / 950 mAh button cell
4A0006.00-000 Lithium battery, 3 V / 950 mAh, button cell

9.3.1.3 Technical data

Warning!
The battery is only permitted to be replaced with a CR2477N battery. The use of any other battery may
present a risk of fire or explosion.
The battery can explode if handled improperly. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of the battery
in fire.

Information:
The following specified characteristic data, features and limit values are only valid for this accessory
and may differ from those of the complete system. The data specified for the complete system applies
to the complete system in which this accessory is installed, for example.
Order number 0AC201.91 4A0006.00-000
General information
Storage time Max. 3 years at 30°C
Certifications
CE Yes
UL cULus E115267
Industrial control equipment
Electrical properties
Capacity 950 mAh
Self-discharge <1% per year (at 23°C)
Voltage range 3V
Operating conditions
Pollution degree per EN 61131-2 Pollution degree 2
Ambient conditions
Temperature
Storage -20 to 60°C
Relative humidity
Operation 0 to 95%
Storage 0 to 95%
Transport 0 to 95%

318 Panel PC 900 (Skylake) User's manual V 1.10

 Accessories

9.4 PCIe plug-in cards

9.4.1 5ACPCE.ETH1-00

9.4.1.1 General information

This PCIe card has a 10/100/1000 Mbit/s network connection and can be used as an additional network interface
in a standard PCI Express x1 slot.
• PCIe x1 Ethernet card
• 1x Ethernet interface (10/100/1000 Mbit/s)

LED status indicators

Network connection
ETH

Figure 42: 5ACPCE.ETH1-00 - PCIe Ethernet card 10/100/1000

9.4.1.2 Order data

Order number Short description Figure

Interface options
5ACPCE.ETH1-00 PCIe carte - 1x ETH 10/100/1000 - For APC910/PPC900

Table 158: 5ACPCE.ETH1-00 - Order data

9.4.1.3 Technical data

Information:
The following specified characteristic data, features and limit values are only valid for these individual
components and may differ from those of the complete system. The data specified for the complete
system applies to the complete system in which this individual component is used, for example.

Panel PC 900 (Skylake) User's manual V 1.10 319

Accessories
Order number 5ACPCE.ETH1-00
General information
B&R ID code DBF3
Diagnostics
Data transfer Yes, using LED status indicators
Certifications
CE Yes
UL cULus E115267
Industrial control equipment
EAC Product family certification
Interfaces
Ethernet
Quantity 1
Controller Intel I210
Variant Shielded RJ45
Transfer rate 10/100/1000 Mbit/s 1)
Line length Max. 100 m between two stations (segment length)
Electrical properties
Power consumption 1W
Operating conditions
Pollution degree per EN 61131-2 Pollution degree 2
Ambient conditions
Temperature
Operation 0 to 55°C 2)
Storage -20 to 60°C
Transport -20 to 60°C
Relative humidity
Operation 5 to 90%, non-condensing
Storage 5 to 95%, non-condensing
Transport 5 to 95%, non-condensing
Vibration 3)
Operation (continuous) 2 to 9 Hz: 1.75 mm amplitude / 9 to 200 Hz: 0.5 g
Operation (occasional) 2 to 9 Hz: 3.5 mm amplitude / 9 to 200 Hz: 1 g
Storage 2 to 8 Hz: 7.5 mm amplitude / 8 to 200 Hz: 2 g / 200 to 500 Hz: 4 g
Transport 2 to 8 Hz: 7.5 mm amplitude / 8 to 200 Hz: 2 g / 200 to 500 Hz: 4 g
Shock 3)
Operation 15 g, 11 ms
Storage 30 g, 6 ms
Transport 30 g, 6 ms
Elevation
Operation -300 to 3000 m above sea level 2)

Table 159: 5ACPCE.ETH1-00 - Technical data

1) Switching takes place automatically.
2) The maximum ambient temperature is typically derated by 1°C per 1000 meters starting at 500 meters above sea level.
3) Vibration testing is performed per EN 60068-2-6. Shock testing is performed per EN 60068-2-27.

9.4.1.3.1 Ethernet interface

Ethernet connection
Controller Intel I210
Power supply PCIe x1 for 3.3 V
Wiring S/STP (Cat 5e)
Transfer rate 10/100/1000 Mbit/s1)
Cable length Max. 100 m (min. Cat 5e)
LED "Speed" On Off
Green 100 Mbit/s 10 Mbit/s2)
Orange (light) 1000 Mbit/s -
LED "Link" On Off
Orange (light) Link (a connection to an Activity (blinks) (data
Ethernet network exists) is being transferred)

Table 160: 5ACPCE.ETH1-00 - Ethernet interface

1) Switching takes place automatically.
2) The 10 Mbit/s transfer rate / connection is only available if LED "Link" is active at the same time.

9.4.1.4 Driver support

A special driver is necessary to operate Intel Ethernet controller I210. Drivers for approved operating systems are
available for download in the Downloads section of the B&R website (www.br-automation.com) (if required and not
already included in the operating system).
Approved operating systems:

320 Panel PC 900 (Skylake) User's manual V 1.10

 Accessories

• Windows 7
• Windows 10
• B&R Linux
Wake-on-LAN (WoL) and PXE boot are not supported.

Information:
Necessary drivers must be downloaded from the B&R website, not from manufacturer websites.

9.4.1.5 Dimensions

0.8
100.3

58.9
8.3
4.5

35.3

59

68.4

Figure 43: 5ACPCE.ETH1-00 - Dimensions

Panel PC 900 (Skylake) User's manual V 1.10 321

Accessories

9.4.2 5ACPCE.ETH4-00

9.4.2.1 General information

This PCIe card has 4 10/100/1000 Mbit/s network connections and can be used as an additional network interface
in a standard PCI Express x4 slot.
• PCIe x4 Ethernet card
• 4x Ethernet interface (10/100/1000 Mbit/s)

9.4.2.2 Order data

Order number Short description Figure

Interface options
5ACPCE.ETH4-00 PCIe card - 4-port ETH 10/100/1000 - For APC910/PPC900

Table 161: 5ACPCE.ETH4-00 - Order data

9.4.2.3 Technical data

Information:
The following specified characteristic data, features and limit values are only valid for these individual
components and may differ from those of the complete system. The data specified for the complete
system applies to the complete system in which this individual component is used, for example.
Order number 5ACPCE.ETH4-00
General information
B&R ID code EC3B
Diagnostics
Data transfer Yes, using LED status indicator
Certifications
CE Yes
UL cULus E115267
Industrial control equipment
EAC Product family certification
Interfaces
Ethernet
Quantity 4
Controller Intel I350
Variant RJ45, shielded
Transfer rate 10/100/1000 Mbit/s 1)
Line length Max. 100 m between two stations (segment length)
Electrical properties
Power consumption 4W
Operating conditions
Pollution degree per EN 61131-2 Pollution degree 2
Ambient conditions
Temperature
Operation 0 to 55°C 2)
Storage -20 to 60°C
Transport -20 to 60°C
Relative humidity
Operation 5 to 90%, non-condensing
Storage 5 to 95%, non-condensing
Transport 5 to 95%, non-condensing

Table 162: 5ACPCE.ETH4-00 - Technical data

322 Panel PC 900 (Skylake) User's manual V 1.10

 Accessories
Order number 5ACPCE.ETH4-00
Vibration 3)
Operation (continuous) 2 to 9 Hz: 1.75 mm amplitude / 9 to 200 Hz: 0.5 g
Operation (occasional) 2 to 9 Hz: 3.5 mm amplitude / 9 to 200 Hz: 1 g
Storage 2 to 8 Hz: 7.5 mm amplitude / 8 to 200 Hz: 2 g / 200 to 500 Hz: 4 g
Transport 2 to 8 Hz: 7.5 mm amplitude / 8 to 200 Hz: 2 g / 200 to 500 Hz: 4 g
Shock 3)
Operation 15 g, 11 ms
Storage 30 g, 6 ms
Transport 30 g, 6 ms
Elevation
Operation -300 to 3000 m above sea level 2)

Table 162: 5ACPCE.ETH4-00 - Technical data

1) Switching takes place automatically.
2) The maximum ambient temperature is typically derated 1°C per 1000 meters starting at 500 m above sea level.
3) Vibration testing is performed per EN 60068-2-6. Shock testing is performed per EN 60068-2-27.

9.4.2.3.1 Ethernet interface

Ethernet connection
Controller Intel I350
Power supply PCIe x4 for 3.3 V
Wiring S/STP (Cat 5e)
Transfer rate 10/100/1000 Mbit/s1)
Cable length Max. 100 m (min. Cat 5e)
LED "Speed" On Off
Green 100 Mbit/s 10 Mbit/s2)
Orange (light) 1000 Mbit/s -
LED "Link" On Off
Orange (light) Link (a connection to an Activity (blinks) (data
Ethernet network exists) is being transferred)

Table 163: 5ACPCE.ETH4-00 - Ethernet interface

1) Switching takes place automatically.
2) The 10 Mbit/s transfer rate / connection is only available if LED "Link" is active at the same time.

9.4.2.4 Driver support

A special driver is required in order to operate Intel Ethernet controller I350. Drivers for approved operating systems
are available for download in the Downloads section of the B&R website (www.br-automation.com) (if required and
not already included in the operating system).
Approved operating systems:
• Windows 7
• Windows 10
• B&R Linux
Wake-on-LAN (WoL) and PXE boot are not supported.

Information:
Necessary drivers must be downloaded from the B&R website, not from manufacturer websites.

9.4.2.5 Correction of the problem

Under certain circumstances (mainly with older boards with TS77), the PCIe plug-in card 5ACPCE.ETH4-00 may
not be recognized by Windows. In this case, proceed as follows:
1. Set the following setting to "Enabled" in BIOS:
Set Advanced / PCI Express configuration / PCI Express graphics (PEG) port / PCI Express graphics
(PEG) port

Panel PC 900 (Skylake) User's manual V 1.10 323

Accessories

9.4.2.6 Dimensions

Figure 44: 5ACPCE.ETH4-00 - Dimensions

324 Panel PC 900 (Skylake) User's manual V 1.10

 Accessories

9.5 CFast cards

For detailed information about compatible CFast cards, see the aggregate data sheet for CFast cards on the B&R
website.

9.6 Cables
For additional information about compatible cables, see the B&R website (HMI cable manual).

9.7 USB mass storage device

For additional information about compatible USB mass storage devices, see the B&R website
(USB mass storage devices).

Panel PC 900 (Skylake) User's manual V 1.10 325

International and national certifications

10 International and national certifications

10.1 Directives and declarations

10.1.1 CE marking

All directives applicable to the respective product and their harmonized EN standards
are met.

10.1.2 EMC Directive

The products meet the requirements of EU directive "Electromagnetic compatibility 2014/30/EU" and are designed
for industrial applications:
EN 61131-2:2007 Programmable controllers - Part 2: Equipment requirements and tests
EN 61000-6-2:2005 Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) - Part 6-2: Generic standards - Immunity for in-
dustrial environments
EN 61000-6-4:2007 Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) - Part 6-4: Generic standards - Emission stan-
dard for industrial environments

Information:
The declarations of conformity are available on the B&R website under Declarations of conformity.

10.1.3 Low voltage directive

The products meet the requirements of EU directive "Low Voltage Directive 2014/35/EU" and are designed for
industrial applications:
EN 61131-2:2007 Programmable logic controllers - Part 2: Equipment requirements and tests
The low voltage directive applies to products that can be used with a nominal voltage between 50 and 1000 VAC
and between 75 and 1500 VDC.

Information:
Declarations of conformity are available on the B&R website under Declarations of conformity.

326 Panel PC 900 (Skylake) User's manual V 1.10

 International and national certifications

10.2 Certifications

Danger!
A complete system can only receive certification if all individual components installed and connected
in it have the corresponding certifications. If an individual component is used that does not have the
corresponding certification, the complete system will also not be certified.
B&R products and services comply with applicable standards. These are international standards from organizations
such as ISO, IEC and CENELEC, as well as national standards from organizations such as UL, CSA, FCC, VDE,
ÖVE, etc. We pay special attention to the reliability of our products in the industrial sector.

Information:
The certifications valid for the respective product are available on the website and in the user's manual
under the technical data in section "Certifications" or in the associated certificates.

10.2.1 UL certification

Products with this mark are tested by Underwriters Laboratories and listed as "indus-
trial control equipment". The mark is valid for the USA and Canada and facilitates the
certification of your machines and systems in this economic area.

Underwriters Laboratories (UL) per standards UL 61010-1 and UL 61010-2-201

Canadian (CSA) standard per C22.2 No. 61010-1-12 and CSA C22.2 No.
61010-2-201:14
Ind. Cont. Eq.
E115267 The UL certificates are available on the B&R website under Downloads - Certificates
- UL.
When using industrial control equipment per UL 61010-1 / UL 61010-2-201, make sure that the device is classified
as "open type". The prerequisite for certification or operation per UL 61010-1 / UL 61010-2-201 is therefore the
installation of the device in an appropriate protective housing.

10.2.2 GOST-R

Products with this mark are tested by an accredited testing laboratory and permitted
for import to the Russian Federation (based on CE compliance).

10.2.3 EAC

Products with this mark are tested by an accredited test laboratory and permitted to
be imported into the Eurasian Customs Union (based on EU conformity).

Panel PC 900 (Skylake) User's manual V 1.10 327

International and national certifications

10.2.4 KC

Products with this mark are tested by an accredited test laboratory and permitted to
be introduced into the Korean market (based on EU conformity).

10.2.5 RCM

Products with this mark are tested by an accredited test laboratory and certified by
the ACMA. The mark is valid for Australia/Oceania and simplifies the certification of
your machines and systems in this economic area (based on EU conformity).

10.2.6 Certifications for use in potentially explosive environments

10.2.6.1 UL Haz. Loc. Certifications

Products with this mark are tested by Underwriters Laboratories and listed as "indus-
trial control equipment for use in hazardous locations". The mark is valid for the USA
and Canada and simplifies the certification of your machines and systems in this eco-
nomic area.

Underwriters Laboratories (UL) per standard ANSI/ISA 12.12.01

Canadian (CSA) standard per C22.2 no. 213-16

Ind. Cont. Eq. The UL HazLoc certificates are available on the B&R website under Downloads -
for Haz. Locs. Certificates - HazLoc.
Cl. I, Div. 2,
Groups ABCD
E180196 (T4)

Ind.Cont.Eq.
for Haz.Locs.
Cl. I, Div. 2,
Groups ABCD
E180196 (T3C)

10.2.6.1.1 General safety guidelines

PPC900 system with AP923 or AP1000 display units that are certified for use in potentially explosive environments
and carry the marking above are suitable for use in Class I, Division 2, Groups A, B, C and D as well as non-
potentially explosive environments.
Devices with explosion protection are to be used as intended and are only permitted to be operated by knowledge-
able and qualified personnel according to these operating instructions and the corresponding PPC900 and AP923
or AP1000 user's manuals. Operation in any other way endangers the safety and functionality of the devices and
the connected systems. The operator is responsible for following all applicable safety and accident prevention
regulations, as well as adhering to standards.
PPC900 systems with AP923 or AP1000 display units that are certified for use in potentially explosive environments
and carry the marking above correspond to the following standards: UL 508 - 17th Edition, ANSI/ISA 12.12.01:2013,
CSA C22.2 No. 213-M1987, and CSA C22.2 No. 142-M1987.

328 Panel PC 900 (Skylake) User's manual V 1.10

 International and national certifications

10.2.6.1.2 Mounting and installation

PPC900 systems with AP923 or AP1000 display units are only permitted to be installed by knowledgeable and
qualified personnel in accordance with the PPC900 and AP923 or AP1000 user's manuals. Devices must be in-
stalled in a suitable protective housing that can only be opened by using a tool. In order to guarantee sufficient air
circulation, allow the specified amount of space around the device. Use only in environments with pollution degree
2. The maximum ambient temperature varies depending on the individual components being used, see section
"Temperature specifications" on page 24.
The certification marking on the device must be checked before each installation or use of the device in potentially
explosive environments. Additional equipment must be suitable for the operating location. Final assembly must be
approved by the relevant local authorities. Wiring must follow national regulations and meet all legal requirements.
Devices must remain voltage-free until installation work is complete. The tightening torque for the power supply
terminals is 0.5 Nm. Cables must be able to handle a surface temperature of 75°C. PPC900 systems with AP923
or AP1000 display units are only permitted to operated with 24 VDC.
Unshielded/Ungrounded cables are never permitted to be used in potentially explosive areas. Devices must be
securely connected to the potential offset. Power supply, communication and accessory cables must be secured
on the device or control cabinet. Power supply, communication and accessory cables are not permitted to exert
excessive tensile stress on the interfaces. Possible vibrations in the environment must be taken into account for this.

10.2.6.1.3 Operation

To switch PP900 systems with AP923 or AP1000 display units on/off in a potentially explosive area, either the switch
must be located outside the explosive area or a switch certified for use in potentially explosive areas must be used.

Danger!
Explosion hazard: The accessory is not permitted to be connected or disconnected with voltage ap-
plied unless the area is considered nonhazardous and is free of ignitable concentrations!
Explosion hazard: Replacing components may impair eligibility for Class I, Division 2!
Explosion hazard: Fuses or batteries (Renata CR2477N) are not permitted to be removed or replaced
with voltage applied unless the area is considered nonhazardous and is free of ignitable concentra-
tions!

Danger !
Risque d'explosion – Ne pas connecter ou déconnecter un quelconque équipement lorsque le circuit
est sous tension, à moins que la zone soit connue comme étant sans risque et sans concentrations
inflammables!
Risque d'explosion – Le remplacement de composants peut compromettre l’aptitude au respect de la
Classe I, Division 2!
Risque d'explosion – Ne pas retirer ou remplacer les fusibles ou les batteries (Renata CR2477N), sauf
si l'alimentation électrique a été déconnectée ou si la zone est connue comme étant sans risque et
sans concentrations inflammables!
With the exception of USB dongle 0TG1000.01 or in line with the requirements set forth in "Control drawing (non-
incendive)", USB interfaces are not certified for operation in potentially explosive areas and may only be used for
service purposes.

10.2.6.1.4 Maintenance, breakdowns and disassembly

Devices must be shut down and protected against accidental startup. A voltmeter must be used to verify that the
power supply is cut off.
Before removing or installing accessories, components or cables, all power supplies to PPC900 systems with
AP923 or AP1000 display units must be interrupted. Defective devices must only be replaced by knowledgeable
and qualified personnel. Before switching on or connecting the power supply, all covers and system components
must be reinstalled and secured.

Danger!
Nonobservance of these instructions can result in material damage, severe injury or death!

Panel PC 900 (Skylake) User's manual V 1.10 329

International and national certifications

Danger !
Le non-respect de ces instructions peut entraîner des blessures graves ou mortelles!

10.2.6.1.5 USB connection with the Automation Panel 1000

10.2.6.1.5.1 Introduction

The information below describes the use of USB peripheral devices on the front USB interface of the B&R Automa-
tion Panel 1000 in hazardous locations Class I, Division 2, Groups A, B, C and D.

Danger!
RISK OF EXPLOSION
• Before installation or use in potentially explosive atmospheres, the explosion protection class
of the device must be checked according to ANSI/ISA 12.12.01 and CSA C22.2 N°213.
• To switch on/off B&R devices that are installed in potentially explosive atmospheres, at least
one of the following conditions must be met:
° A suitable switch installed outside the hazardous area is used.
° A switch certified according to the hazardous location class and division for tube use
is used.
• As long as the electrical circuit is activated, cables or lines are not permitted to be connected or
disconnected unless the area is knowingly free of flammable concentrations of vapors, gases
and other flammable or combustible materials. This applies to all connections and circuits. This
includes power, ground and network connections as well as series and parallel connections.
• Unshielded/Ungrounded cables are never permitted to be used in potentially explosive atmos-
pheres.
• Only configurations with nonincendive USB devices are permitted to be used.
• The doors and openings of housings must always remain closed. This prevents the accumula-
tion of foreign bodies within the workstation.
Failure to follow this instruction can result in death, serious bodily injury or damage to property!

10.2.6.1.5.2 Description
Nonincendive devices (keyboards, mouse) are certified for use on the front USB interface of the B&R Automation
Panel 1000 (connected device) and are permitted to be connected and disconnected during operation. In addition
to the nonincendive property, devices that can be connected to the front USB interface must meet the following
criteria.
Connected device
Nonincendive device
Front USB pinout with field wiring

1. Vcc
2. D-
3. D+ USB cable USB peripheral
4. GND devices

Shield. GND

Class I, Division 2
Group A, B, C, D
Class I, Division 2
Group A, B, C, D
or non-hazardous location

Front USB interface (USB 2.0):

Open-circuit voltage [Voc] 5.04 V
Short-circuit current [Isc] 1170 mA
Connected capacity [Ca] 20 μF
Connected inductance [La] 16.8 μH

Table 164: Nonincendive electrical circuit parameters for the front USB interface

330 Panel PC 900 (Skylake) User's manual V 1.10

 International and national certifications

The unit concept allows the interconnection of nonincendive devices with connected devices with non-specifically
tested combinations as a system. For this purpose, the permissible values of Voc (or Uo) and Isc (or Io) for the
connected device must be less than or equal to Vmax (Ui) and Imax (Ii) for the nonincendive device, the permissible
values of Ca (Co) and La (Lo) for the connected device must be greater than or equal to Ci + CCable and Li + LCable
for the nonincendive device with field wiring.
The nonincendive device with field wiring must meet the following criteria:
B&R device (connected device) - Connected, nonincendive device with field wiring (mouse, keyboard)
Voc ≤ Vmax
Isc ≤ Imax
Ca ≥ Ci + CCable
La ≥ Li + LCable

Table 165: Connected, nonincendive device with field wiring

If the electrical parameters of the cable are unknown, the following values can be used:
Where CCable = 196.85 pF/m (60 pF/ft) if unknown
Where LCable = 0.656 μH/m (0.20 μH/ft) if unknown
Wiring must be carried out in accordance with national regulations and the requirements of the authorities.
The B&R device must be installed in a suitable protective housing. For installations in Class I, Division 2 hazardous
locations, the housing must be capable of withstanding one or more Division 2 wiring methods.

Warning!
• Replacing components may impair the suitability of the Division 2 hazardous location (classi-
fied) under certain circumstances.
• As long as the area is knowingly at risk of explosion, the device is not permitted to be switched
on or off.
• The nonincendive device with field wiring is not permitted to be connected via a parallel con-
nection. This is valid unless the device has received express permission for this.
The B&R device is suitable for use in Class I, Division 2, Groups A, B, C and D areas. It also provides nonincendive
field wiring for devices in Class I, Division 2, Groups A, B, C and D.

Panel PC 900 (Skylake) User's manual V 1.10 331

Environmentally friendly disposal

11 Environmentally friendly disposal

All programmable logic controllers, operating and monitoring devices and uninterruptible power supplies from B&R
are designed to have as little impact on the environment as possible.

11.1 Separation of materials

To ensure that devices can be recycled in an environmentally friendly manner, it is necessary to separate out the
different materials.
Component Disposal
Programmable logic controllers Electronics recycling
Operating and monitoring devices
Uninterruptible power supplies
Batteries and rechargeable batteries
Cables
Paper/Cardboard packaging Paper/Cardboard recycling
Plastic packaging material Plastic recycling

Disposal must be carried out in accordance with applicable legal regulations.

332 Panel PC 900 (Skylake) User's manual V 1.10

 Appendix A

Appendix A

A.1 Maintenance Controller Extended (MTCX)

The MTCX controller (FPGA processor) is located on the mainboard (part of every system unit) of the PPC900
device.

The MTCX is responsible for the following monitoring and control functions:
• Power on (power OK sequencing) and power failure logic
• Watchdog handling (NMI and reset handling)
• Temperature monitoring
• Fan control
• Key and LED handling/coordination (matrix keyboard on B&R display units)
• Advanced desktop operation (keys, USB forwarding)
• Daisy chain display operation (touch screen, USB forwarding)
• Panel locking mechanism (can be configured using B&R Control Center - ADI driver)
• Backlight control for connected B&R displays
• Statistical data recording (power cycles - records every switch-on, power on and fan hour; each quarter
hour is counted)
• SDL data transfer (display, matrix keyboard, touch screen, service data, USB)
• LED status indicators (Power, HDD, Link, Run)
• Optimal default BIOS are reported to BIOS by the MTCX based on the actual hardware.
The functions of the MTCX can be extended by upgrading its firmware7). The version can be read in BIOS or in
approved Microsoft Windows operating systems using the B&R Control Center.

7) Can be downloaded from the Downloads section of the B&R website (www.br-automation.com).

Panel PC 900 (Skylake) User's manual V 1.10 333

Appendix A

A.A POWERLINK
A.A.1 LED "S/E" (status/error LED)

This LED is a green/red dual LED and indicates the state of the POWERLINK interface. The LED states have a
different meaning depending on the operating mode of the POWERLINK interface.

A.A.1.1 Ethernet mode

In this mode, the interface is operated as an Ethernet interface.

LED "S/E"
Green Red Description
On Off The interface is operated as an Ethernet interface.

Table: LED "S/E": Interface in Ethernet mode

A.A.1.2 POWERLINK V2 mode

Error message
LED "S/E"
Green Red Description
Off On The interface is in error mode (failed Ethernet frames, increased number of collisions on the network, etc.).
Note:
Several red blinking signals are displayed immediately after the device is switched on. These are not errors, however.
Blinking On If an error occurs in the following modes, then the green LED blinks over the red LED:
• PRE_OPERATIONAL_1
• PRE_OPERATIONAL_2
• READY_TO_OPERATE

Status
green
t
Error
red
t
LED "S/E"

Table: LED "S/E" - Error message (interface in POWERLINK mode)

Interface status
LED "S/E"
Green Red Description
Off Off Mode: NOT_ACTIVE
The interface is either in mode NOT_ACTIVE or one of the following modes or errors is present:
• The device is switched off.
• The device is in the startup phase.
• The interface or device is not configured correctly in Automation Studio.
• The interface or device is defective.

Managing node (MN)

The network is monitored for POWERLINK frames. If a frame is not received within the configured time window (timeout), the
interface immediately enters mode PRE_OPERATIONAL_1.
If POWERLINK communication is detected before the time has elapsed, however, the MN is not started.

Controlled node (CN)

The network is monitored for POWERLINK frames. If a frame is not received within the configured time window (timeout), the
interface immediately enters mode BASIC_ETHERNET. If POWERLINK communication is detected before this time expires,
however, the interface immediately enters mode PRE_OPERATIONAL_1.
Flickering Off Mode: BASIC_ETHERNET
(approx. The interface is in mode BASIC_ETHERNET. The interface is operated in Ethernet mode.
10 Hz)
Managing node (MN)
This mode can only be exited by resetting the controller.

Controlled node (CN)

If POWERLINK communication is detected during this mode, the interface enters mode PRE_OPERATIONAL_1.

Table: LED "S/E" - Interface state (interface in POWERLINK mode)

334 Panel PC 900 (Skylake) User's manual V 1.10

 Appendix A
LED "S/E"
Green Red Description
Single flash Off Mode: PRE_OPERATIONAL_1
(approx. 1 Hz) The interface is in mode PRE_OPERATIONAL_1.

Managing node (MN)

The MN is in "reduced cycle" mode. The CNs are configured in this mode.
Cyclic communication is not yet taking place.

Controlled node (CN)

The CN can be configured by the MN in this mode. The CN waits until it receives an SoC frame and then switches to mode
PRE_OPERATIONAL_2.
On Controlled node (CN)
If the red LED lights up in this mode, this means that the MN has failed.
Double flash Off Mode: PRE_OPERATIONAL_2
(approx. 1 Hz) The interface is in mode PRE_OPERATIONAL_2.

Managing node (MN)

The MN starts cyclic communication (cyclic input data is not yet evaluated).
The CNs are configured in this mode.

Controlled node (CN)

The CN can be configured by the MN in this mode. A command then switches the mode to READY_TO_OPERATE.
On Controlled node (CN)
If the red LED lights up in this mode, this means that the MN has failed.
Triple flash Off Mode: READY_TO_OPERATE
(approx. 1 Hz) The interface is in mode READY_TO_OPERATE.

Managing node (MN)

Cyclic and asynchronous communication. Received PDO data is ignored.

Controlled node (CN)

The configuration of the CN is completed. Normal cyclic and asynchronous communication. The transmitted PDO data corre-
sponds to the PDO mapping. However, cyclic data is not yet evaluated.
On Controlled node (CN)
If the red LED lights up in this mode, this means that the MN has failed.
On Off Mode: OPERATIONAL
The interface is in mode OPERATIONAL. PDO mapping is active and cyclic data is evaluated.
Blinking Off Mode: STOPPED
(approx. The interface is in mode STOPPED.
2.5 Hz)
Managing node (MN)
This mode does not occur for the MN.

Controlled node (CN)

Output data is not being output, and no input data is being provided. This mode can only be reached and exited by a corre-
sponding command from the MN.

Table: LED "S/E" - Interface state (interface in POWERLINK mode)

Blink times

Triple flash
200 200 200 200 200 1000

Double flash
200 200 200 1000

Single flash
200 1000

Blinking
200 200

Flickering
All times in ms

Panel PC 900 (Skylake) User's manual V 1.10 335

Appendix A

A.A.1.3 System stop error codes

A system stop error can occur due to incorrect configuration or defective hardware.
The error code is indicated by LED "S/E" blinking red. The blinking signal of the error code consists of 4 switch-on
phases with short (150 ms) or long (600 ms) duration. The error code is repeated every 2 seconds.

RAM error

150 300 150 300 150 300 600 2000

Hardware error

600 300 150 300 150 300 600 2000 All times in ms

Error Error description

RAM error The device is defective and must be replaced.
Hardware error The device or a system component is defective and must be replaced.

A.A.1.4 POWERLINK V2

By default, the POWERLINK interface is operated as a managing node (MN). In the managing node, the node
number is set to a fixed value of 240.
If the POWERLINK node is operated as a controlled node (CN), a node number from 1 to 239 can be set in the
POWERLINK configuration in Automation Studio.

336 Panel PC 900 (Skylake) User's manual V 1.10

 Appendix A

A.B Cable data

Signal Signal
RS232 "RS232 - Bus length and cable type" on page 337 RS422 "RS422 - Bus length and cable type" on page 337
RS485 "RS485 - Bus length and cable type" on page 338 CAN "CAN - Bus length and cable type" on page 338

A.B.1 RS232 - Bus length and cable type

The maximum transfer rate of 115 kbit/s depends on the cable length and type of cable used.
Bus length Transfer rate
≤15 m Typ. 64 kbit/s
≤10 m Typ. 115 kbit/s
≤5 m Typ. 115 kbit/s

Preferably, the cable material used should have the following properties or deviate only slightly from them in order
to achieve an optimal transfer rate.
RS232 cables Property
Signal line
Cable cross section 4x 0.16 mm² (26 AWG), tinned copper stranded wire
Wire insulation PE
Conductor resistance ≤82 Ω/km
Stranding Wires stranded in pairs
Shield Pair shielding with aluminum foil
GND
Cable cross section 1x 0.34 mm² (22AWG/19), tinned copper stranded wire
Wire insulation PE
Conductor resistance ≤59 Ω/km
Outer jacket
Material PUR compound
Properties Halogen-free
Cable shield Tinned copper wire

A.B.2 RS422 - Bus length and cable type

The RTS line must be switched on to activate the transmitter.

The maximum transfer rate of 115 kbit/s depends on the cable length and type of cable used.
Bus length Transfer rate
1200 m Typ. 115 kbit/s

Preferably, the cable material used should have the following properties or deviate only slightly from them in order
to achieve an optimal transfer rate.
RS422 cables Property
Signal line
Cable cross section 4x 0.25 mm² (24AWG/19), tinned copper stranded wire
Wire insulation PE
Conductor resistance ≤82 Ω/km
Stranding Wires stranded in pairs
Shield Pair shielding with aluminum foil
GND
Cable cross section 1x 0.34 mm² (22AWG/19), tinned copper stranded wire
Wire insulation PE
Conductor resistance ≤59 Ω/km
Outer jacket
Material PUR compound
Properties Halogen-free
Cable shield Tinned copper wire

Panel PC 900 (Skylake) User's manual V 1.10 337

Appendix A

A.B.3 RS485 - Bus length and cable type

The maximum transfer rate of 115 kbit/s depends on the cable length and type of cable used.
Bus length Transfer rate
1200 m Typ. 115 kbit/s

Preferably, the cable material used should have the following properties or deviate only slightly from them in order
to achieve an optimal transfer rate.
RS485 cables Property
Signal line
Cable cross section 4x 0.25 mm² (24AWG/19), tinned copper stranded wire
Wire insulation PE
Conductor resistance ≤82 Ω/km
Stranding Wires stranded in pairs
Shield Pair shielding with aluminum foil
GND
Cable cross section 1x 0.34 mm² (22AWG/19), tinned copper stranded wire
Wire insulation PE
Conductor resistance ≤59 Ω/km
Outer jacket
Material PUR compound
Properties Halogen-free
Cable shield Tinned copper wire

A.B.4 CAN - Bus length and cable type

The type of cable to be used depends largely on the required bus length and number of nodes. The bus length is
determined by the transfer rate. Per CiA (CAN in Automation), the maximum bus length is 1000 meters.
The following bus lengths are permitted at a maximum permissible oscillator tolerance of 0.121%:
Bus length1) Transfer rate
≤1000 m Typ. 50 kbit/s
≤200 m Typ. 250 kbit/s
≤100 m Typ. 500 kbit/s
≤20 m Typ. 1 Mbit/s
1) The specified cable length is only valid with the values specified in "CAN driver settings". Cable lengths otherwise depend on the values in the bit timing
register, cable quality and number of nodes.

Preferably, the cable material used should have the following properties or deviate only slightly from them in order
to achieve an optimal transfer rate.
CAN cable Property
Signal line
Cable cross section 2x 0.25 mm² (24AWG/19), tinned copper stranded wire
Wire insulation PE
Conductor resistance ≤82 Ω/km
Stranding Twisted-pair wires
Shield Pair shielding with aluminum foil
GND
Cable cross section 1x 0.34 mm² (22AWG/19), tinned copper stranded wire
Wire insulation PE
Conductor resistance ≤59 Ω/km
Outer jacket
Material PUR compound
Properties Halogen-free
Cable shield Tinned copper wire

A.C Abbreviations
Abbreviations used in the document are explained here.
Abbreviation Stands for Description
NC Normally closed Stands for a normally closed relay contact.
Not connected Used in pinout descriptions if a terminal or pin is not connected on the module
side.
ND Not defined Stands for an undefined value in technical data tables. This may be because the
cable manufacturer has not provided a value for certain technical data.
NO Normally open Stands for a normally open relay contact.
TBD To be defined Used in technical data tables if there is currently no value for specific technical
data. The value will be supplied later.
MTBF Mean time between failures The expected value of the operating time between two consecutive failures.

338 Panel PC 900 (Skylake) User's manual V 1.10

 Appendix A

A.D Viewing angles

For viewing angle specifications (R, L, U, D) of the display types, see the technical data of the individual compo-
nents.
L U

D R

6 o'clock direction

Panel PC 900 (Skylake) User's manual V 1.10 339

Appendix A

A.E Chemical resistance

All panels are made of a coated aluminum support frame.

A.E.1 Autotex panel overlay (polyester)

Unless otherwise specified, the panel overlay is resistant to the following chemicals, materials and substances per
DIN 42115 Part 2 when exposed for up to 24 hours without visible changes:
• Acetaldehyde • Diesel • Sodium carbonate
• Acetone • Diethyl ether • Caustic soda <40%
• Acetonitrile • Diethyl phthalate • Paraffin oil
• Aliphatic hydrocarbons • Dioxan • Phosphoric acid <30%
• Alkali carbonate • Dowandol DRM/PM • Blown castor oil
• Formic acid <50% • Iron II chloride (FeCl2) • Nitric acid <10%
• Ammonia <40% • Iron III chloride (FeCl3) • Hydrochloric acid <36%
• Amyl acetate • Acetic acid <50% • Sea water
• Ethanol • Butyl acetate • Sulphuric acid <10%
• Ether • Ethyl acetate • Silicon oil
• Gasoline • Linseed oil • Tenside
• Bichromate • Aviation fuel • Turpentine oil substitute
• Potassium • Formaldehyde 37 to 42% • Toluene
• Cutting oil • Glycerine • Triacetin
• Brake fluid • Glycol • Trichloracetic acid < 50%
• Butyl CELLOSOLVE (2-Bu- • Isophorone • Trichloroethane
toxyethanol) • Isopropanol • Thinner (white spirit)
• Sodium hypochlorite <20% • Potassium hydroxide • Washing agents
• Cyclohexanol • Potassium carbonate • Water
• Cyclohexanone • Methanol • Hydrogen peroxide <25%
• Decon • Methylisobutylketone (MIBK) • Fabric conditioner
• Diacetone alcohol • Sodium bisulphate • Xylene
• Dibutyl phthalate
Per DIN 42115 Part 2, the panel overlay is resistant to exposure to glacial acetic acid for less than one hour without
visible damage.

340 Panel PC 900 (Skylake) User's manual V 1.10

 Appendix A

A.E.2 Aluminum panel overlay

Unless otherwise specified, the panel overlay is resistant to the following chemicals, materials and substances per
DIN 42115 Part 2 when exposed for up to 24 hours without visible changes:
• Acetaldehyde • DRM/PM • Methanol
• Acetone • Iron chloride • Methylbenzene
• Acetonitrile • Iron II chloride (FeCl2) • Methyl ethyl ketone
• Alkali carbonate • Iron III chloride (FeCl3) • Methylisobutylketone
• Alkane • Acetic acid <50% • Sodium bisulphate
• Formic acid <50% • Butyl acetate • Sodium carbonate
• Ammonia <40% • Ethanol • Sodium hydroxide <40%
• Amyl acetate • Ether • Sodium hypochlorite <20%
• Gasoline • Ethyl acetate • Paraffin oil
• Bichromate • 2-Butoxyethanol (Butyl CEL- • Phosphoric acid <30%
• Brake fluid LOSOVLE) • Phthalate
• Castor oil • Aviation fuel • Nitric acid <10%
• Hydrogen chloride <36% • Formaldehyde 37 to 42% • Sea water
• Cyclohexanol • Gear oil • Cutting oil
• Cyclohexanone • Glycerine • Sulphuric acid <10%
• Decon • Glycol • Turpentine oil replacement
• Diacetone alcohol • Isophorone • Triacetin
• Diesel • Isopropanol • Trichloracetic acid <50%
• Diethyl ether • Potassium • Trichloroethane
• Diethyl phthalate • Potassium carbonate • Washing agents
• Dimethylbenzene • Potassium hydroxide • Water
• Dioxan • White spirit • Hydrogen peroxide <25%
• Dowandol • Linseed oil • Fabric conditioner
The panel overlay is not resistant to the following chemicals:
• Benzyl alcohol • Concentrated caustic solution • Tetrahydrofuran
• Dimethyl formamide • High-pressure steam over
• Concentrated mineral acid 100°C
• Methylene chloride

A.E.3 Coated aluminum front

Unless otherwise specified, the coated aluminum front is resistant to the following chemicals, materials and sub-
stances per DIN 42115 Part 2 when exposed for up to 24 hours without visible changes:
• Formic acid <50% • Gear oil • Phosphoric acid <25%
• Ammonia <40% • Lactic acid <10% • Saline <10%
• Brake fluid • Isopropanol • Sulphuric acid <25%
• Hydrogen chloride <10% • Coolant <4% • Sidolin
• Diesel • Sodium hydroxide <40% • Skydrol
• Acetic acid <50% • Petroleum

The coated aluminum front is not resistant to the following chemicals:

• Acetone
• Ethyl acetate

Panel PC 900 (Skylake) User's manual V 1.10 341

Appendix A

A.E.4 Touch screen

5-wire touch screen (single-touch)

Unless otherwise specified, the touch screen is resistant to the following chemicals, materials and substances
when exposed for up to 1 hour (at 25°C) with no visible changes:
• Acetone • Antifreeze • Methyl ethyl ketone
• Beer • Gear oil • Mineral spirits
• Unleaded gasoline • Ammonia-based glass cleaner • Motor oil
• Chemical cleaning agents • Household detergents • Nitric acid <70%
• Hydrogen chloride <6% • Hexane • Saline solution <5%
• Coca-Cola • n-hexane • Tea
• Diesel • Isopropanol • Turpentine
• Dimethylbenzene • Coffee • Lubricants
• Vinegar • Methylbenzene • Sulphuric acid <40%
• Ethanol • Methylene chloride • Cooking oil

Touch screen generation 2 and 3 (multi-touch)

Unless otherwise specified, the touch screen is resistant to the following chemicals, materials and substances per
ASTM D 1308-02 and ASTM F 1598-95 when exposed for up to 24 hours without visible changes:
• Acetone • Rubber cement • Lubricants
• Ammonia <5% • Isopropanol • Sulphuric acid <40%
• Gasoline • Coffee • Stamping ink
• Beer • Ink • Tea
• Lead • Lipstick • Trichloroethylene
• Brake fluid • Lysol • Water
• Hydrogen chloride <6% • Methylbenzene • White wine vinegar
• Coca-Cola • Methyl ethyl ketone • Windex Original
• Dimethylbenzene • Naphtha
• Ethanol • Nitric acid <70%

342 Panel PC 900 (Skylake) User's manual V 1.10

 Appendix A

A.F Touch screen

A.F.1 Touch screen (multi-touch generation 2)

A.F.1.1 General information

Valid for the following products:

• 5AP933.156B-00 with Rev. ≤ C0
• 5AP933.185B-00 with Rev. ≤ C0
• 5AP933.215C-00 with Rev. ≤ C0
• 5AP933.240C-00 with Rev. ≤ C0

A.F.1.2 Technical data

Information:
The following specified characteristic data, features and limit values are only valid for these individual
components and may differ from those of the complete system. The data specified for the complete
system applies to the complete system in which this individual component is used, for example.
Order number Touchscreen
General information
Technology Projected capacitive touch (PCT)
Light transmission 88 ±2%
Anti-glare coating Optical/Gloss = 70
Operating conditions
Activation Finger, thin glove
Ambient conditions
Temperature
Operation 0 to 50°C
Storage -10 to 70°C
Transport -10 to 70°C
Relative humidity
Operation 90% at max. 35°C
Storage 90% at max. 35°C
Transport 90% at max. 35°C

A.F.1.3 Temperature/Humidity diagram

RH [%]
100
95
90

80

70

60

50 (1)
40

30

20 (2)
10
5
0 T [°C]
-80 -70 -60 -50 -40 -30 -20 -10 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100

Diagram legend
(1) Operation T [°C] Temperature in °C
(2) Storage and transport RH [%] Relative humidity (RH) in percent and non-condensing

Panel PC 900 (Skylake) User's manual V 1.10 343

Appendix A

A.F.2 Touch screen (multi-touch generation 3)

A.F.2.1 General information

Valid for the following products:

A.F.2.2 Technical data

Information:
The following specified characteristic data, features and limit values are only valid for these individual
components and may differ from those of the complete system. The data specified for the complete
system applies to the complete system in which this individual component is used, for example.
Order number Touchscreen
General information
Technology Projected capacitive touch (PCT)
Light transmission >90%
Anti-glare coating Optical/Gloss = 80
Operating conditions
Activation Finger, thin glove
Ambient conditions
Temperature
Operation -10 to 70°C
Storage -40 to 70°C
Transport -40 to 70°C
Relative humidity
Operation Up to 90% at max. 35°C, see diagram for > 35°C.
Storage Up to 90% at max. 35°C, see diagram for > 35°C.
Transport Up to 90% at max. 35°C, see diagram for > 35°C.

A.F.2.3 Temperature/Humidity diagram

RH [%]
100
95
90

80

70

60

50 (2) (1)
40

30

20

10
5
0 T [°C]
-80 -70 -60 -50 -40 -30 -20 -10 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100

Diagram legend
(1) Operation T [°C] Temperature in °C
(2) Storage and transport RH [%] Relative humidity (RH) in percent and non-condensing

344 Panel PC 900 (Skylake) User's manual V 1.10

 Appendix A

A.F.3 5-wire touch screen (single-touch)

A.F.3.1 Technical data

Information:
The following specified characteristic data, features and limit values are only valid for these individual
components and may differ from those of the complete system. The data specified for the complete
system applies to the complete system in which this individual component is used, for example.

Note:
Drivers for this touch screen for approved operating systems are available for download in the Down-
loads section of the B&R website (www.br-automation.com).
Order number Touchscreen 5-Draht
General information
Technology Analog, resistive
Release pressure <1 N
Light transmission 80% ±3%
Service life 10,000,000 touch operations at the same position (release pressure: 250 g, interval: 0.25 s)
Operating conditions
Activation Finger, stylus, credit card, glove
Ambient conditions
Temperature
Operation -20 to 70°C
Storage -40 to 80°C
Transport -40 to 80°C
Relative humidity
Operation 90% at max. 50°C
Storage 90% RH at max. 60°C for 504 hours
Transport 90% RH at max. 60°C for 504 hours

A.F.3.2 Temperature/Humidity diagram

RH [%]
100
95
90

80

70

60

50 (2) (1)
40

30

20

10
5
0 T [°C]
-80 -70 -60 -50 -40 -30 -20 -10 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100

Diagram legend
(1) Operation T [°C] Temperature in °C
(2) Storage and transport RH [%] Relative humidity (RH) in percent and non-condensing

Panel PC 900 (Skylake) User's manual V 1.10 345

Appendix A

A.G Installation compatibility

This section describes the compatibility of the installation dimensions for Power Panel 100/200, Power Panel
300/400, Power Panel 500, Automation Panel 900, Automation Panel 1000, Panel PC 700 and Panel PC 800
devices depending on the respective device diagonals.
The external dimensions of the device types of the respective diagonals are identical.

Information:
Device designation "AP1000" refers to the Automation Panel 1000 as well as to the Panel PC 900, Panel
PC 2100, Panel PC 2200 and Panel PC 3100 with an installed AP1000 panel.
The various device types are abbreviated as follows:
Device type Short form
Power Panel xxx PPxxx
Panel PC xxxx PPCxxxx
Automation Panel xxxx APxxxx

A.G.1 Compatibility overview

The following table gives a brief overview of the PP100/200, PP300/400, PP500, AP900, AP1000, PPC700 and
PPC800 devices. For more information, see section "Compatibility details" on page 348.

Information:
The cutout tolerance for the PP100/200, PP300/400, PP500, AP900, PPC700 and PPC800 is ±0.5 mm.
The cutout tolerance for the AP1000 is +0 mm / -0.5 mm.
Diagonal Format PP100/200 PP300/400 PP500 AP900 AP10001) PPC700 PPC800
Outer dimen- 212 x 156 - 212 x 156 -
Land- sions
scape1 Installation 199 x 143 - 199 x 143 -
dimensions

Outer dimen- 302 x 187 -

Land- sions
5.7"
scape2 Installation 289 x 174 -
dimensions

Outer dimen- 212 x 245 - 212 x 245 -

Por- sions
trait1 Installation 199 x 226.8 199 x 232 - 199 x 232 -
dimensions

Outer dimen- - 212 x 156 - 212 x 156 -

Land- sions
7"
scape1 Installation - 199 x 143 - 199 x 143 -
dimensions

Outer dimen- 323 x 260 -

Land- sions
scape1 Installation 303 x 243 -
dimensions

Outer dimen- 423 x 288 -

Land- sions
10.4"
scape2 Installation 402 x 266.5 403 x 271 402 x 271 403 x 271 402 x 271 -
dimensions

Outer dimen- 323 x 358 -

Por- sions
trait1 Installation 303 x 336 303 x 341 -
dimensions

Outer dimen- 362 x 284 -

Land- sions
12.1"
scape1 Installation 345 x 267 342 x 267 -
dimensions

346 Panel PC 900 (Skylake) User's manual V 1.10

 Appendix A
Diagonal Format PP100/200 PP300/400 PP500 AP900 AP10001) PPC700 PPC800
Outer dimen- 435 x 330
Land- sions
scape1 Installation 415 x 312 415 x 313 415 x 312 415 x 313 415 x 312
dimensions
15"
Outer dimen- 435 x 430 - 435 x 430 -
Por- sions
trait1 Installation 415 x 412 415 x 413 415 x 412 - 415 x 412 -
dimensions

Outer di- - 477 x 390 - 477 x 390 -

Land- mensions
17"
scape1 Installation - 460 x 373 - 460 x 373 -
dimensions

Outer di- - 527 x 421

Land- mensions
19"
scape1 Installation - 510 x 404
dimensions

Outer di- - 583 x 464 -

Land- mensions
21.3"
scape1 Installation - 566 x 447 -
dimensions
1) Device designation "AP1000" refers to the Automation Panel 1000 as well as to Panel PCs installed on AP1000 panels.

Panel PC 900 (Skylake) User's manual V 1.10 347

Appendix A

A.G.2 Compatibility details

A.G.2.1 Example

The dimensions (mm) in the subsequent figures have the following meaning.
A B C

F GH I E

Diagram legend
A Spacing (left) to device edge F Difference value
B Outer dimensions G Installation dimensions/Cutout for PP100/200/300/400 device
C Spacing (right) to device edge H Installation dimensions/Cutout AP900/PP500/PPC700 device
D Spacing (top) to device edge I Outer contour of device
E Spacing (bottom) to device edge

A.G.2.2 5.7" devices

The cutout tolerance for the PP100/200, PP300/400, PP500, AP900, PPC700 and PPC800 is ±0.5 mm.
The cutout tolerance for the AP1000 is +0 mm / -0.5 mm.

Installation compatibility - 5.7" devices - Landscape1

6.5 212 x 156 6.5
6.5

PP100/200/300/400 AP1000

199 x 143

PP500
6.5

Outer contour of device

Cutout for device

The 5.7" Automation Panel 1000, Power Panel 500, Power Panel 300/400 and Power Panel 100/200 devices in
Landscape1 format are 100% compatible.

Installation compatibility - 5.7" devices - Landscape2

6.5 302 x 187 6.5
6.5

PP100/200/300/400

289 x 174

PP500

6.5

Outer contour of device

Cutout for device

The 5.7" Power Panel 500, Power Panel 300/400 and Power Panel 100/200 devices in Landscape2 format are
100% compatible.

348 Panel PC 900 (Skylake) User's manual V 1.10

 Appendix A

Installation compatibility - 5.7" devices - Portrait1

6.5 212 x 245 6.5
6.5

PP100/200/300/400 AP1000
199 x 226.8
199 x 232

PP500

11.7 PP100/200/300/400
6.5 PP500, AP1000
5.2

Outer contour of device

Cutout for PP100/200/300/400 device
Cutout for PP500/AP1000 device

The 5.7" Automation Panel 1000 and Power Panel 500 are not 100% compatible with Power Panel 300/400 and
Power Panel 100/200 devices in Portrait1 format. Automation Panel 1000 and Power Panel 500 devices need a
cutout that is 5.2 mm larger (bottom edge).
The larger cutout can be used conditionally for all devices:
• During installation, it is important to ensure that the PP100/200 and PP300/400 devices are positioned and
installed as centrally as possible in the cutout. If this is not the case, the retaining clips can no longer grip
and impermeability is no longer ensured by the circumferential cord gasket (IP65).

Panel PC 900 (Skylake) User's manual V 1.10 349

Appendix A

A.G.2.3 10.4" devices

The cutout tolerance for the PP100/200, PP300/400, PP500, AP900, PPC700 and PPC800 is ±0.5 mm.
The cutout tolerance for the AP1000 is +0 mm / -0.5 mm.

Installation compatibility - 10.4" devices - Landscape1

10 323 x 260 10
8.5

PP100/200/300/400 PP500 AP900/PPC700 AP1000

303 x 243

PP100/200/300/400 PP500 AP900 AP1000

8.5

Outer contour of device

Cutout for device

10.4" Automation Panel 1000, Automation Panel 900, Panel PC 700, Power Panel 500, Power Panel 300/400 and
Power Panel 100/200 devices in Landscape1 format are 100% compatible.

Installation compatibility - 10.4" devices - Landscape2

10 423 x 288 10
8.5

PP100/200/300/400 AP900/PPC700

402 x 266.5
402 x 271
403 x 271

PP500 AP1000
4.5

13 PP100/200/300/400
8.5 AP900, PPC700
8.5 PP500, AP1000
Outer contour of device
Cutout for PP100/200/300/400 device 0.5

Cutout for AP900/PPC700 device

Cutout for PP500/AP1000 device

10.4" Automation Panel 1000, Automation Panel 900, Panel PC 700 and Power Panel 500 devices are not 100%
compatible with Power Panel 300/400 or Power Panel 100/200 devices in Landscape2 format. Automation Panel
1000, Automation Panel 900, Panel PC 700 and Power Panel 500 devices need a cutout that is 4.5 mm larger
(bottom edge) and 0.5 mm wider (left and right).
The larger cutout can be used conditionally for all devices:
• During installation, it is important to ensure that the PP100/200 and PP300/400 devices are positioned and
installed as centrally as possible in the cutout. If this is not the case, the retaining clips can no longer grip
and impermeability is no longer ensured by the circumferential cord gasket (IP65).

350 Panel PC 900 (Skylake) User's manual V 1.10

 Appendix A

Installation compatibility - 10.4" devices - Portrait1

10 323 x 358 10
8.5

PP100/200/300/400 AP900/PPC700
303 x 336
303 x 341

PP500 AP1000
5

13.5 PP100/200/300/400
8.5 AP900, AP1000, PPC700, PP500

Outer contour of device

Cutout for PP100/200/300/400 device

Cutout for AP900/AP1000/PPC700/PP500 device

Figure 45: Installation compatibility - 10.4" devices - Portrait1

10.4" Automation Panel 1000, Automation Panel 900, Panel PC 700 and Power Panel 500 devices are not 100%
compatible with Power Panel 300/400 or Power Panel 100/200 devices in Portrait1 format. Automation Panel 1000,
Automation Panel 900, Panel PC 700 and Power Panel 500 devices need a cutout that is 5 mm larger (bottom
edge).
The larger cutout can be used conditionally for all devices:
• During installation, it is important to ensure that the PP100/200/300/400 devices are positioned and installed
as centrally as possible in the cutout. If this is not the case, the retaining clips can no longer grip and
impermeability is no longer ensured by the circumferential cord gasket (IP65).

Panel PC 900 (Skylake) User's manual V 1.10 351

Appendix A

A.G.2.4 12.1" devices

The cutout tolerance for the PP100/200, PP300/400, PP500, AP900, PPC700 and PPC800 is ±0.5 mm.
The cutout tolerance for the AP1000 is +0 mm / -0.5 mm.

Installation compatibility - 12.1" devices - Landscape1

10 AP900, PPC700, PP500, AP1000 10 AP900, PPC700, PP500, AP1000
8.5 PP100/200/300/400 362 x 284 8.5 PP100/200/300/400
8.5

PP100/200/300/400 AP900/PPC700
345 x 267
342 x 267

PP500 AP1000

8.5
1.5 1.5

Outer contour of device

Cutout for PP100/200/300/400 device

Cutout for AP900/PPC700/PP500/AP1000 device

12.1" Automation Panel 1000, Automation Panel 900, Panel PC 700 and Power Panel 500 devices are not 100%
compatible with Power Panel 300/400 or Power Panel 100/200 devices in Landscape1 format. Power Panel
300/400 and Power Panel 100/200 devices need a cutout that is 1.5 mm wider (left and right).
The larger cutout can be used conditionally for all devices:
• During installation, it is important to ensure that the AP1000, AP900, PPC700 and PP500 devices are
positioned and installed as centrally as possible in the cutout.

352 Panel PC 900 (Skylake) User's manual V 1.10

 Appendix A

A.G.2.5 15" devices

The cutout tolerance for the PP100/200, PP300/400, PP500, AP900, PPC700 and PPC800 is ±0.5 mm.
The cutout tolerance for the AP1000 is +0 mm / -0.5 mm.

Installation compatibility - 15" devices - Landscape1

0.5
10 435 x 330 10 8.5 PP500, AP1000
9 PP100/200/300/400, AP900, PPC700, PPC800

PP100/200/300/400 PP500 AP900/PPC700 AP1000 PPC800

415 x 312
415 x 313
0.5

PP100/200/300/400 PP500 AP900 AP1000

9 PP100/200/300/400, AP900, PPC700, PPC800
8.5 PP500, AP1000
Outer contour of device
Cutout for PP100/200/300/400/AP900/PPC700/PPC800 device
Cutout for PP500/AP1000 device

15" Automation Panel 1000 and Power Panel 500 devices are not 100% compatible with Power Panel 100/200,
Power Panel 300/400, Automation Panel 900, Panel PC 700 and Panel PC 800 devices in Landscape1 format.
Automation Panel 1000 and Power Panel 500 devices need a cutout that is 0.5 mm larger (top and bottom edge).
The larger cutout can be used conditionally for all devices:
• During installation, it is important to ensure that the PP100/200, PP300/400, AP900, PPC700 and PPC800
devices are positioned and installed as centrally as possible in the cutout. If this is not the case, the retaining
clips can no longer grip and impermeability is no longer ensured by the circumferential cord gasket (IP65).

Installation compatibility - 15" devices - Portrait1

0.5

10 435 x 430 10
8.5 PP500/AP1000
9 PP100/200/300/400/AP900/PPC700

PP100/200/300/400 AP900
415 x 412
415 x 413

PP500 AP1000
9 PP100/200/300/400/AP900/PPC700
8.5 PP500/AP1000
0.5

Outer contour of device

Cutout for PP100/200/300/400/AP900/PPC700 device

Cutout for PP500 and AP1000 device

15" Automation Panel 1000 and Power Panel 500 devices are not 100% compatible with Power Panel 100/200,
Power Panel 300/400, Automation Panel 900 and Panel PC 700 devices in Portrait1 format. Automation Panel
1000 and Power Panel 500 devices need a cutout that is 0.5 mm larger (top and bottom edge).
The larger cutout can be used conditionally for all devices:
• During installation, it is important to ensure that the PP100/200, PP300/400, AP900 and PPC700 devices
are positioned and installed as centrally as possible in the cutout. If this is not the case, the retaining clips
can no longer grip and impermeability is no longer ensured by the circumferential cord gasket (IP65).

Panel PC 900 (Skylake) User's manual V 1.10 353

Appendix A

A.G.2.6 17" devices

The cutout tolerance for the PP100/200, PP300/400, PP500, AP900, PPC700 and PPC800 is ±0.5 mm.
The cutout tolerance for the AP1000 is +0 mm / -0.5 mm.

Installation compatibility - 17" devices - Landscape1

8.5 477 x 390 8.5
8.5

460 x 373

AP900/PPC700

8.5

Outer contour of device

Cutout for device

The 17" Automation Panel 900 and Panel PC 700 in Landscape1 format are 100% compatible.

A.G.2.7 19" devices

The cutout tolerance for the PP100/200, PP300/400, PP500, AP900, PPC700 and PPC800 is ±0.5 mm.
The cutout tolerance for the AP1000 is +0 mm / -0.5 mm.

Installation compatibility - 19" devices - Landscape1

8.5 527 x 421 8.5
8.5

AP900/PPC700 AP1000
510 x 404

PPC800

8.5

Outer contour of device

Cutout for device

The 19" Automation Panel 1000, Automation Panel 900, Panel PC 700 and Panel PC 800 in Landscape1 format
are 100% compatible.

354 Panel PC 900 (Skylake) User's manual V 1.10

 Appendix A

A.G.2.8 21.3" devices

The cutout tolerance for the PP100/200, PP300/400, PP500, AP900, PPC700 and PPC800 is ±0.5 mm.
The cutout tolerance for the AP1000 is +0 mm / -0.5 mm.

Installation compatibility - 21.3" devices - Landscape1

8.5 583 x 464 8.5
8.5

566 x 447

AP900

8.5

Outer contour of device

Cutout for device

Panel PC 900 (Skylake) User's manual V 1.10 355